MRI Medical Records User Manual by Zcc38aCl

VIEWS: 15 PAGES: 716

									Medical Records Module User Manual

           VERSION:   4.8

           MAY 23, 2000
Medical Records Module User Manual                                    TABLE OF CONTENTS



1     Introduction.............................................................1

2     System Conventions.......................................................6
2.1       Security and Patient Confidentiality.................................7
2.2       Standard Menus.......................................................9
2.3       Identifying Patients................................................22
2.3.1       Fast Search Routine...............................................26
2.3.2       Soundex a Name Routine............................................28
2.4       Identifying Doctors.................................................29

3     Role of Dictionaries....................................................31
3.1       Dictionary Conventions..............................................33
3.2       List Dictionary Routines............................................35

4     Using Patient (MPI Data) Routines.......................................38
4.1       Enter/Edit Patient (MPI Data).......................................40
4.2       View Patient (MPI Data).............................................55
4.3       Print Patient (MPI Data)............................................59
4.4       Print Missing Data List.............................................62
4.5       Delete/Restore Patient..............................................64
4.6       List PMM Visit Data File............................................67

5     Using Demo Recall Routines..............................................69
5.1       Edit Data...........................................................70
5.1.1       Patient Demographics..............................................72
5.1.2       Patient's Address, Employer, Person to Notify, Next of Kin........77
5.1.3       Guarantor, Guarantor's Employer, Order of Insurances..............91
5.1.4       Insurance Data...................................................100
5.1.5       UB82 Data (and Allergies)........................................110
5.2       View Data..........................................................114
5.3       Print Data.........................................................118

6     Managing Unit Numbers..................................................120

7      Additional Patient Routines............................................122
7.1        Edit Unit Number...................................................123
7.2        Delete/Restore Patient.............................................128
7.3        Merge Patients.....................................................131
7.4        Unmerge Patients...................................................139
7.5        Edit EPI Number....................................................143
7.6        Next EPI Number To Be Assigned.....................................145
7.7        Increase Next EPI # Assignment.....................................147
7.8        List Available EPI Numbers.........................................149
7.9        Switch Visit.......................................................151
7.10       Verifying Unit Number Assignments..................................155
7.10.1       Next Unit Number to be Assigned..................................156
7.10.2       Increase Next Unit Number Assignment.............................158
7.10.3       List Available Unit Numbers......................................160
7.10.4       Verify Daily Assignments.........................................161

8     Critial Care Indicators and Adverse Drug Information...................165
8.1       Enter/Edit MRI CCI CDS Name........................................166
8.2       Enter/Edit MRI CCI CDS.............................................167
8.3       View MRI CCI CDS...................................................169
8.4       Seal Patient EMR...................................................171
8.5       Unseal Patient EMR.................................................175
8.6       List Sealed/Unsealed EMRs..........................................179
8.7       List Sealed/Unsealed EMR Audit Detail..............................180
8.8       Enter/Edit Forms Manually..........................................182
8.9       Delete Forms.......................................................186
8.10       Audit Trail Inquiry................................................189

9      Reporting Medical Records Information..................................191

10     Logs routine menu......................................................192
10.1       Print Unit Number Assignment Log...................................194
10.2       Monthly Assignments by Name........................................196
10.3       Monthly Assignments by Number......................................198
10.4       Fast Input Log.....................................................200
10.5       Delete/Restore Log.................................................202
10.6       Merge/Unmerge Log..................................................204
10.7       Edit Transaction Log...............................................206
10.8       Edit Transaction Log By Patient....................................208

11     Other Routines Menu....................................................211
11.1       Population Count...................................................213
11.2       Compile Duplicate Patients List....................................215
11.3       Print Duplicate Patients List......................................219
11.4       Duplicate HC/SS # Report...........................................221
11.5       Print Swipe Cards..................................................222

12     The Incomplete Records Feature.........................................224

13     Additional ICR routines................................................229
13.1       Setting Up Your Dictionaries.......................................233
13.1.1       Enter/Edit Incomplete Reasons....................................234
13.1.2       Enter/Edit Delinquent Days for Patient Types.....................238
13.1.3       Enter/Edit Default Date Available................................240
13.1.4       List Incomplete Reasons..........................................241
13.2       Processing Incomplete Records......................................243
13.2.1       Process Incomplete Records.......................................245
13.2.2       Move Record......................................................258
13.2.3       Suspend/Resume Process...........................................264
13.2.4       Enter/Edit Doctor Availability...................................268
13.2.5       Complete Records for One Doctor..................................270
13.2.6       Delete Incomplete Record.........................................274
13.2.7       Enter Doctor Information for the Doctor Visit Log................277
13.3       Edit Portion Name..................................................280
13.4       Document History Report............................................283
13.5       Document Error Report..............................................284
13.6       Scan Station Error Report..........................................285
13.7       Scan Station Error Audit Trail.....................................287
13.8       Reporting Incomplete Records Information...........................288

14     ICR lists..............................................................291
14.1       List Incomplete Records by Terminal Digit..........................297
14.11      List Incomplete Records by Days Outstanding........................299
14.111     List Incomplete Records by Patient Name............................301
14.1111    List Incomplete Records by Doctor and Number.......................303
14.11111 List Incomplete Records by Doctor and Days Outstanding.............308
14.111111 List Incomplete Records by Doctor and Patient Name.................312
14.1111111List Incomplete Records by Reason and Doctor.......................316
14.11111111List Incomplete Records by Locator Recipient......................321
14.111111111List Incomplete Records by Completed Dates by Doctor.............328
14.1111111111Average Days To Complete........................................332
14.11111111111Doctor Visit Log...............................................336
14.111111111111Count Incomplete Records......................................337
14.1111111111111Delinquent Record Count......................................338
14.11111111111111Audit Trail Inquiry.........................................339
14.111111111111111Print (Incomplete) Record..................................343
14.1111111111111111Print a Record's Incomplete Portions......................345
14.11111111111111111Productivity Report......................................347
14.111111111111111111Analysis Report By User And Provider....................348
14.1111111111111111111Completion Report By User And Provider.................350
14.1111111111111111112Printing Notification Letters..........................352
14.1111111111111111112.1Print Notification Letters...........................353

15     The   Record Locator Feature.............................................359
15.1         Setting Up Your Dictionaries.......................................366
15.1.1         Enter/Edit Locator Recipients....................................367
15.1.2         List Record Recipients...........................................372
15.1.3         Purge Recipents..................................................374
15.2         Entering Record Locator Information................................375
15.2.1         Sign Out & Reserve Record........................................376
15.2.2         Return & Sign Out Reserved Records...............................384
15.2.3         Sign Out for One Recipient (Batch Sign Out)......................389
15.2.4         Reserve Record...................................................396
15.2.5         Print Duplicate Outguides & Labels...............................401
15.3         Reporting Record Locator Information...............................403
15.3.1         View Record......................................................404

16     Additional Locator Routines............................................407
16.1       Audit Trail Inquiry................................................410
16.11      Productivity Report................................................412
16.111     Recipient Inquiry..................................................413

17     Additional Locator Routines............................................415
17.1       List Locator Records by Terminal Digit.............................416
17.11      List Locator Records by Recipient..................................418
17.111     List Locator Records by Reservations...............................422
17.112     Printing Reminder Letters..........................................426
17.112.1     Print Reminder Letters...........................................427

18    The Correspondence Feature.............................................431

19     Correspondence Routines................................................435
19.1       Request Routines...................................................438
19.1.1       Enter/Edit Requests..............................................440
19.1.2       Process Requests.................................................452
19.1.3       View Request.....................................................459
19.1.4       View Request By Patient..........................................462
19.1.5       Purge Request....................................................466
19.2       Report Routines....................................................470
19.2.1       Compile Reports..................................................473
19.2.2       List Reports.....................................................482
19.2.3       Print Reports....................................................484
19.2.4       Purge Reports....................................................492
19.2.5       Productivity Report..............................................495
19.3       Correspondence Dictionary Routines.................................496
19.3.1       How to Define Selection Criteria.................................497
19.3.1.1       Step 1: Entering Select Fields................................499
19.3.1.2       Step 2: Including and Excluding Requests......................500
19.3.1.3       Step 3: Entering Values.......................................504
19.3.1.4       Guidelines for Defining Selection Criteria.....................509
19.3.2       Enter/Edit Dictionary Routines...................................510
19.3.2.1       Selection Dictionary...........................................511
19.3.2.2       Requestor Dictionary...........................................516
19.3.2.3       Type Dictionary................................................520
19.3.2.4       Correspondence Reason Dictionary...............................523
19.3.2.5       Letter.........................................................525
19.3.2.6       Requested Information Dictionary...............................529
19.3.2.7       CDS Name.......................................................531
19.3.3       List Fields......................................................532
19.3.4       Purge Requestor..................................................537

20    Letters, Outguides and Labels: Dictionary Routines....................538
20.1      Creating Letters, Outguides and Labels.............................539
20.1.1      Notification Letter Data Elements................................545
20.1.2      Reminder Letter Data Elements....................................549
20.1.3      Correspondence Letter Data Elements..............................552
20.1.4       Outguide and Label Data Elements.................................555
20.2       Guidelines: Entering/Editing Letters, Outguides and Labels........557
20.3       Sample Letters, Outguides and Labels...............................560
20.4       Enter/Edit Routines for Letters, Outguides and Labels..............569
20.4.1       Enter/Edit Notification Letter...................................570
20.4.2       Enter/Edit Reminder Letter.......................................574
20.4.3       Enter/Edit (Correspondence) Letter...............................578
20.4.4       Enter/Edit Outguide and Label....................................582
20.5       Listing Entries in Letter Dictionaries.............................588

21     View Dictionaries......................................................590

22     View Dictionaries......................................................591

23     Enter/Edit OA Message Dictionary.......................................593

24     Conversion Routines....................................................595

25     Tape/PC Routines Menu..................................................596
25.1       Fast Input.........................................................599
25.1.1       List Unconverted Unit Numbers....................................604
25.1.2       Edit Unconverted Unit Numbers....................................605

26    Tape Routines..........................................................607
26.1      Load Conversion Tape...............................................608
26.2      List Conversion Tape Errors........................................614
26.3      Create Microfiche Tape.............................................617
26.4      Create MRI Conversion Tape.........................................619
26.5      List MRI Conversion Tape Summary...................................622
26.6      View MRI Conversion Tape Status....................................623
26.7      Create DRC Conversion Tape.........................................624
26.8      Load DRC Conversion Tape...........................................626
26.9      List DRC Conversion Tape Errors....................................628
26.10     Create MRI Conversion PC File......................................630
26.11     Create DRC Conversion PC File......................................631

27     Change User's Sign-On Facility Routine.................................633

28     System Status..........................................................634

29     View Locks.............................................................635
29.1       MRI Background Job Status..........................................637
29.2       MRI File Maintenance Status........................................639

30     Archival Routines......................................................640
30.1       Print Record Subset................................................643
30.2       Cache Record Subsets...............................................647
30.3       Edit Archival Form Assignments.....................................650
30.4       Deindex Archival Forms.............................................655
30.5       View/Print Deindexed Archival Forms................................658
       Appendix A: The Interaction Between the MRI & ADM Modules.............660
       Appendix B: The Search of the Master Patient Index....................663
       Appendix C: Soundex Methods--Standard vs. Russell.....................675
       Appendix D: The LINK..................................................678
       Appendix E: Multifacility Systems.....................................684
       Appendix F: Patient Numbers...........................................686

     INDEX....................................................................694
Introduction (1)                                                        Page 1


Chapter 1:   Introduction


Overview of the Medical Records Module

MEDITECH's Medical Records Module replaces manual Master Patient Index (MPI)
systems. It allows Medical Records Department personnel to rapidly and
accurately enter and retrieve patient data, process incomplete records and
monitor the location of records checked out of the department. The system
includes features for:


    *   Identifying patients

    *   Entering/editing and displaying patient data in the MPI and Demo Recall
        files

    *   Identifying available unit numbers and verifying unit number assignments

    *   Reporting Medical Records Department activities

    *   Processing and reporting incomplete records information

    *   Signing out, reserving and returning records and reporting record
        locator information

    *   Processing requests for medical information and reporting correspondence
        activities

    *   Printing Notification, Reminder and Correspondence Letters

    *   Creating and viewing dictionary entries that contain information unique
        to your hospital

    *   Converting your medical records to the MEDITECH system



This manual describes each of these features in detail.
Introduction (1)                                                        Page 2



Role of the Medical Records Module in MIS

The Medical Records Module plays an important role in MEDITECH's integrated
medical information system network. Both the Admissions and Medical Records
Modules allow users to:

    *   Search the Master Patient Index (MPI) rapidly and accurately for
        previously entered patient data

    *   Enter/edit patient demographic data

    *   Assign unit numbers (medical record numbers) to new patients during
        the admissions process



Demo Recall Feature

Since both the Medical Records and Admissions Modules access the same Demo
Recall files, MEDITECH's system eliminates the confusion which can result when
separate hospital departments try to maintain duplicate patient demographic
records.

In addition, in cases where several facilities (e.g., hospital, clinic, etc.)
share one Medical Records database (i.e., the MPI and Demo Recall files), users
signed on to any facility can access the same Demo Recall files. (See Appendix
E for more information on such multifacility systems.)



Unit Number Edits

MEDITECH's Medical Records Module sends all unit number edits directly to
MEDITECH's Admissions Module (see Appendix A). Unit number edits are also
sent directly to all other MEDITECH modules that use unit numbers (e.g., the
Anatomical Pathology Module).

In addition, the Medical Records Module provides reports (Unit Number
Assignment Log, Monthly Assignments by Name, Monthly Assignments by Unit
Number, etc.) which allow Medical Records Department personnel to examine unit
number assignments made from any module.
Introduction (1)                                                       Page 3



Purpose of the Manual

This manual explains how you can use MEDITECH's Medical Records Module to
manage your hospital's medical records.

The module's enter/edit routines allow you to update the information in the
Master Patient Index (MPI) and the Demo Recall feature. Incomplete Records
routines allow you to manage the processing of medical records with incomplete
portions. Record Locator routines allow you to keep track of records when
they are signed out to recipients outside of the Medical Records Department.
In addition, when the Incomplete Records and Record Locator features are
LINKED, they interact to expedite the tracking of incomplete records.
Correspondence routines allow you to oversee the processing of requests for
medical information from the time the request arrives at your Medical Records
Department to the time you send the requested information.

This manual documents these routines, and all other routines in the module.
Figures and tables, which further illustrate the way various routines and
features interact, are also included.



Organization of the Manual

The manual's introductory chapters provide the information you will need to
gain an overall understanding of the Medical Records Module. They include an
overview of the module and samples of the standard menus supplied by MEDITECH,
as well as instructions for answering key MRI prompts.

The bulk of the manual documents each of the module's routines, which are
grouped according to user tasks, such as:

    *   Entering/editing patient data

    *   Identifying available unit numbers

    *   Processing incomplete records

    *   Reporting record locator information

    *   Processing requests for medical information


Other sections describe how you can use dictionaries to create standard
letters, outguides and labels.

Appendices at the end of the manual elaborate on some of the special features
of the module: the interaction between the Medical Records and Admissions
modules, the search of the Master Patient Index, the Soundex methods, and the
LINK between the Incomplete Records and Record Locator features.

Additional appendices provide an overview of the features of multifacility
systems and a detailed explanation of the role of unit numbers and other
Introduction (1)                                                        Page 4



numbers.


Documentation of Individual Routines

The documentation for each routine is divided into three sections:


    1)   Description of the Routine

            *   Explains what the routine accomplishes

            *   Tells you how to carry out the routine

            *   Explains when you should use the routine


    2)   Screen Display

            *   Provides a copy of what you see on your terminal when you select
                the routine

    3)   Dialogue

            *   Provides specific instructions for responding to each prompt in
                the routine



Reference Tools

The Table of Contents and the Index are the two most important tools for
locating information about the module. Appendices describe some of the
module's features in greater detail.


Table of Contents......lists the name and page number of every overview and
                       routine description in the module.

Index................. alphabetically lists all routines in the module, as well
                       as key concepts, phrases and prompts. Consult it when
                       you need information about terms, concepts, etc.

Appendix A............ documents the interaction between the Medical Records
                       Module and the Admissions Module.

Appendix B............ provides an in-depth explanation of the search of the
                       Master Patient Index.

Appendix C............ provides a comparison of the Standard and Russell
                       Soundex methods.

Appendix D.............summarizes the interaction between the Incomplete
Introduction (1)                                                        Page 5



                      Records and Record Locator features when they are
                      LINKED and NOT LINKED.

Appendix E.............provides an overview of multifacility systems.

Appendix F.............summarizes the role of unit numbers and other
                       numbers, and illustrates how they are used to
                       identify patients.
System Conventions (2)                                                 Page 6



Chapter 2:   System Conventions


Most of MEDITECH's MAGIC modules employ the same conventions for signing on,
entering and filing information, obtaining on-line help, etc. They are
described in detail in MEDITECH's NPR System Conventions User Manual.

However, there are some conventions that are specific to the Medical Records
Module. Separate sections within this chapter explain

    *   system security and patient confidentiality

    *   the module's routines and menus

    *   how to identify patients

    *   how to identify doctors


System conventions for dictionaries are described in the next chapter, "Role of
Dictionaries: Overview."
Security and Patient Confidentiality (2.1)                             Page 7



2.1:       Security and Patient Confidentiality


To protect the confidentiality and integrity of patient data, MEDITECH designs
its systems with several layers of security. As a result, users are allowed
varying degrees of access to the modules's menus and routines. These security
features are explained below.



User Password

You must have a password to sign on to the system. This limits access to the
system to authorized users. Each authorized user is assigned a password (a
unique word or combination of characters) that is entered for the user mnemonic
in the MIS User Dictionary.



Access to Menus and Routines

MEDITECH's software allows your hospital to create custom menus. Managers can
limit their employees' access to only the menus or routines they need to do
their jobs. For instance, a supervisor can set up a menu for a staff member
that allows him or her access to the Fast Input Routine and Enter/Edit Patient
Routine, but not the Edit Unit Number Routine. If you wish to allow your
staff members to view information without the ability to change it, you can
give access to the view-only versions of

       *    some routines such as the View Demo Recall routine

       *    dictionary routines found on the View Dictionaries Menu


(Pictures of the standard menus for the Medical Records Module appear in the
next section.)

The supervisor, however, could have access to all of the Medical Records
Module's menus and routines. Audit trail and other report routines allow
supervisors to track edits made to the entries.



Limited Access to Patient Records

The Medical Records Module preserves the integrity of patient data by allowing
only one user to access a patient's record at a time.

For example, if someone is editing a patient's Master Patient Index data, and
another user attempts to access the same patient's record in another Medical
Records Module routine, the system refuses the second user and informs him or
her that this patient's record is in use and to try again later.
Security and Patient Confidentiality (2.1)                               Page 8




Patient Confidentiality

The Admissions Module allows your hospital to assign any patient a
confidential status. Only authorized users are allowed access to
information for confidential patients.   Unauthorized users are denied access
to these patients, and instead receive a hospital-defined message such as:

                           << CONFIDENTIAL PATIENT >>

When a patient has been flagged as a confidential patient in the Admissions
Module, the message **CONFIDENTIAL** appears

     *   to the right of the PATIENT field in the

             -Enter/Edit Patient Routine

             -View Data Routine of the Demo Recall Feature

             -View Patient Routine of the Master Patient Index Feature

     *   to the right of the patient's name on the Demo Recall Print Report,
         generated via the Print Data Routine of the Demo Recall Feature

     *   below the patient's unit number on the Patient's Data Report generated
         via the Print Patient Routine of the Master Patient Index Feature

     *   below the patient's name in the Fast Search Routine


These flags are set in the Admission Module when an admissions staff person

     *   assigns a confidential status to any patient during his or her visit to
         the hospital via the Enter/Edit VIP/Confidential Status Routine

     *   assigns a patient (during admissions or registration) to a location
         designated as confidential by the hospital

     *   transfers a patient to a confidential location via the Transfer
         Routine or the Swap Bed Routine in the ADM Inpatient Menu


For more information, see the following sections in the Admissions Module User
Manual titled:

     *   System Security

     *   Assigning VIP/Confidential Status To Patients

     *   Edit VIP/Confidential Status
Standard Menus (2.2)                                                       Page 9



2.2:       Standard Menus


A number of routines in MEDITECH's Medical Records Module allow your Medical
Records Department to

       *    gather pertinent patient information

       *    generate reports

       *    monitor the progress of incomplete records

       *    keep track of records while they are signed out of the Medical Records
            Department

       *    keep track of requests for medical information


You select the routine you wish to use from a series of routines displayed on
a menu screen.

The standard Main Menu supplied by MEDITECH is shown on the next page,
followed by the four standard secondary menus:

       *    Additional Patient Routines

       *    Additional Incomplete Records Routines

       *    Additional Locator Routines

       *    Correspondence Routines

       *    View Dictionaries


There are also two tertiary menus (Unconverted Unit Numbers and the Spooling
Menu). See the "Unconverted Unit Numbers" section of Chapter 15 for a sample
of the Unconverted Unit Numbers Menu. See the MIS User Manual for a sample of
the Spooling Menu.
Standard Menus (2.2)                                                  Page 10




+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|               ----MEDITECH Medical Records Module Main Menu----               |
|Select?                                                                        |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                                                               |
|0. Sign-Off                                                                    |
|                       --- Patient Routines ---                                |
|10. Enter/Edit Patient                   21. Print Missing Data List           |
|11. Verify Daily Assignments             22. Print Unit Number Assignment Log |
|12. View Patient                         26. Fast Search                       |
|13. View Patient (Summary)               27. List PMM Visit Data File          |
|14. Print Patient                                                              |
|                                         30. Additional Patient Routines       |
|                                                                               |
|    --- Incomplete Records ---               --- Record Locator ---            |
|40. Process Incomplete Record            70. Sign Out & Reserve Record         |
|41. Suspend/Resume Process               71. Return & Sign Out Reserved Records|
|42. Complete For One Doctor              72. Sign Out For One Recipient        |
|43. Print Record                         73. View Record                       |
|45. Print Notification Letters           75. Print Reminder Letters            |
|                                                                               |
|50. ICR Lists                            80. Locator Lists                     |
|                                                                               |
|60. Additional ICR Routines              90. Additional Locator Routines       |
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|100. Correspondence Routines            105. View Dictionaries                 |
|200. System Status                                                             |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+



The Additional Patient Routines menu contains routines which enable you to
perform various functions that help in the management of the Medical Records
Module. Some of these functions are: editing of unit and EPI numbers,
compiling and printing duplicate patients in the MPI, editing and viewing of
Demo Recall, printing of swipe cards, Archival Routines and conversion tape
routines.
Standard Menus (2.2)                                                    Page 11




+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                 ----MRI Additional Patient Routines Menu----                  |
|Select?                                                                        |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                                                               |
|    ------Enter/Edit------                     -- Demo Recall --               |
|11. Edit Unit Number                       51. View Data                       |
|12. Delete/Restore Patient                 52. Print Data                      |
|13. Merge Patients                         53. Edit Data                       |
|14. Unmerge Patients                                                           |
|15. Fast Input                                 -- Tape/PC Routines ---         |
|16. Edit EPI Number                        60. Tape/PC Routines Menu           |
|17. Switch Visit                                                               |
|                                               ------Utilities-------          |
|    ----Duplicate Patients----             70. Enter/Edit MRI CCI CDS          |
|21. Compile List                           71. View MRI CCI CDS                |
|22. Print List                                                                 |
|23. Duplicate HC/SS # Report                   ------Form Routines-------      |
|                                           80. Enter/Edit Forms Manually       |
|    --Other Routines---                    81. Delete Forms                    |
|30. Other Routines Menu                    82. Audit Trail Inquiry             |
|                                                                               |
|    ------Logs-------                          ------Archival Routines------- |
|40. Log Routines Menu                     101. Print Record Subset             |
|                                          102. Cache Record Subsets            |
|    ---Swipe Cards---                     103. Edit Archival Form Assignments |
|50. Print                                 104. Deindex Archival Forms          |
|                                          105. View/Print Deindexed Archival Forms|
|                                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+



The Additional ICR Routines Menu includes the following functions:

Delete Record Routine
This routine allows you to delete records from the Incomplete Records
feature. (NOTE: This routine will only delete the record from the
Incomplete Records feature, not from the Master Patient Index).

Enter/Edit Doctor Availability
Use this routine to enter or edit the dates on which a doctor is
unavailable to work on incomplete records due to illness, vacation, etc.
The system will automatically assign days of credit to the doctor when
you use this routine.

Count Incomplete Records
When you select this routine, the system immediately calculates the
total number of records, which currently are active in the Incomplete
Records feature, that have at least one incomplete portion (i.e., all
Standard Menus (2.2)                                                    Page 12



records with an ICR status of incomplete).   It then displays that
number on the screen.

This information can be used to satisfy JCAHO reporting requirements.

Print Record's Incomplete Portions
You can use this routine to print the Record's Incomplete Portions
report. The incomplete records data for all incomplete portion(s)
of a single, user-specified record, appears on this report. Once you
identify a record, the system prints the information that was entered
for that record via the Process Incomplete Records routine.

Audit Trail Inquiry
You can use this routine to print an Incomplete Records Audit
Inquiry report which includes all activities performed in the
Incomplete Records Feature for a user-specified record. This report
allows you to check which activities were performed, when they were
done, and who are the responsible users.

Delinquent Record Count
This routine totals the number of incomplete records that are
considered overdue or "delinquent" for doctors based on the criteria
defined in the Enter/Edit Delinquent Days for Patient Type Routine.
The count is broken down by Patient Type.

Enter Doctor Info For Doctor Visit Log
This routine allows users to log all visits made by a doctor to
the Medical Records Department for the purpose of completing charts.
This routine, based on the date entered in the VISIT DATE field,
will affect the generation of Incomplete Chart Notification Letters.
The routine also allows the user to enter a reason for the visit.

When a date is entered using this routine, doctors are credited
with a visit to the department. This credit, similar to completing
a patient's chart in the Process Incomplete Record Routine, postpones
the generation of a delinquent letter.

All visits entered in the routine can be listed by using the
Doctor Visit Log.

Edit Portion Name
This routine allows you to edit the record portion name of an
incomplete record.

    Dictionaries

Enter/Edit Notification Letters
The Enter/Edit Notification Letters routine allows you to create
and edit Notification Letters that a site will plan to use on a
regular basis, such as a "Zero Days Outstanding Letter", a "Three
Days Outstanding Letter", a "Seven Days Outstanding Letter", a "Final
Warning Letter", etc, that are sent to recipients.
Standard Menus (2.2)                                                    Page 13




List Notification Letters
Use this routine to list the Notification Letters created using the
Enter/Edit Notification Letter Routine. You select the letters
by specifying their mnemonics and whether you wish to include active
letters, inactive letters or all letters (both active and inactive).

This list can then be reviewed to determine which letters, if any,
should be created or edited (via the Enter/Edit Notification
Letter Routine).

Enter/Edit Reasons
The MRI ICR Reason Dictionary defines the reasons that records
are considered incomplete. You may wish to refer to the deficiencies
currently listed on your hospital's deficiency slip (often attached
to incomplete charts) for appropriate dictionary entries. You can use
this routine to add a new reason to the dictionary, or to change the
information currently in the dictionary.

List Reasons
This routine lists the incomplete reasons which appear in the MRI
ICR Reason Dictionary (see the Enter/Edit MRI ICR Reason Dictionary
routine).

The list can then be reviewed to determine which reasons, if any,
should be edited, or whether new reasons need to be entered (via
the Enter/Edit Reasons Routine).

Enter/Edit Delinquent Days For Patient Types
This dictionary allows users to define the number of days, based on
either the patient's discharge/service date or the date that the
medical record chart becomes available to the medical record staff,
that a chart becomes "delinquent" for each Patient Type. After a
chart becomes delinquent, doctors receive Notification Letters
reminding them to complete the chart.

Enter/Edit Default Date Available
This dictionary allows users to specify when charts first become
available in the Process Incomplete Record Routine. This date can
either be the patient's Discharge Date/Service Date or "T", the date
that the chart first becomes available to the medical record staff.

    User Activity

Productivity Report
This report totals, based on a specified date range, the number of
times a user group or individual user, filed activity in the
Process Incomplete Record Routine. This report can help managers
in the Medical Records Department track user activity for incomplete
records.

Analysis Report By User And Provider
Standard Menus (2.2)                                                     Page 14



This report totals, based on a specified date range, the number of
times a user analyzed/edited/created an Incomplete Record by adding
deficiencies and/or doctors. This report can help managers in the
Medical Records Department track user activity for incomplete records.

Completion Report By User And Provider
This report totals, based on a specified Completion Date range,
the number of times a user completed deficiencies for a doctor on an
incomplete record. This report can help managers in the Medical
Records Department track user activity for incomplete records.


+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                      ----Incomplete Record Routines----                        |
|Select?                                                                         |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                                                                |
|                                                                                |
|11. Delete Record                                    ----User Activity----      |
|12. Enter/Edit Doctor Availability               30. Productivity Report        |
|13. Count Incomplete Records                     31. Analysis Report By User And Provider|
|14. Print Record's Incomplete Portions           32. Completion Report By User And Provider|
|16. Audit Trail Inquiry                                                         |
|18. Delinquent Record Count                                                     |
|19. Enter Doctor Info For Doctor Visit Log                                      |
|20. Edit Portion Name                                                           |
|                                                                                |
|21. Document History Report                                                     |
|22. Document Error Report                                                       |
|23. Scan Station Error Report                                                   |
|24. Scan Station Error Audit Trail                                              |
|                                                                                |
|    ----Dictionaries----                                                        |
|41. Enter/Edit Notification Letters                                             |
|42. List Notification Letters                                                   |
|43. Enter/Edit Reasons                                                          |
|44. List Reasons                                                                |
|45. Enter/Edit Delinquent Days For Patient Types                                |
|46. Enter/Edit Default Date Available                                           |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+



The Additional Locator Routines Menu includes the following functions:

Audit Trail Inquiry
You can use this routine to print a Record Locator Audit Inquiry Report.
The Record Locator activity for all portions of a user-specified record
appears on this report. This report allows you to check on the record's
movements, even after it has been returned to the Medical Records
Department. Note that, after the record is returned, this information
is retained for a hospital-defined number of days and then automatically
Standard Menus (2.2)                                                      Page 15



purged from the system.

Recipient Inquiry
This routine is used to print the Recipient Inquiry report. This
report shows all of the record portions that are signed out to a
user-specified recipient. (A recipient can be an entry in either the
MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary or the MIS Provider Dictionary). The
record portions are sorted by the number of days overdue, the records
whose portions have been outstanding for the most number of days
appear at the top of the list.

Print Duplicate Outguides & Labels
Outguides and labels print automatically when a record portion is
signed out of the Medical Records Department. This routine allows
you to print a duplicate outguide and label for any record portion
that has been signed out.

You first identify all records and portions for which you need
duplicate outguides and labels. The system then prints the duplicates
on the device specified when the outguides and labels were created
via the Enter/Edit Outguide and Label Routine.

Move Records
You must use this routine if you wish to sign out incomplete records
when the Record Locator and Incomplete Records features are LINKED.
For example, if the Business Office needs an incomplete record for an
audit, the Move Records routine allows you to interrupt the processing
of the record and assign it to the Business Office.

You can also use this routine to assign any record (incomplete or
complete) to any recipient without using the Sign Out & Reserve Records
routine, thus bypassing the reservation queue.

The Move Records routine also allows you to move several records to
a single recipient at a time.

Reserve Record
You can use this routine to reserve portions of a specified record
for a recipient, but not sign them out. If a portion has already
been signed out, the date it is due back also appears. You can view
the ranking of each reservation and the total number of reservations.

Productivity Report
This report totals, based on a specified date range, the number of
times a user group or individual user has filed activity in the Sign
Out & Reserve Record, Return & Sign Out Reserved Records, and the
Move Record Routines. This report can be a useful tool for managers
in the Medical Records Department to track the frequency of user
activity with respect to the chart locator routines.

                            Dictionaries
Standard Menus (2.2)                                                    Page 16



Enter/Edit Recipients
The MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary and the MIS Provider Dictionary
jointly define all eligible recipients of medical records. Recipients
can be clinics, hospital departments, doctors, etc., and can be
located either in house or outside the hospital.

List Recipients
This routine lists recipients which appear in the MRI Locator Recipient
Dictionary. You list the recipients by specifying their mnemonics
and whether you wish to list active recipients, inactive recipients,
or all recipients (both active and inactive).

Purge Recipients
Use this routine to remove all inactive recipients from the MRI
Locator Recipient Dictionary who do not have record portions signed
out to them. The system warns you that, if you continue, these
inactive recipients will be erased from the system. You can choose
either to continue (and purge the inactive recipients) or to leave
the routine without purging the inactive recipients.

Enter/Edit Outguide And Label
The Enter/Edit Outguide & Label routine allows you to create and edit
an outguide and a label to meet your hospital's needs. The outguide
and label can include bar codes for both the patient's unit number
and medical record portion. You can define only one set of outguides
and labels for a facility.

Outguides are printed automatically whenever a record is signed out
of the Medical Records Department to a recipient via either the Sign
Out & Reserve Records or the Move Records routines.

Labels are printed when records are signed out to out-of-house
recipients. In addition, if a record is signed out to a doctor via
the Sign Out & Reserve Records routine, Move Records routine, and the
batch signout routines, labels are printed automatically if specified
by your parameters (i.e., if Y is entered in the PRINT LOCATOR LABELS
FOR DRS? parameter field).

Enter/Edit Reminder Letters
The Enter/Edit Reminder Letters Routine allows you to create and edit
a series of standard Reminder Letters, such as a "Seven Days Overdue
Letter," a "Fourteen Days Overdue Letter", a "Final Warning Letter",
etc.

List Reminder Letters
Use this routine to list the Reminder Letters created using the
Enter/Edit Reminder Letter Routine. You select the letters by
specifying the appropriate mnemonics and whether you wish to include
active letters, inactive letters, or all letters (both active and inactive).
Standard Menus (2.2)                                                    Page 17




+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                         ----Record Locator Routines----                       |
|Select?                                                                        |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|11. Audit Trail Inquiry                                                        |
|12. Recipient Inquiry                                                          |
|                                                                               |
|21. Print Duplicate Outguides & Labels                                         |
|                                                                               |
|31. Move Records                                                               |
|33. Reserve Record                                                             |
|                                                                               |
|35. Productivity Report                                                        |
|                                                                               |
|    ----Dictionaries----                                                       |
|41. Enter/Edit Recipients                                                      |
|42. List Recipients                                                            |
|43. Purge Recipients                                                           |
|44. Enter/Edit Outguide And Label                                              |
|45. Enter/Edit Reminder Letters                                                |
|46. List Reminder Letters                                                      |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+



The Correspondence Routines Menu includes the following functions:


Enter/Edit Requests
This routine allows you to enter or edit information about an incoming request
for medical information.


Process Requests
This routine allows you to identify one or more requests, as well as:

     *   for each request listed, generate a report that includes information
         about the request and an activity log

     *   change the request status to COMPLETE for each request you list on
         this screen

     *   print correspondence letters for each request you list on this screen

     *   save the user-specified requests as a compiled report, which can then
         be listed, printed or purged in the Correspondence Feature report
         routines (i.e., List Reports, Print Reports and Purge Reports routines)
Standard Menus (2.2)                                                   Page 18




View Request
This routine allows you to view information about a previously entered request
for medical information.


View Request By Patient
This routine allows you to view information, by patient, about a previously
entered request for medical record information.


Purge Request
This routine allows you to delete a previously entered request for medical
information from the system.


Compile Reports
This routine allows you to compile reports for selected requests entered in the
Enter/Edit Requests Routine.


List Reports
This routine allows you to list information about the reports created using the
Compile Reports Routine or the Process Requests Routine.


Print Reports
This routine allows you to print compiled reports.


Purge Reports
This routine allows you to purge compiled reports from the system.


Productivity Report
This report totals, based on a specified date range, the number of times a user
group or individual user filed activity in the Enter/Edit Correspondence
Routine.


Selection Dictionary
This dictionary allows you to define subsets of the correspondence requests by
grouping any number of select fields. When a selection is used, the system
finds the subset of requests that satisfies the criteria defined by that
selection.


Requestor Dictionary
This dictionary allows you to define requestors.


Type Dictionary
Standard Menus (2.2)                                                   Page 19



This dictionary allows you to define the different types of correspondence
requests received by the health care organization.


Reason Dictionary
This dictionary allows you to define specific reasons, which are used to place
a request "on-hold".


Letter Dictionary
This dictionary allows you to create and edit a series of standard
Correspondence Letters addressed to the requestors.


Requested Information Dictionary
This dictionary allows you to define specific information from a patient's
chart that has been requested by the requestor.

CDS Name Dictionary
This routine allows you to associate a Customer Defined Screen with the
Correspondence Request routines.


+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                      ----MRI Correspondence Routines----                      |
|Select?                                                                        |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                 --- Correspondence Routines ---                               |
|                                                                               |
|10. Enter/Edit Request              20. Compile Reports                        |
|11. Process Requests               21. List Reports                            |
|12. View Request                    22. Print Reports                          |
|13. View Request By Patient         23. Purge Reports                          |
|14. Purge Request                   24. Productivity Report                    |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|           ----Correspondence Dictionary Routines----                          |
|                                                                               |
| ----Enter/Edit----       ----List----              ----Purge----              |
|                                                                               |
|81. Selection            91. Selection                                         |
|82. Requestor            92. Requestor             102. Requestor              |
|83. Type                 93. Type                                              |
|84. Reason               94. Reason                                            |
|85. Letter               95. Letter                                            |
|86. Requested Info       96. Requested Info                                    |
|87. CDS Name             97. Fields                                            |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Standard Menus (2.2)                                                    Page 20




You can use the routines on the View Dictionaries Menu to view
individual entries for all dictionaries. The view routines provide
access to users who need this information for their work but whose
responsibilities do not include maintaining the dictionaries.

The View Dictionaries routine allows the following dictionary entries
to be viewed:

 Incomplete Records                 Locator

    11. Reason                       21. Recipients
    12. Notification Letter          22. Reminder Letter
                                     23. Outguide And Label

 Correspondence                     Other

    31.   Reason                     40. OA Messages
    32.   Requestor
    33.   Type
    34.   Selection
    35.   Fields
    36.   Letter
    37.   Requested Info


+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                        ----MRI View Dictionary Menu----                       |
|Select?                                                                        |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|--- Incomplete Records ---        --- Locator ---                              |
|                                                                               |
|11. Reason                        21. Recipients                               |
|12. Notification Letter           22. Reminder Letter                          |
|                                  23. Outguide And Label                       |
|                                                                               |
|--- Correspondence ---            --- Other ---                                |
|                                                                               |
|31. Reason                        40. OA Messages                              |
|32. Requestor                                                                  |
|33. Type                                                                       |
|34. Selection                                                                  |
|35. Fields                                                                     |
|36. Letter                                                                     |
|37. Requested Info                                                             |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+



As you can see from the menu samples, these routines are organized into four
basic categories:
Standard Menus (2.2)                                                     Page 21




    *    Patient routines

    *    Incomplete records routines

    *    Record locator routines

    *    Correspondence routines


The last sample menu contains the view-only versions of the enter/edit
dictionary routines from the different categories.

The routines that make up these categories allow you to perform specific
functions, such as

     *    enter/edit Master Patient Index data

     *    process incomplete records

     *    sign out and reserve records

     *    enter/edit requests for medical information


The standard Main Menu lists a number of frequently used routines in each
category, as well as the secondary menus. When you select a secondary
menu, you see the remaining routines (and the tertiary menus, if any) in that
category. The routines for the Correspondence feature appear only on the
secondary menu.
Identifying Patients (2.3)                                              Page 22



2.3:    Identifying Patients


Using the Medical Records Module generally consists of entering data in
response to a series of questions or prompts. MEDITECH requires you to
respond to prompts in a specific way in order to help standardize the data for
processing. These response formats, along with the rules that govern data
entry, are described in MEDITECH's NPR System Conventions Manual.

The patient record is the core information unit of the Medical Records Module.
Prompts at which you enter or identify a patient record require you to
enter responses in specific formats. These prompts are:

    *   PATIENT                     *    OTHER NUMBER

    *   UNIT NUMBER                 *   RECORD

    *   REQUESTOR


The system rejects the data unless you enter it in the correct format. For
your convenience, these formats are included at the end of this section.

Two routines described briefly at the end of this section, the Fast Search and
the Soundex a Name routines, allow you to practice identifying existing
patients. The documention for these routines follow this section.



Entering a New Patient Record

To enter a new patient record and, if applicable, assign a unit number in the
Medical Records Module, use the Enter/Edit Patient Routine. For information
about the correct format for entering the patient's name, see the section
titled "Enter/Edit Patient."



Identifying an Existing Patient Record

How you identify an existing record depends on a number of factors, including:

    *   the amount of information you have available to you at the time (e.g.,
        you may know the patient's unit number, or you may only know his or
        her name)

    *   your system (which may be single facility or multi-facility)


The process of identifying a record by entering a patient's name is
described in detail in Appendix B (The Search of the Master Patient Index).
Identifying Patients (2.3)                                             Page 23



The process of identifying a record by number is described in detail in
Appendix F (Patient Numbers).

If the patient has a number known to you, the most efficient way to identify
him or her is to enter that number and press <RETURN>. Patient information
then appears on the screen. For example, if you are using the Process
Incomplete Records Routine, and you know the patient's unit number, you can
simply enter it at the RECORD prompt and press <RETURN>. See the table at
the end of this section for a summary of how to use numbers to identify
patients.



Recalling the Most Recently Identified Patient

Once you have identified a patient, the system allows you to recall that
patient at any patient identification prompt (until you enter a new patient
record). To do this, you simply press the space bar, then press <RETURN>
(instead of entering the patient's name or number in the field again).

You will find this feature particularly useful when you wish to perform several
different tasks for one record. You can select one routine, identify
the patient's record and complete the task. When you go to the next routine,
instead of identifying the record again, you press the space bar, then
<RETURN>. The patient's information appears immediately. You can continue
this process until you have finished working with the record.

The system remembers the last patient you identified from the time you sign-on
to the system until you sign-off.

Note that the system remembers the last record even when you use the MAGIC
key to switch applications. Assume, for example, that you are signed-on to the
MRI Module when you identify the record, and you have questions about some of
the data which has come over from the Admissions Module. Your MAGIC key gives
you access to the Admissions Module, so you use it to switch to that module to
see if you can pinpoint the source of the confusion.

When you are ready to identify the patient in the Admissions Module, you only
need to press the space bar, followed by <RETURN>. The patient's information
then appears on the screen.
Identifying Patients (2.3)                                              Page 24



_______________________________________________________________________________

                  Using numbers to Identify Patient Records
_______________________________________________________________________________

Prompt           Response               Format

UNIT NUMBER    patient's              nnnnnnn, Xnnnnnn, or XXnnnnnn
               primary unit           (X and XX represent your hospital's
               number when            unit number prefix, if one has been
               entering a             assigned).
               number
                                      Leading zeros can be omitted. For
               patient's primary      example, the unit number CL000456 can
               unit number, non-      be entered as:
               primary unit number
               or other number            CL000456 or CL456
               when identifying
               a patient by number
                                      The standard length of the unit number is
                                      defined by your hospital in the system
                                      parameters. Prefixes are assigned by
                                      MEDITECH.

               patient's social       #nnn-nn-nnnn or #nnnnnnnnn
               security when          Note that you must preface the social
               identifying            security number with a pound sign
               a patient by           (#).
               social security
               number


OTHER NUMBER   any number             The format is the same as the unit
               assigned to the        number. However, each set of numbers
               patient other than     (e.g., primary unit numbers, laboratory
               the primary unit       numbers, etc.) has a different prefix.
               number.


RECORD         the patient's          See above.
               primary unit number,
               social security        Note that you must use a number with
               number, or other       your facility's prefix (i.e., the
               number                 prefix of the facility you selected
                                      at signon).


REQUESTOR      the patient's          See above for social security number.
               primary unit number        The format for the unit number at this
               or social security      prompt requires you to preface the unit
               number                  number with U#. This helps the
                                       system distinguish the unit number from
                                       the request number.
Identifying Patients (2.3)                                             Page 25




Quick Routines for Identifying Patients

The two routines described in the following two sections, Fast Search and
Soundex a Name, allow you to practice identifying patients before you begin
working with the other routines in the Medical Records Module.


Fast Search Routine

As noted above, MEDITECH's Medical Records Module can use either the patient's
unit number, name, social security number or S number (assigned by some
hospitals to referred patients) to identify a patient. However, there may be
times when you have access to the unit number only, yet wish to identify the
patient by name (and vice versa). Or you may have access to the S number
only, yet wish to identify the patient by name or unit number.

The Fast Search Routine on the Main Menu allows you to find the patient's name
when only the unit number, social security or S number is known, or the
unit number when only the name or S number is known.



Soundex a Name

Positively identifying the patient is the first step in many routines.
Whenever a routine initiates a search of the Master Patient Index (MPI) to
identify a patient, one of the key elements in that search is the patient's
name.

To make this process more reliable, MEDITECH uses a "Soundex" version of the
patient's name (i.e., the system "re-spells" the name using a unique
language). See Appendix B, "The Search of the Master Patient Index," and
Appendix C, "Soundex Methods--Standard vs. Russell" for more detailed
information.

You can use the Soundex a Name Routine on the Additional Patient Routines Menu
to see how the system re-spells a patient's name. This routine allows you to
become familiar with the common spelling errors and name variations which will
be corrected by the Soundex spelling.
Fast Search Routine (2.3.1)                                               Page 26



2.3.1:    Fast Search Routine


Use this routine to find:

    *    a patient's name when only the primary unit number, social security
         number or an other number is known

    *    a patient's primary unit number when only the patient's name is known

    *    a patient's name (and primary unit number, if assigned) when only an
         other number is known

Note that you cannot, however, use this routine to find an other number
by entering the patient's name or primary unit number.

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

After you identify a patient, you can go to another routine and use the recall
feature.

If this patient has been flagged as a confidential patient in the Admissions
application, the message **CONFIDENTIAL** appears below the name. For more
information, see the section titled "Security and Patient Confidentiality"
in the Medical Records Module User Manual.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                  Fast Search                                  |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Patient:                                                                       |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PATIENT                  If the primary unit number is known and you want to
                         find the patient's name, enter the primary unit number.

                                The patient's name then appears below the number.

                         If the patient's name is known and you want to find the
                         primary unit number, enter the patient's name, using up
                         to 30 characters, in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.
Fast Search Routine (2.3.1)                                             Page 27




                              The system now begins a search of the Master
                              Patient Index to identify the patient (see Appendix
                              B for a detailed description of this process).
                              When you locate the patient, the system displays
                              the patient's unit number and name.

                              If you do not locate the patient, delete the name
                              and enter a new patient name to continue.

                      If the patient's social security number is known and you
                      want to identify the patient's name (and primary unit
                      number), enter the social security number prefaced by a
                      pound sign (#).

                              The patient's primary unit number, if assigned,
                              appears in place of the social security number you
                              entered. The patient's name appears below the unit
                              number.

                              If the patient does not have a primary unit number,
                              the system replaces the social security number with
                              the word NEW and displays the patient's name
                              below it.

                      If an other number is known and you want to identify
                      the patient's name (and primary unit number, if
                      assigned), enter the other number.

                              If the patient also has a primary unit number, that
                              number replaces the other number, and the
                              patient's name appears.

                              If the patient does not have a primary unit number,
                              the system replaces the other number with the
                              word NEW and displays the patient's name below
                              it.

                              Note that you cannot find an other number
                              by entering the patient's name or primary unit
                              number.

If this patient has been flagged as a confidential patient in the Admissions
Module, a message **CONFIDENTIAL** appears below the name.
Soundex a Name Routine (2.3.2)                                           Page 28



2.3.2:   Soundex a Name Routine


Use this routine to see how patient names are   Soundexed (i.e., re-spelled
using a unique language). When you enter the    patient's name, the system
displays the Soundexed version of that name.    Note that the system only
Soundexes the LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME entered, not   any additional middle names or
qualifiers.

MEDITECH's Medical Records Module uses the Soundex version of the patient's
name whenever a routine initiates a search of the Master Patient Index (MPI).
The Soundex spelling corrects common spelling errors and allows you to find a
patient's medical record even if you are unsure of the correct spelling of
his/her name. For a complete description of the search of the MPI based on
the patient's Soundexed name, see Appendix B.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                 Soundex Names                                 |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Name                            Soundexed Name                                 |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


NAME                   Enter the patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                       in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format. Do not leave a space
                       between the comma and the FIRSTNAME.

                       The system then re-spells the name and displays the
                       Soundex version to the right of the original version.
                       The screen scrolls, if necessary, to accept as many
                       names as you wish to Soundex.
Identifying Doctors (2.4)                                              Page 29



2.4:       Identifying Doctors


The Medical Records Module allows you to quickly identify doctors defined in
the MIS Doctor Dictionary when you are working with the routines which contain
the following prompts:

       *    DOCTOR                        *   REQUESTOR

       *    RECIPENT



Identifying a Doctor by Mnemonic

At the DOCTOR Prompt

If you know the doctor's mnemonic, enter it at the DOCTOR prompt. If there
is a field for the doctor's name next to this prompt, the doctor's full name as
listed in the MIS Doctor Dictionary appears after you press <RETURN>.

If you know only part of the doctor's mnemonic, type as much of it as you can
(to narrow down the range of choices) and press <LOOKUP>. The list in the
LOOKUP starts with those doctors whose mnemonics begin with this letter or
letters. For example, if you enter W and press <LOOKUP>, the LOOKUP starts
with the first doctor in the MIS Doctor Dictionary whose mnemonic begins with
W. To identify a doctor, select his or her mnemonic from the LOOKUP.



At the RECIPIENT or REQUESTOR Prompt

If you wish to identify a doctor as a recipient or requestor, enter D
or d followed by a space, followed by the doctor's mnemonic. For example,
if Dr. Welby is the recipient, and his mnemonic is WEL, enter D WEL or d
WEL.

To use the LOOKUP identify a doctor at the RECIPIENT or REQUESTOR
prompt, type D or d followed by a space and as many of the letters of
the doctor's mnemonic you know. When you press <LOOKUP>, the list starts with
the first entry in the Doctor Dictionary that begins with the letters you
entered.



Identifying a Doctor by Name

If you wish to see a list of the doctors in the LOOKUP ordered by the doctors'
names, type one of the following and press <LOOKUP>.

       *    N\ or N\partial name in the DOCTOR prompt
Identifying Doctors (2.4)                                              Page 30



     *   D N\ or D N\partial name in the RECIPIENT or REQUESTOR
         prompt


For example, if you wish to find a doctor whose last name begins with BAR, type
\NBAR.



Identifying a Doctor With an Expanded LOOKUP

If you wish to see an expanded LOOKUP at the DOCTOR prompt (only), type
/X or /Xpartial name and press <LOOKUP>. The expanded LOOKUP for
doctors includes the following information from the MIS Dictionary for each
doctor:

     *   mnemonic                          *   admitting privilege

     *   doctor name                       *   doctor type mnemonic

     *   service mnemonic                  *   telephone number


To see an expanded LOOKUP ordered by the doctors' names, type N\/X or N\
partial name/X and press LOOKUP. For example, to see an expanded list of
doctors beginning with the letters BAR, type N\BAR/X and press
<LOOKUP>.
Role of Dictionaries (3)                                               Page 31



Chapter 3:    Role of Dictionaries


Definition and Function of Dictionaries

The Medical Records Module dictionaries are user-defined tables, or reference
files that contain information required by your hospital's Medical Records
personnel. They allow you to create a specialized database that not only meets
your hospital's specific needs, but ensures consistent, standardized data entry
within the Medical Records (MRI) Module.

Because dictionary information is required for processing the patient's medical
record, dictionaries must be defined before you can begin working with the
routines. The dictionaries ensure that information is captured and formatted
correctly.

Before you begin working with the dictionaries, you should be familiar with the
conventions used in NPR applications. See the NPR System Conventions User
Manual for more information. For your convenience, conventions specific to
dictionaries are summarized in the following section, titled "System
Conventions for Dictionaries."



Creating and Maintaining Dictionaries

The dictionaries are set up primarily during installation, with the help of
MEDITECH consultants. After your system goes live, you keep these dictionaries
current by creating new entries or by editing existing ones. To do this, use
the enter/edit routine for the appropriate dictionary. For example, to define
a reason that a record would be considered incomplete, use the Enter/Edit
Reasons Routine.



Input Forms

Blank input forms are included in the chapter titled "Input Forms." You can
copy these forms and use them to collect information prior to entering it in
your dictionaries.



Listing Contents of a Dictionary

After you have entered all of the information into the dictionaries, MEDITECH
recommends that you print a hardcopy to verify that the information has been
entered correctly. Use the corresponding list routine to print a copy of a
dictionary's entries. For example, use the List Reasons Routine to list the
entries in the Reason Dictionary.
Role of Dictionaries (3)                                               Page 32




Dictionary Mnemonics and LOOKUPs

Mnemonics are unique, brief identifiers assigned by your hospital to each
dictionary entry. They are used to access a dictionary entry within an
application routine. For example, a record may be considered incomplete if it
lacks a discharge summary. You can enter this as a reason in the Reason
Dictionary, and give it the mnemonic DIS. When you enter an incomplete reason
in the Incomplete Records Feature, if it is lacking a discharge summary, you
simply enter DIS at the REASONS prompt to indicate this.

Mnemonics help assure correct data entry. They also provide quick on-line
access, since they require fewer key strokes than entering a full name.


LOOKUPs containing the mnemonics and full names of the dictionary entries are
available whenever a dictionary response is required. To see only active
entries in a LOOKUP at a MNEMONIC prompt, simply press <LOOKUP>. To see
active and inactive entries, type /B and press <LOOKUP>. You can also
use partial mnemonics to start the LOOKUP at a specific letter or set of
letters. For more information, see the NPR System Conventions User Manual.



Shared Dictionaries

The MRI Module allows you to use information defined the MIS Doctor Dictionary.
That dictionary contains information about all doctors associated with your
hospital. It provides valid entries to the DOCTOR, BOX, RECIPIENT
and REQUESTOR prompts. For more information about identifying doctors in
the MRI routines, see the section titled "Identifying Doctors."
Dictionary Conventions (3.1)                                                Page 33



3.1:       Dictionary Conventions


The Medical Records Indexing (MRI) Module contains enter/edit dictionary
routines that allow you to

       *    define standard entries required for MRI routines

       *    format letters, labels and outguides


These dictionaries are found in the following features:

       *    Incomplete Records

       *    Locator

       *    Correspondence


To only view the dictionary entries, use the routines on the View Dictionaries
Menu.

The following conventions apply to all of the enter/edit dictionary routines.



Entering New Information

To make a new entry in a dictionary, follow the four steps below:

       1)    Select the appropriate menu by typing its number, then pressing
             <RETURN>. (See the section titled "Routines and Menus" for samples of
             all MRI menus.)


       2)    Choose a dictionary (under the heading ENTER/EDIT) by typing its
             number, then pressing <RETURN>.


       3)    Type the new entry's mnemonic and press <RETURN>.   The following
             prompt appears:

                       Not Found.   New? Y

             Press <RETURN> to confirm that this is a new entry, then answer the
             remaining prompts on the screen.

             For general information on how to answer prompts, see the section
             of the NPR System Conventions User Manual titled "Responding to
             Prompts."
Dictionary Conventions (3.1)                                            Page 34



          For information on how to respond to a specific prompt, move the
          cursor to that prompt and press <DOCUM>, or see the documentation of
          that prompt in this dictionary guide.

     4)   If the system does not accept your response to a prompt, press <HELP>
          to display the required format for that response.



Editing Existing Entries

To change existing information (i.e. edit a dictionary entry), first identify
the entry by entering its mnemonic. (If you are unsure of the mnemonic, you
can use the LOOKUP feature to list existing entries, then select the one that
you want to edit.) The information on file for that entry then appears on the
screen.

Edit the entry as follows:

    1)    Move the cursor to the desired field. (For more information, see the
          section of the NPR System Conventions User Manual titled "How to Use
          Your Keyboard")

    2)    Delete individual characters or the entire response.

    3)    Enter the new information.


If you mistakenly delete information and have not left the data field, you
can press <RECALL> to retrieve that information.



Filing Your Entry

If you want to file your entry, and have answered all the required prompts,
press <RETURN> at the last field. If you do not need to move through all the
fields (e.g., if you are simply editing one field), press <OK> when you have
finished and are ready to file.

When the File? prompt appears, type Y, then press <RETURN>.



Leaving the Screen Without Filing

To leave the screen at any time without filing the information, press
<EXIT>. When the Exit? system prompt appears, type Y, then press
<RETURN>.
List Dictionary Routines (3.2)                                         Page 35



3.2:    List Dictionary Routines


Dictionary list routines allow you to print the contents of the dictionaries in
alphamnemonic order.

You will find that these lists are especially helpful when you are first
setting up your dictionaries.

You should review each list carefully and check for duplicate or missed entries
and errors. Since the smooth flow of processing requests depends on the
accuracy of these dictionaries, errors or inconsistencies can have a
detrimental effect on the overall operation of your system.

NOTE:   This section describes list dictionary routines in general terms
        only. It does not include information on the specific list routines for
        the dictionaries except the List Fields Dictionary. For more
        information on the list routines for the other dictionaries, see the
        on-line documentation for the corresponding dictionary.



Listing Dictionary Entries

The list routines contain one set of range prompts and an ACTIVE?
prompt. The range prompts enable you to begin and end the lists with specific
entries. The ACTIVE? prompt allows you to specify if you wish to list
active, inactive or all entries.

This section shows a sample of a list routine screen, and discusses some
features of the list routines.



Sample List Routine Screen
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                 List MRI Correspondence Requestor Dictionary                  |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Requestor:                                                                |
|                                                                               |
|Thru Requestor:                                                                |
|                                                                               |
|Active?                                                                        |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
List Dictionary Routines (3.2)                                          Page 36



Prompts in List Routines

Range Prompts

Range prompts consist of a pair of prompts which allow you to specify the range
of dictionary entries which you wish to list (view or print).

              For example:   FROM MNEMONIC   BEGINNING
                             THRU MNEMONIC   END

                                   or

                             FROM REQUESTOR BEGINNING
                             THRU REQUESTOR END


BEGINNING and END appear as the default responses for these prompts. To list
all dictionary entries, simply press <RETURN> to accept these default values.
If you wish to specify specific dictionary entries, delete these default values
and enter the appropriate dictionary entries.

You can enter either the entire mnemonic or one or more letters indicating
the first part of the mnemonic. For example, if you wish to list all
dictionary entries whose first letters begin with B, you can simply enter B
at both range prompts.

To list data for only one dictionary entry, enter the same dictionary entry
at both range prompts.

If you want to view only a single dictionary entry on your terminal, you can
also use the appropriate enter/edit routine for that dictionary and view the
entry.

NOTE:   For more information about specifying the mnemonic(s) you wish to
        list, see the section titled "Printing Lists and Reports" in the NPR
        System Conventions User Manual.



The ACTIVE? Prompt

The ACTIVE? prompt allows you to specify whether you want to list active,
inactive, or both kinds of dictionary entries. The status of the entry appears
on the list.
List Dictionary Routines (3.2)                                            Page 37



Printing the List

After you enter the appropriate responses, the following prompt appears:

                                 Print on:

Enter the mnemonic of the device on which you want to print the list of
specified dictionary entries.
Using Patient (MPI Data) Routines (4)                                  Page 38



Chapter 4:      Using Patient (MPI Data) Routines


The Medical Records (MRI) Module contains records for patients that originated
in the Admissions Module. You can also enter records directly in MRI using the
Enter/Edit Patient Routine.

This section describes the routines which allow you to maintain the patient
data information and Master Patient Index (MPI) files, and to review and list
the information.

_______________________________________________________________________________

Important

To protect the validity of the Master Patient Index and Demo Recall files,
the enter/edit routines described in this chapter are often restricted to
medical records administrators.

Note that the Medical Records Module preserves the integrity of patient data by
allowing only one user to access a patient's record at a time. For example, if
someone is editing a patient's Master Patient Index data, and another user
attempts to access the same patient's record (either through the Medical
Records or Admissions Modules), the system refuses the second user and informs
him/her that this patient's record is in use.
_______________________________________________________________________________



Maintaining the Patient Information

The Master Patient Index (MPI) files, which is a subset of the patient's
information in MRI, include the following information:

     *   name                            *   maiden/other name

     *   unit number                     *   birthdate

     *   sex                             *   mother's name


When you enter a patient's name, unit number or other number, the system
searches the MPI for the patient (see Appendix B for a detailed description
of this process). When the patient is identified, the system then displays
specific information (defined by the routine you selected) from the patient's
files.

The sections that follow describe the routines that allow you to maintain and
review the patient's information. The rest of this section summarizes these
routines.
Using Patient (MPI Data) Routines (4)                                  Page 39




Entering/Editing Patient Data

The Enter/Edit Patient Routine allows you to enter new records into the Medical
Records Module. You can also use these routines to edit records which have
been entered into the system through the Medical Records Module or the
Admissions Module



Viewing and Printing Patient Data

To view patient information, use the View Patient Routine. In addition to the
basic MPI and patient information that you can edit in the Enter/Edit Patient
Routine, the screen also displays useful information such as the patient's
telephone number.

To print the patient's information, use the Print Patient Routine. The
Patient's Data Report shows the information that you can enter or edit in the
Enter/Edit Patient Routine.



Identifying Missing Data

Whenever you initiate a MPI search to identify a patient, the system searches
through the MPI information. To improve the efficiency of the search, you can
find which information is missing. The Print Missing Data List Routine allows
you to identify which MPI information, such as the patient's birthdate, may be
missing.

For more information about the MPI Search, see the sections titled:

     *   Appendix A:   The Interaction Between the MRI & ADM Modules

     *   Appendix B:   The Search of the Master Patient Index
Enter/Edit Patient (MPI Data) (4.1)                                        Page 40



4.1:       Enter/Edit Patient (MPI Data)



This routine allows you to enter new patients into the Master Patient Index
(MPI) and to edit the records of patients already in the system (e.g., correct
a misspelled name, enter comments, update patient visits, etc.)

The routine allows you to enter three kinds of information:

       *    patient information that appears at the first part of an MPI Search

       *    status of the medical record (e.g., whether the portion still needs to
            be completed)

       *    visit history (e.g., the discharge disposition for a visit that appears
            in the MPI Search)

The completeness of this information allows you and other users to identify
patients quickly and accurately during an MPI Search.

The system no longer will calculate the patient's age after the midnight run
when the patient receives an expired-type discharge disposition at the
DISCHARGE DISPOSITION prompt. The patient's age ceases to increment after the
midnight run for the day the patient receives the expired-type discharge
disposition in ADM or MRI.

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

You can assign unit numbers or other numbers to patients or you can enter a
new patient without specifying a number. You cannot, however, edit a
previously assigned number using this routine. (To change a patient's number,
use the Edit Unit Number routine.) The system will now be able to correctly
process and identify two different number lengths based on parameterized
responses to the two MIS parameters which deal with account number and unit
number lengths.

NOTE: You cannot delete or edit the patient's visit history in the Enter/Edit
Patient routine if the details of the visit originate from the Admissions
application or if the patient's Admission file for that visit still exists in
ADM. When you enter new account numbers in the Medical Records application,
the system no longer adds leading zeros or checks the number's format, except
to verify that the number includes at least one numeric character.

NOTE: The Edit Transaction Log report's data indicates which user(s) edited
the visit history when edited via the Enter/Edit Patient routine. This will
keep track of visit histories entered via MRI.

If this patient has been flagged as a confidential patient in the ADM, the
Enter/Edit Patient (MPI Data) (4.1)                                    Page 41



message **CONFIDENTIAL** appears to the right of the PATIENT field. For
more information, see the section in the Medical Records Module User Manual
titled "System Security and Patient Confidentiality."

The Edit Transaction Log will show edits made to a patient's age as AGE edits
for records with missing birthdates. If you add a birthdate to a record that
includes the patient's age, the edit appears as a BIRTHDATE edit. The
fictitious birthdate computed by the system when only the patient's age is
available no longer appears on the Edit Transaction Log's report.

Entering a New Patient Record

You can use this routine to enter a new patient record into the MRI. At the
PATIENT prompt, enter the patient's name using the LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME REST
format.

When you enter a patient for the first time, observe the following guidelines:

    *   Use capital letters only

    *   DO NOT LEAVE A SPACE between the comma and the FIRSTNAME

    *   Separate the MIDDLE name or initial from the FIRSTNAME by a single
        space

    *   Only the following titles may be used, entered after the middle name
        or initial, in the formats shown:

              DR
              MD
              REV
              REV.

        For example, KELLY,PATRICK D REV

        Omit other leading titles, such as Mr. or Mrs.

    *   Qualifiers, such as MD, JR or III, may be entered after the middle

         For example, MROZAK,JOHN W JR

         The system recognizes the following as qualifiers, and places them at
         the end of the name on letters and forms:

              II          JR
              III         SR
              IV          Jr
                          Sr
              DDS
              MD

         The system also recognizes as qualifiers any set of characters which
Enter/Edit Patient (MPI Data) (4.1)                                      Page 42



                - is at least two letters long and contains at least one period
                  (e.g., Ph.D, M.D.)

              - begins with a numeral (e.g., 2nd, 4th)
Editing the Data of an Admitted Patient

Only edits to the following information are transferred automatically to
the patient's Admission's file:

    *   unit number                             *   maiden/other name

    *   name                                    *   V.I.P. flag

    *   sex                                     *   race

    *   birthdate and/or age                    *   address

    *   mother's name

Whenever you edit the data of a patient with an active Admissions file, the
Admissions Department personnel should be notified to update the information
associated with that patient's current account number.

In contrast, if you use this routine to edit the reasons for visit field, the
information remains in MRI. If a user edits the reasons for visit in ADM, the
edit appears immediately on the screen for this Enter/Edit Patient routine.

See Appendix A for more information on the interaction between the Admissions
and Medical Records Modules.

Primary Unit Numbers

In a multifacility system, a patient may have a different unit number for each
facility (if the patient has a record in more than one facility and each of
those facilities has its own prefix).

In that case, when you sign-on to one facility, the patient's primary unit
number will be the unit number which begins with that facility's prefix. Any
unit numbers assigned via other facilities are grouped with the patient's
other numbers (see below). They can be distinguished from these other
numbers by their prefix.

Note that while non-multifacility systems may have no apparent prefix for
unit numbers, they do, in fact, have an internal prefix.   Therefore, when a
prompt requires a prefix, you must enter a period (.) to identify a
non-multifacility unit number.

See Appendix E (Multifacility Systems) and Appendix F (Patient Numbers) for
more information.

Other Numbers

Other numbers (e.g., laboratory, or "S" numbers) are usually assigned
Enter/Edit Patient (MPI Data) (4.1)                                    Page 43



to patients by other departments or services within your facility.   However,
they may also be assigned via this routine, if desired.

These numbers allow departments (such as the lab) to set up MPI files for
patients without taking a unit number from MRI. Then, if the patient is
eventually admitted to the health care organization , his/her history can be
retrieved from the MPI.

Other numbers appear in many MRI routines (e.g., Verify Daily Assignment,
Edit Unit Number, Delete/Restore Patient, View Patient, etc.) as well as on
many reports (e.g., Patient Data). They can be used to identify records and to
select records for various reports (e.g., you can print the Unit Number
Assignment Log for other numbers, as well as for unit numbers).

The Role of the Enter/Edit Patient routine in Converting Incomplete Records

When your organization converts to MEDITECH's Medical Records application, you
use the Fast Input routine (or a conversion tape) to enter your existing
medical records. However, by the time your MEDITECH system goes live, a number
of these records may need to be updated.

Assume, for example, that the conversion is completed one week before your
system goes live. During that week, a patient is admitted for a three-day stay
and assigned an account number via your old system. When your MEDITECH system
goes live, the record is still missing the doctor's signature.

All incomplete records must have a valid account number for each visit before
they can be entered into MEDITECH'S Incomplete Records Feature. Therefore, to
process this incomplete record, you must update the patient's visit history to
include an account number for this visit.

In this case, then, you would use the Enter/Edit Patient routine to enter all
of the data for this patient's last visit, including the account number.
(Note, however, that when your system is live, this number is normally assigned
by MEDITECH'S ADM application.)

You cannot enter an account number that is currently in use. In addition, once
you assign an account number via this routine, that number can no longer be
assigned by ADM.
Enter/Edit Patient (MPI Data) (4.1)                                    Page 44

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                       Enter/Edit Patient                                   |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient:                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|Name:                                    Birthdate:            Age:          Sex:           |
|Unit #                                       Exp Date:                                      |
|                                                                                            |
|Maiden/Other Names:                                       Other Numbers:                    |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|Mother's Name:                           Discharge Disp:               Portion Signed Out:
|
|Record Locator:                          Folder Created:               Portion Incomplete:
|
|More on Fiche:            mment:                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|    Date       Type   Account #      Con Location PRE Reservation Date                      |
|          Doctor      Dis Dt     Dis Dispo Reason For Visit                                 |
|                                                                                            |
|                       54                                                                   |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                       54                                                                   |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                       54                                                                   |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PATIENT               To identify a patient, enter his/her primary unit
                      number (i.e., a unit number with your facility's
                      prefix), social security number, home telephone number
                      or other number (i.e., a unit number from another
                      facility, or a department or service number). Enter the
                      patient's name if he/she does not have a previously
                      assigned number, or that number is unknown.

                      Other number or Social Security number

                      When you enter an other number or a social security
                      number prefaced by a pound sign (#)

                            *   If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                                number, it appears on the screen in place of the
                                number you entered.

                            *   If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                                unit number, the word NEW replaces the
                                other number or social security number.
Enter/Edit Patient (MPI Data) (4.1)                                   Page 45




                      Name

                      If the patient's number is not known, enter his/her
                      name, using up to 30 characters, in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME
                      REST format. Do not leave a space between the comma
                      and the FIRSTNAME.

                      Leading titles such as Mr., Mrs., or Dr. should be
                      omitted. Honorifics, such as M.D., REV., JR., or III,
                      may be entered (without punctuation) after the FIRSTNAME
                      or REST and must be separated by a space (e.g.,
                      JOHNSON,PETER H JR).

                      The system now begins a search of the Master Patient
                      Index to identify the patient (see Appendix B for a
                      detailed description of this process).

                      Home Telephone Number

                      If the patient's home telephone number is known, the
                      patient can be accessed by entering it and adding it to
                      the syntax of T#. It does not have to include
                      punctuation (for example, it could be entered as
                      "T#7817498711" or "T#(781)749-8711").

                      Previously Entered Patients

                      When you identify a patient by number or locate the
                      patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays his
                      or her primary unit number (if one has been assigned),
                      all previously entered MPI data and a list of all
                      other numbers assigned to this patient.

                      If this patient has been flagged as a confidential
                      patient in the Admissions application, a screen message,
                      **CONFIDENTIAL**, appears in the upper right corner
                      of this screen. When a specific visit has been flagged
                      as a confidential visit, a Y appears in the CON
                      column (on the bottom half of this screen). You cannot
                      edit these fields.

                      New Patient

                      If the system cannot locate the patient, the word NEW
                      appears after the PATIENT prompt and the patient's
                      name appears after the NAME prompt.

                      You can now enter or edit the patient's MPI data by:
Enter/Edit Patient (MPI Data) (4.1)                                    Page 46



                              *   Pressing <Enter> to move to the next prompt,
                                  leaving the field unchanged.

                              *   Entering new data in a previously blank field.

                              *   Deleting the data and entering the updated
                                  information in the required format (see the
                                  prompt documentation for details).


NAME                  The patient's name appears here.   If necessary, edit
                      the patient's name.



BIRTHDATE             Enter the patient's birthdate. The system
                      automatically calculates the patient's age and enters it
                      at the AGE prompt.
                      Use the standard date format or the Tcombination
                      (e.g., T-1 for yesterday).

                      If the birthdate is unavailable, press <Enter> and
                      proceed to the AGE prompt.


AGE                   If you enter a birthdate, the system automatically
                      inserts the patient's age.

                      If you do not enter a birthdate, enter the patient's
                      age.

                      When the patient is less than 1 year old, you can use
                      days and months (e.g., if a child's age is 7 months, 20
                      days, enter 7M 20D).

                      However, when the patient is 1 year or older, but less
                      than 6 years old, you can use years and months (e.g., if
                      the patient's age is 1 year and 7 months, enter
                      1Y 7M).

                      When the patient is 6 years or older, you can use only
                      years (e.g., if the patient's age is 8 years, just enter
                      8).


SEX                    Enter M, F, or U (unknown).


UNIT #                If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                      number, that number appears. Note that an assigned unit
Enter/Edit Patient (MPI Data) (4.1)                                    Page 47



                      number cannot be edited using this routine. To edit a
                      unit number (e.g., to correct a mis-assigned unit
                      number), use the Edit Unit Number Routine.

                      If the patient has not been assigned a primary unit
                      number, the word NEW appears after the UNIT #
                      prompt. You can choose to:

                           *   have the system assign a unit number

                           *   manually assign a unit number

                           *   not assign a unit number


                      To have the system assign a unit number:

                           Press <Enter> and continue to enter data. When the
                           screen is completed and the data filed, the system
                           assigns that patient the next available unit number
                           (except as noted below). This new unit number
                           appears at the bottom of the screen for your
                           reference.

                           NOTE:   Some multifacility systems use root
                                   unit numbers. In that case, if a patient
                                   is seen in more than one facility, his/her
                                   unit number will be the same in each facility
                                   except for the prefix (which is
                                   facility-specific).

                                   If this patient already has a unit number
                                   (assigned by another facility), the cursor
                                   skips this prompt. When you file the data,
                                   the system assigns the appropriate root unit
                                   number and gives it the prefix of the
                                   facility you selected at sign-on.

                                   You cannot manually assign a different
                                   unit number or choose not to assign a unit
                                   number.


                      To manually assign a unit number:

                           Delete NEW and enter the unit number. The system
                           does not allow you to enter a number which is
                           already assigned to another patient.
Enter/Edit Patient (MPI Data) (4.1)                                    Page 48



                      If you choose not to assign a unit number to this
                      patient:

                           Delete NEW and press <Enter>.


EXP DATE:       Enter the patient's expiration date in the standard date
                format. The date may also be entered using a T combination
                ( T-1for yesterday). It may not be before birthdate and
                may not be a future date.




MAIDEN/OTHER NAMES    If known, enter the patient's maiden name (or other
                      name), using up to 30 characters, in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME
                      REST format. Do not leave a space between the comma
                      and FIRSTNAME. You can enter as many maiden or other
                      names as you wish. The Master Patient Index for MRI
                      includes each name entered in this field and soundexes
                      them during a search.

                      Only the first entry appears on the screen in the

                            *   Edit Unit Number Routine

                            *   Merge Patients Routine

                            *   Unmerge Patients Routine

                            *   Delete/Restore Patient


                      The system transfers only the first entry from the
                      Master Patient Index to the Admissions Module


OTHER NUMBERS         Any numbers associated with this patient, other
                      than the primary unit number, appear (arranged in
                      alphabetical order by prefix).

                      These numbers may include:

                            *   Unit numbers with prefixes of other facilities.
                                These numbers appear when one or more facilties
                                share a single database, use different unit
                                number prefixes, and the patient has a record in
                                more than one facility.
Enter/Edit Patient (MPI Data) (4.1)                                         Page 49




                              *   Department or service numbers from your
                                  facility.

                              *   Department or service numbers from other
                                  facilities (see above)

                      To scroll through all numbers, press <Enter>. To move
                      directly to the last other number, press <End>.
                      Enter a new department or service number for your
                      facility, if desired. You can enter a number, or you
                      can have the system assign the next available number as
                      follows:

                              Enter the word NEW followed by the prefix of
                              the desired number. Do not leave a space between
                              the word NEW and the prefix. For example, to
                              have the system assign the next available S
                              number (assuming S is an eligible prefix for
                              your facility), enter NEWS.

                              Note that the system assigned other number does
                              not appear on the screen until you file the
                              patient's data. At that point, any other number
                              assigned appears at the bottom of the screen one at
                              a time. Press <Enter> to view each one and then
                              return to the menu screen.

                      NOTE:       You cannot edit or delete other numbers
                                  using this routine. (See Edit Unit Number and
                                  Delete/Restore Patient Routines for more
                                  information on editing and deleting numbers.)


 MOTHER'S NAME
                                  Some health care organizations collect the
                                  patient's mother's first name; other hospitals
                                  collect the mother's last name. Enter the name
                                  that your hospital collects, using up to 20
                                  characters of free text.

                      The mother's name can help to identify a patient during
                      the Master Patient Index Search.


RECORD LOCATOR        Enter relevant medical record information, using up
                      to 20 characters of free text. You can indicate, for
                      example, records stored in an off-site facility, or
                      numbers for microfiche files.
Enter/Edit Patient (MPI Data) (4.1)                                     Page 50



                      NOTE:    This information is associated only with the
                               record having your facility's unit number or
                               other number(s), or both (i.e., it is prefix-
                               specific). For example, if a patient has a
                               folder in more than one facility, each will have
                               its own RECORD LOCATOR data.


DISCHARGE DISP        Enter the discharge disposition mnemonic for the
                      patient's most recent visit. A Lookup of the MIS
                      Discharge Disposition is available.


FOLDER CREATED        Enter the date on which this medical record folder
                      was created.

                      NOTE:    This date is associated only with the record
                               having your facility's unit number other
                               number(s), or both (i.e., it is prefix-
                               specific). For example, if a patient has a
                               folder in more than one facility, each has its
                               own FOLDER CREATED date.


In the PORTION SIGNED OUT and the PORTION INCOMPLETE fields, Y
indicates that at least one portion of this medical record is now signed out or
is still incomplete; otherwise, these fields are blank. You cannot edit these
fields.


MORE DATA ON FICHE    Enter Y if there is more data available for this
                      patient on microfiche; otherwise, enter N.

                      NOTE:    This information is associated only with the
                               record having your facility's unit number or
                               other number(s), or both (i.e., it is prefix-
                               specific).


COMMENT               Enter other relevant patient information here.
                      These comments appear as part of the patient's medical
                      information summary in the following routines:

                           *   Verify Daily            *   Edit Unit Number
                               Assignments
                                                       *   Delete/Restore
                           *   View Patient                Patient

                           *   Print Patient Data      *   Unmerge Patients
Enter/Edit Patient (MPI Data) (4.1)                                      Page 51




                       In addition, once a patient is selected during a Master
                       Patient Index (MPI) search, this comment appears on the
                       screen (along with other patient data).


Patient Visits

In the next section, enter information for as many visits as necessary.    The
screen scrolls to accommodate all entries.

Each visit must have a date. The health care organization decides how to
manage the rest of the information associated with the visit.

For example, some organizations may want to record multiple locations for a
single account number (such as ER and IN). Others may want to enter only the
location and doctor at the time of discharge. Typically DISCHARGE DATE and
DISCHARGE LOCATION are completed for inpatients only.

A more detailed account of patient activity can be obtained from the Admissions
Module. Some of this information, such as the discharge date, appears on the
Patient Visit History Report you can generate using the Print Patient Visit
History Routine in the Admissions Module.

NOTE:   When several facilities share a single Medical Records database,
        previously entered visit information for all facilities appears here
        (regardless of the facility selected by the user at sign-on). Visit
        information appears in chronological order, beginning with the most
        recent visit. The account number prefix and/or location prefix indicate
        the site of the visit.


DATE                   Enter the admission/service date.

                       Use the standard date format or a T combination
                       (e.g., T-1 for yesterday).

                       You must enter an admission/service date for each visit.

                       When a record is filed, the system rearranges the visit
                       dates, if necessary. The most recent date appears at
                       the top of the list.

                       This may not be a date in the future.

                       If this is for a PRE account, today's date goes here and
                       the date that the patient is due to come in goes at the
                       RESERVATION DATE field.

                       If this patient was admitted/registered through the
Enter/Edit Patient (MPI Data) (4.1)                                   Page 52



                      Admissions application, and this had been a PRE type
                      with a future date in the RESERVATION DATE field, this
                      date will come from the RESERVATION TAKEN date field in
                      the ADM admission/registration screen and will be
                      updated with the date that the account is
                      admitted/registered on once that event occurs in ADM.


TYPE                  Enter the abbreviation that corresponds to the
                      patient's type. The choices for valid types are:

                           IN     Inpatient

                           ER     Emergency room

                           SDC    Surgical day care

                           CLI    Clinical outpatient

                           REF    Referred outpatient

                           RCR    Recurring outpatient

                           POV    Provider Office Visit

                      For each of these types, a "PRE" could be part of the
                      status if the account is a PRE. This can be set 2 ways:
                      if the account is a PRE account in the Admissions
                      application or if the PRE field has its flag set to "Y".


ACCOUNT #             Enter the account number. You can omit any leading
                      zeroes. The system adds zeroes, if necessary, to create
                      an account number of the length that is specified in
                      your MIS parameters. For example, if the length of your
                      account number is seven, and you enter 567, the system
                      changes the number to 0000567.

                      For single-facility systems, you generally use only
                      digits (as shown above). For multifacility systems,
                      however, the account number you enter must have the
                      prefix of the facility to which you are signed-on.
                      (For more information, see Appendix F: Multifacility
                      Systems).

                      If you attempt to enter an account number with an
                      incorrect prefix, the following message appears:

                                        Invalid account #.
Enter/Edit Patient (MPI Data) (4.1)                                      Page 53



                      You cannot enter an account number that has been
                      previously assigned. If the account number is currently
                      active, the following message appears:

                                        Account number in use

                      If you attempt to enter an account number previously
                      assigned to a patient, but is not currently active,
                      the following message appears:

                                        Account number previously used

                      Once you enter an account number via the Enter/Edit
                      Patient Routine, that number can no longer be assigned
                      (by the Admissions or Medical Records modules).


CON                   If the visit associated with the account number
                      entered at the previous prompt has been flagged by
                      Admissions as confidential, Y appears; otherwise
                      this field is blank. You cannot edit this field.

                      NOTE:   If the patient is flagged as confidential,
                              the message **CONFIDENTIAL** appears at the
                              top right of the screen.


LOCATION              Enter the patient's location mnemonic. A Lookup of
                      the MIS Location Dictionary is available.


PRE                   If this field is set to "Y"es, then it indicates
                      that this patient was preadmitted - either in the
                      Admissions application or manually, here.

                      When manually entering visits in MRI, setting this field
                      to "Y"es will cause the visit to be a PRE XXX. The TYPE
                      field will be updated and redisplayed appropriately as
                      this flag is edited. Entering a future date at the
                      VISIT date field will force this flag to be "Y"es, and
                      will make this field non-editable. The discharge date
                      and discharge disposition fields are also inaccessible
                      if the PRE flag is set to "Y".

                      If a discharge date or a discharge disposition exists,
                      you cannot set the PRE flag to "Y"es. An error message
                      will be issued if an attempt is made to do so.


RESERVATION DATE       This should be the date that the patient is due to
Enter/Edit Patient (MPI Data) (4.1)                                    Page 54



                      visit the hospital. This field is accessible to PRE's
                      only, but is not a required field.


DOCTOR                 Enter the attending physician's mnemonic.

                      A Lookup of the MIS Provider Dictionary is available.
                      You can use the name or expanded Lookup features, or
                      both to identify doctors. For more information, see the
                      section titled "Identifying Doctors."



DISCHARGE DT           Enter the discharge date.



DISCHARGE DISP        Enter the patient's discharge disposition from the
                      MIS Discharge Disposition Dictionary. A Lookup is
                      available.


REASON FOR              Enter the reason for this visit, using up to 50
VISIT                   characters of free text.
View Patient (MPI Data) (4.2)                                              Page 55



4.2:       View Patient (MPI Data)


This routine enables a user to view a patient's Master Patient Index data. It
is a display-only screen, and data on it cannot be edited. To edit a patient's
MPI data, use the Enter/Edit Patient routine.

(Users may now view a recurring outpatient's revisit data so that each account
number appears no more than twice in the visit history. Less scrolling through
duplicate information is the result of this.)


       *    the merged numbers in the MERGED FROM field, if unit number merges
            have occurred (which can be scrolled through, if there are more than 4
            of them)

       *    the patient's:

                 -telephone number

                 -phone numbers are formatted automatically based upon input of
                    data into a PHONE field where the MIS parameter is defined.

                 -social security number

       *    if any portions of the medical record is signed out, a list of the
            recipients will appear in the TO field below the PORTION SIGNED
            OUT field

NOTE:      If the patient's address has been entered, it appears (without a
           header) on a single line, below the NAME prompt.
View Patient (MPI Data) (4.2)                                           Page 56

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                        View Patient                                        |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient:                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|Name:                                  Birthdate:            Age:          Sex:             |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|Maiden/Other Names                Other Numbers       Merged From     Telephone #           |
|                                           5                                                |
|                                           5                          SS #                  |
|                                           5                                                |
|                                           5                          More On Fiche:
|
|                                                                                            |
|Mother's Name:                          Discharge Disp:               Portion Incomplete
|
|Record Locator:                         Folder Created:               Portion Signed Out
|
|Comment:                                                                   To               |
|                                                                                9           |
|    Date     Type     Account #    Con Location   Reservation Date    View ICR              |
|          Doctor      Disch Dt Disch Disp Reason For Visit                                  |
|                                                                                            |
|                       64                                                                   |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                       64                                                                   |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                       64                                                                   |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PATIENT               To identify the patient whose data you wish to view,
                      enter one of the following:

                           *    The patient's primary unit number.

                           *    The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
                                prefaced by an E#.

                           *    The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                           *    The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                           *    The patient's home telephone number, prefaced
                                 by T#.

                           *    The patient's social security number, prefaced
                                 by #.

                                If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
View Patient (MPI Data) (4.2)                                           Page 57



                                number within your facility, it replaces the
                                social security number.

                                If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                                unit number, the word NEW replaces the
                                social security number.

                            *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                                in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                                The system then begins a search of the Master
                                Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                                Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                                process).

                            *   An other number (i.e., a unit number
                                assigned by another facility or a number
                                assigned by a department, service, etc.).

                                As when you enter the social security number,
                                the system replaces the other number with
                                either the unit number or the word NEW (See
                                above).

                          If you fail to locate the patient:

                                *   Delete the patient name and identify another
                                    patient to continue

                                                    or

                                *   Press <Exit> to return to the menu screen

                      When you identify a patient by number or locate the
                      patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays
                      his/her primary unit number (if one has been assigned),
                      name, birthdate, age, sex and other Master Patient Index
                      data.

                      The cursor moves to the PX field, where all other
                      numbers assigned to this patient appear. Press the
                      <Enter> key to scroll through these numbers, if
                      necessary. When you have viewed all other numbers,
                      the cursor moves to the patient's visit history. Again,
                      press the <Enter> key, if necessary, to scroll through
                      all the data.

                      When you have finished reviewing the patient's data,
                      press the <Enter> key to display the "Exit? Y" prompt at
                      the bottom of the screen. Press the <Enter> key again
View Patient (MPI Data) (4.2)                                         Page 58



                      to clear the screen.

                      You can then identify another patient to continue, or
                      press the <Enter> key again to return to the menu
                      screen.
Print Patient (MPI Data) (4.3)                                            Page 59



4.3:   Print Patient (MPI Data)



You can use this routine to print the Patient's Data Report for one or more
patients. This report contains the Master Patient Index data, as it appears in
the Enter/Edit Patient routine.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                    Print Patient's Data                                    |
|============================================================================================|
|                                                                                            |
|Patient                    Name                            Birthdate Sex                    |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|Print (D)etail or (S)ummary?                                                                |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PATIENT                To identify the patient(s) whose MPI data you want
                       to print, enter one of the following (the screen will
                       scroll to accommodate as many patients as you wish to
                       enter):

                            *     The patient's primary unit number.

                            *     The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
                                  prefaced by an E#.

                            *     The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                            *     The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                            *     The patient's social security number, prefaced
                                   by a pound sign (#).

                                  If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                                  number within your facility, it replaces the
                                  social security number.

                                  If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                                  unit number, the system erases the social
Print Patient (MPI Data) (4.3)                                           Page 60



                                 security number and leaves this field blank.

                            *    The patient's home telephone number, prefaced
                                 by T#.

                            *    The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                                 in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                                 The system then begins a search of the Master
                                 Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                                 Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                                 process). If the search fails to locate the
                                 patient, delete the patient name and identify
                                 another patient to continue.

                            *    An other number (i.e., a unit number
                                 assigned by another facility or a number
                                 assigned by a department, service, etc.).

                                 As when you enter the social security number,
                                 the system replaces the other number with
                                 either the unit number or leaves the field blank
                                 (See above).

                      When you identify a patient by number or locate the
                      patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays
                      his/her primary unit number (if one has been assigned),
                      name, birthdate, sex and other Master Patient Index
                      data.

                      When you have entered the last patient, leave the next
                      PATIENT field blank and press the <Enter> key. A
                      Print on prompt will then appear at the bottom of
                      the screen.


Print (D)etail or (S)ummary Prompt


Enter D to print a patients visits that include:

  all recurring patient revisits

  all outpatient accounts that are converted to inpatient accounts. These
  converted accounts appear two times with separate entries for each patient
  type.

Enter S to print patient's visits that include:

  the first and last recurring patient revisits that share one account number
Print Patient (MPI Data) (4.3)                                        Page 61




 all outpatient accounts converted to inpatient accounts listed on the report
 only as inpatients
Print Missing Data List (4.4)                                           Page 62



4.4:    Print Missing Data List


Use this routine to print the Missing Data List. This report contains a list
(in chronological order) of patients whose records are missing any of the
following information (used for the Master Patient Index Search):

    *   name                              *   sex

    *   date of birth                     *   mother's name


First select a prefix (to identify the unit number or a specific other
number), and then specify the period of time in which you are interested.
The Missing Data List displays any record which satisfies all three of these
criteria:

    *   It has a number with the specified prefix.

    *   It was active (number edited, portion signed out, etc.) during the
        specified time.

    *   It is missing any of the information listed above.


The list also includes the record's activity date, unit number (if assigned),
and the hospital user. Blanks in the columns indicate missing information.

The data on this log is automatically purged (i.e., permanently removed from
the system) according to the hospital-defined parameters. You cannot specify a
date prior to the date of the last purge.


NOTE:  To list missing data for records without a unit number or other
       number, select the primary unit number prefix. The list now includes
       both types of records (i.e., those with a primary unit number as well as
       those with no assigned number).
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                               Missing Data List                               |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|For Prefix:                                                                    |
|                                                                               |
|From Date:                                                                     |
|Thru Date:                                                                     |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FOR PREFIX               The primary unit number prefix used by your facility
Print Missing Data List (4.4)                                         Page 63



                      appears. To print the missing data list for patients
                      who have unit numbers with this prefix and for patients
                      without a unit number or other number, press
                      <Enter>.

                      To print the missing data list for patients who have
                      other numbers, delete the default prefix, and enter
                      the desired prefix. (Note that you may only enter
                      prefixes used by your facility.)


FROM DATE             Enter the date on which you want the system to begin
                      its search for active records with missing data. Use
                      the standard date format or a T combination (e.g.,
                      T-1 for yesterday).


THRU DATE             Enter the date through which you want the system to
                      search for active records with missing data. Use
                      the standard date format or a T combination (e.g.,
                      T-1 for yesterday).

                      The routine lists all patients with missing data whose
                      records had activity during the specified period.

                      To find patients with missing data whose records had
                      activity on one single date, enter that date in both the
                      FROM DATE and THRU DATE fields.
Delete/Restore Patient (4.5)                                            Page 64



4.5:    Delete/Restore Patient


Use this routine to remove a patient (e.g., an expired patient) from the Master
Patient Index (MPI) or to restore the MPI data of an erroneously deleted
patient without having to retype the information.

IMPORTANT

To restore a deleted patient, enter his or her unit number or other number.
Only patients with at least one of these numbers can be restored.

Once the Medical Records Department deletes or restores a patient's MPI data
using this routine, the system automatically updates the Demo Recall files.

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

The Delete/Restore Log routine tracks all changes made using this routine.

NOTE:   To merge two patients' MPI data instead of deleting one patient, use
        the Merge Patients routine. That routine retains the discontinued
        number and MPI data and allows you to unmerge the records at a later
        date.

_______________________________________________________________________________

WARNING!

MEDITECH suggests you use this routine with caution. If several facilities
share one Medical Records database, this routine deletes the patient from
all facilities, not simply the facility selected by the user at sign-on.

There is no way to restore a patient without a unit number or other number,
if such a patient is deleted by mistake, all of the patient's MPI data would
have to be reentered manually.
Delete/Restore Patient (4.5)                                             Page 65

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                   Delete/Restore Patient                                   |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient:                                          6                                         |
|                                                                                            |
|Name:                                 Birthdate:           Age:          ex:                |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|Maiden/Other Name:                                   Folder Created:                        |
|Mother's Name:                                       More Data On Fiche:                    |
|Record Locator:                                      Portion Signed Out:                    |
|Discharge Disp:                                      Portion Incomplete:                    |
|Comment:                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|Px Number                                                                                   |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|      Date      Type    Account #     Location    Doctor      Res Date Disch Dt Disch Disp|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PATIENT               To DELETE a patient from the system, enter the
                      patient's primary unit number, social security number,
                      other number, or name. To RESTORE a patient to
                      the system, you must enter the patient's unit number,
                      other number or social security number, but not the
                      name. NOTE: Users can identify a patient's demographic
                      recall via their insurance policy number by entering
                      the new syntax "P#nnnnnnnnnn". If the user enters a
                      policy number which does not exist in the system, an
                      error message will appear: Patient not found.

                      To DELETE a patient:

                               Enter the patient's primary unit number, social
                               security number, or name. For more information
                               about the PATIENT prompt, see the on-line
                               documentation for the Enter/Edit Patient Routine.

                               For more information about the PATIENT prompt,
                               see the section titled "Enter/Edit Patient."

                               When you identify the patient, the system displays
                               his or her primary unit number (if one has been
                               assigned) and Master Patient Index data.
Delete/Restore Patient (4.5)                                              Page 66




                               Check this information to confirm that this is the
                               patient you want to delete.

                               If this is the correct patient, press <Enter>. The
                               Delete? prompt appears at the bottom of the
                               screen. To delete the patient's MPI/Demo
                               Recall data from the system, enter Y.

                               NOTE:   The system does not allow you to delete
                                       a patient if his or her record is incomplete
                                       or a portion has been signed out or
                                       reserved.

                               If you do not wish to delete the patient, enter
                               N.


                      To RESTORE a deleted patient:

                               Enter the patient's primary unit number, other
                               number, or social security number. For more
                               information about the PATIENT prompt, see the
                               on-line documentation for the Enter/Edit Patient
                               Routine.


                               When the deleted patient's MPI data appears, press
                               <Enter>. The Restore? prompt appears. To
                               restore the patient's MPI data to the system, enter
                               Y.

                               If you do not want to restore the patient's
                               data, enter N.
List PMM Visit Data File (4.6)                                         Page 67



4.6:   List PMM Visit Data File


The MEDITECH system will allow your health care organization to retrieve a
daily file of visits from another vendor Practice Management system. Each
entry within the file should reflect a single office visit. Multiple visits in
a single day should have corresponding multiple records in this file. All
visits for a day need to be logged into this file before midnight. It is the
responsibility of the Other Vendor Practice Mangement system to maintain the
data contained in this file.

Once per day, as part of the MEDITECH Admission System Midnight Run, MEDITECH
will read the entries in the file defined for the previous date. For each
entry, MEDITECH will file a corresponding visit in the MEDITECH Medical Record
visit history. If the file is not flagged as being ready, the Admission's
midnight run will retrieve all read files with the following day's Midnight
Run.

MEDITECH will provide an error listing identifying any records in the Other
Vendor's directory with incomplete data which would prevent the visit from
being filed in the MEDITECH MRI visit history. This error listing is for the
purpose of identifying problem records for Other Vendor correction and/or
subsequent manual entry on the MEDITECH system.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                List Visit File                                |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|PMM Database:                                                                  |
|                                                                               |
|From Date:                                                                     |
|                                                                               |
|Thru Date:                                                                     |
|                                                                               |
|Include             ds                                                         |
|                                                                               |
|(N = Not Processed, P = Processed, R = Rejected)                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PMM DATABASE
                             Enter the Other Vendor MRI type database that has
                             been created in the MIS APPLICATION Dictionary and
                             added to the second page of the Admissions
                             parameters. A Lookup is available.

                             The ADM Midnight run will now be able to retrieve
                             visit data from the Other Vendor when it runs.
List PMM Visit Data File (4.6)                                        Page 68



FROM DATE                  Enter the date from which you would like to
                           view the visits that were Processed by the Midnight
                           Run from the Other Vendors Practice Management
                           system.


THRU DATE                   Enter the date through which you would like to
                            view the visits that were Processed by the Midnight
                            Run from the Other Vendors Practice Management
                            system.


INCLUDE __ RECORDS          Identify the status(s) of visits that have been
                            filed or rejected from the Other Vendors Practice
                            Management system that you want to include in this
                            report. The choice of ALL is the default.
                            The other choices are N = Not Processed, P =
                            Processed, R = Rejected.
Using Demo Recall Routines (5)                                            Page 69



Chapter 5:   Using Demo Recall Routines


Use the Demo Recall routines to

     *   edit patient's demographic and administrative residing on your
         facility's database

     *   view this information, in addition to the allergies from the Nursing
         Module

     *   print the Demo Recall Print Report


The information stored in the Demo Recall Feature serves as a source of the
patient's demographic and administrative information for the Admissions Module.
When a patient who has visited the hospital before is admitted or registered,
the admissions clerk can choose to use the Demo Recall Feature to retrieve
current information such as the patient's address, guarantors, and persons to
notify. The hospital can update this information at any time. Retrieving Demo
Recall information instead of rekeying patient information speeds the
admissions process and improves the accuracy of the Admissions file's contents.

Information stored in the Demo Recall Feature can be updated in the Admissions
Module and in the Medical Records Module. The hospital can use the Purge Demo
Recall Data Routine in the Admissions Module to purge the demo recall
information for patients with no visits after a specified date.

In the Billing/Accounts Payable Module, you can edit only the patient's
address, telephone number and social security and view part of the Demo Recall
information.

For more information, see the section titled "Appendix A:   The Interaction
Between the MRI & ADM Modules."
Edit Data (5.1)                                                            Page 70



5.1:       Edit Data


The patient's Demo Recall data appears in a standard five screen display. If a
Customer-Defined Screen (CDS) has been associated with the patient's patient
class, the CDS appears as a sixth screen.

This routine allows you to edit the existing information in the Demo Recall
file. For example, if the patient is now covered by a second insurance policy,
you can enter the new policy. If the patient has moved, you can update the
address. The screens that you can edit are:

       *    Patient Demographics

       *    Patient's Employer, Person to Notify, Next of Kin

       *    Guarantor, Guarantor's Employer, Order of Insurances

       *    UB82 (and Allergies)

       *    customer-defined screen (optional)


After you identify the patient, some of the patient's MPI data appears on the
upper portion of the first screen, as follows:

    *      primary unit number        *    mother's name

    *      name                        *   folder date

    *      birthdate                   *   last visit date

    *      age                         *   last visit type

    *      sex                         *   last edit date (for the Demo Recall data)

    *      maiden/other name


You can use this information to verify that this is, in fact, the patient whose
Demo Recall data you wish to enter or edit.

You can now enter and/or edit the information, starting with the patient's
address.

The Set Custom Required Fields Routine in the Admissions Module allows your
hospital to determine which fields in the Demo Recall screens are required. If
a Demo Recall field is required, you must enter a value in that field before
you can file the screen or move to a different screen.
Edit Data (5.1)                                                        Page 71



Other Demo Recall Data (screen 6)

The sixth screen appears only if a CDS has first been associated with the
patient via the Admissions Module's Patient Admissions/Registration Routines.
The queries appearing on the CDS is determined by a combination of:

    *   patient status

    *   the query's dictionary definition

    *   which queries have been answered in the Admissions Module


For more information, see the Admissions Module User Manual and the MIS Module
User Manual (Volume 1).

Since there is no standard format for a CDS, no description of the screen can
be provided here. You can, however, use <HELP> and <DOCUM> to read the on-line
assistance entered in the MIS Customer Defined Screen Dictionary.
Patient Demographics (5.1.1)                                                Page 72



5.1.1:    Patient Demographics


+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                            DEMO RECALL EDIT             Page 1                             |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient                                           5                                         |
|                                                                                            |
|Name                                    Birthdate            Age         Sex                |
|                                                                                            |
|Maiden and/or                                       Folder Created                          |
|Other Names                                         Last Visit Date                         |
|                                                    Last Visit Type                         |
|Mother's Name                                       Last Edit Date                          |
|                                                    Exp Date                                |
|                                                                                            |
|Family Dr                                                                                   |
|Primary Care Dr                                                                             |
|                                                                                            |
|V.I.P.?                                                                                     |
|VIP Comment                                                                                 |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PATIENT                 To identify the patient whose demographic data you
                        wish to edit, enter one of the following:

                                 *   The patient's primary unit number.

                                 *   The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
                                     prefaced by an E#.

                                 *   The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                                 *   The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                                 *   The patient's social security number, prefaced
                                     by a pound sign (#).

                                     If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                                     number within your facility, it replaces the
                                     social security number.

                                     If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                                     unit number, the system erases the social
                                     security number, leaving this field blank.

                                 *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                                     in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.
Patient Demographics (5.1.1)                                              Page 73




                                   The system then begins a search of the Master
                                   Patient Index to identify the patient.

                               *   An other number (e.g., a unit number
                                   assigned by another facility or a number
                                   assigned by a department, service, etc.)

                                   As when you enter the social security number,
                                   if the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                                   number within your facility, it replaces the
                                   other number.

                                   If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                                   unit number, the system erases the other
                                   number, leaving this field blank.


                      When you identify a patient by number or locate the
                      patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays
                      his/her primary unit number (if one has been assigned),
                      name, birthdate, age, sex and expiration date (if
                      applicable) to help identify the patient.


FAMILY DR             Enter the mnemonic for the family doctor.

                      Lookup: MIS Provider Dictionary

                      Identifying a Doctor in the MIS Provider Dictionary

                      To see list of               Do the following:
                      doctors ordered by:
                      ___________________           _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                     Press <Lookup>, or type a
                                                   partial mnemonic and press
                                                   <Lookup>.

                      Name                         Type N\ or N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                                   and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                                   N\JOHNS.

                      --------------------------------------------------------
                      To see an expanded       Do the following:
                      list of doctors
                      ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                     Type /X or partial mnemonic/X
Patient Demographics (5.1.1)                                                    Page 74



                                                         and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                      Name                     Type N\/X or
                                               N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                               N\JO/X
                      --------------------------------------------------------

                      The following information appears in the expanded
                      Lookup:

                               *   mnemonic               *    ADM service

                               *   name                   *    ABS service

                               *   telephone number       *    if doctor has admitting
                                                               privileges
                               *   doctor type
                                                           *   is doctor on staff
                               *   doctor group


                      The family doctor's name appears in the field to the
                      right if it has been defined in the MIS Provider
                      Dictionary.


                      Entering a Doctor Not in the MIS Provider Dictionary

                      If the patient's family doctor is not listed in the
                      Provider Dictionary, enter the doctor's name using up to
                      30 characters of free text. The system responds with
                      the message:

                               Not found.     NEW?   Y

                      To verify this entry as the family doctor, press
                      <Enter>.

                      To return to the FAMILY DR prompt, delete the Y
                      and enter N.


PRIMARY CARE DR       Enter the mnemonic of the physician responsible for
                      coordinating the patient's overall care.

                      Lookup:      MIS Provider Dictionary

                      Identifying a Doctor in the MIS Provider Dictionary

                      To see list of                 Do the following:
Patient Demographics (5.1.1)                                                  Page 75



                      doctors ordered by:

                      -------------------          ---------------------------

                      Mnemonic                      Press <Lookup>, or type a
                                                    partial mnemonic and press
                                                    <Lookup>.

                      Name                          Type N\ or N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                                    and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                                    N\JOHNS.

                      --------------------          --------------------------
                      To see an expanded            Do the following:
                      list of doctors
                      ordered by:

                      --------------------            --------------------------

                      Mnemonic                      Type /X or partial mnemonic/X
                                                    and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                      Name                          Type N\/X or
                                                    N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                                    N\JO/X
                      --------------------          --------------------------

                      The following information appears in the expanded
                      Lookup:

                               *   mnemonic             *    ADM service

                               *   name                 *    ABS service

                               *   telephone number     *    if doctor has admitting
                                                             privileges
                               *   doctor type
                                                         *   is doctor on staff
                               *   doctor group

                      The primary care dr's name appears in the field to
                      the right if it has been defined in the MIS Provider
                      Dictionary.


VIP?                  Enter Y to assign this patient VIP status.
                      Enter N if you do not want to assign this
                      patient VIP status.

                      If you enter        Y, the cursor moves to the
Patient Demographics (5.1.1)                                           Page 76



                      VIP COMMENT prompt to allow you to enter appropriate
                      comments.


VIP COMMENT           If desired, describe why this patient is being
                      assigned/unassigned VIP status, using up to 50
                      characters of free text.
Patient's Address, Employer, Person to Notify, Next of Kin (5.1.2)     Page 77



5.1.2:   Patient's Address, Employer, Person to Notify, Next of Kin


+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                 DEMO RECALL EDIT     Page 2                                |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient                                                                                     |
|                                                                                            |
|-----------Patient's Information-----------    -----------------Employer----------------    |
|Street                                         Name                                         |
|Street                                                                                      |
|City                                           Street                                       |
|State               ode                        Street                                       |
|Home Ph                                        City                                         |
|Other Ph                                       State               ode                      |
|Mar Status               Race                  Emp Phone                                    |
|Soc Sec #                                      Pt Occup                                     |
|Religion                                                                                    |
|Affil                                                                                       |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|----------------Next Of Kin----------------    -------------Person To Notify-------------   |
|Name                                           Name                                         |
|Street                                         Street                                       |
|Street                                         Street                                       |
|City                                           City                                         |
|State               ode                        State               ode                      |
|Home Ph                                        Home Ph                                      |
|Work Ph                                        Work Ph                                      |
|Rel To Pt                                      Rel To Pt                                    |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


STREET                 Enter the patient's street address using up
                       to 30 characters of free text.

                       If you are pre-admitting or pre-registering a patient, a
                       response to this prompt is not required.

                       If you are admitting or registering a patient, this is a
                       required field.

                       When an edit is made to the patient's address
                       information, or to the patient's or Guarantor's
                       employer, the user is prompted via a screen message
                       whether he would like to also update possibly related
                       fields, such as address of Next of Kin or Person to
                       Notify or Guarantor's employer. If the user responds
Patient's Address, Employer, Person to Notify, Next of Kin (5.1.2)    Page 78



                      Y, then these fields will be automatically updated,
                      based on the user's edit.


STREET                If necessary, enter additional street address
                      information using up to 30 characters of free text. For
                      example, you can enter data for an apartment building or
                      a condominium.


CITY                   Enter the patient's zip or postal code.

                      If the code is defined in the MIS Zip/Postal Code
                      Dictionary, the system copies the city, state and
                      zip/postal code into the appropriate fields.

                      If your entry is not defined in the Zip/Postal Code
                      Dictionary, it is copied to the ZIP/POSTAL CODE
                      field, and the cursor returns to this field where you
                      can identify the patient's city.

                      If you are pre-admitting or pre-registering a patient, a
                      response to this prompt is not required.

                      If you are admitting or registering a patient, this is a
                      required field.


STATE                 Enter the standard two character abbreviation
                      of the state.

                      If you are pre-admitting or pre-registering a patient, a
                      response to this prompt is not required.

                      If you are admitting or registering a patient, this is a
                      required field.


ZIP CODE              Enter the patient's zip code in standard five or
                      nine digit format (nnnnn or nnnnn-nnnn).

                      If you are pre-admitting or pre-registering a patient, a
                      response to this prompt is not required.

                      If you are admitting or registering a patient, this is a
                      required field.

                      When you enter a nine digit zip code at the CITY
                      prompt, the corresponding city and state appear on the
                      questionnaire. If the nine digit zip code does not
Patient's Address, Employer, Person to Notify, Next of Kin (5.1.2)      Page 79



                      exist in the MIS Zip Code Dictionary, the system checks
                      the first five digits, and, if they exist in the
                      dictionary, the corresponding city and state appear on
                      the questionnaire.

                      If, for example, you enter 02135-1234, the corresponding
                      city (Brighton) and state (MA) appear if the code exists
                      in the MIS Zip Code Dictionary. If the nine digit code
                      does not exist in the dictionary, the system checks for
                      the five digit code (02135).

                      If the Default Zip Code field in the ADM parameters is
                      set to Y, you can enter the city and state and the
                      zip code automatically appears on the questionnaire.
                      This free text field can contain five digits of the zip
                      code.

                      The Zip Code Statistics Report files   the nine digit zip
                      code. If a nine digit code does not    exist, the system
                      checks for a five digit entry. If a    five digit entry
                      does not exist, you can file the zip   code as
                      UNKNOWN.

                      NOTE (regarding the Canadian System): The STATS ONLY
                      prompt, in the MIS Zip/Postal Code Dictionary allows
                      your hospital to define three character zip codes;
                      otherwise, you can enter six character zip codes that
                      are defined in the MIS Zip/Postal Code Dictionary.


HOME PHONE            Enter the patient's home telephone number using up
                      to 18 characters of free text.

                      If you are pre-admitting or pre-registering a patient, a
                      response to this prompt is not required.

                      If you are admitting or registering a patient, this is a
                      required field.

                      Your hospital defines a format for entering a phone
                      number in the MIS Parameters.

                      The MIS parameter defines how the hospital wants to
                      format the first 7 or 10 digits of phone numbers.

                      Sample definitions of the format parameter are:

                                          999-999-9999
                                          999 999-9999
                                          999/999-9999
Patient's Address, Employer, Person to Notify, Next of Kin (5.1.2)      Page 80



                                          (999)999-9999

                      If you enter an incomplete phone number (e.g., you enter
                      only an area code which in all probability would not be
                      consistent with the default format), the following
                      warning message appears:

                      Does not match standard phone number format of
                      (999)999-9999. Use anyway?

                      If you enter Y, the system accepts your entry at
                      this prompt. If you enter N, the following message
                      appears:

                            Phone Format is (999)999-9999.

                      You may then enter a number using the correct format.
                      When you enter the phone number in the correct format
                      (i.e., probably using the entire number: area code,
                      exchange, and number), the system automatically inserts
                      hyphens and parentheses as specified in the MIS
                      Parameters.


OTHER PHONE           Enter the patient's other telephone number using up
                      to 18 characters of free text.

                      A response to this field is not standardly required.

                      Your hospital defines a format for entering a phone
                      number in the MIS Parameters.

                      The MIS parameter defines how the hospital wants to
                      format the first 7 or 10 digits of phone numbers.

                      Sample definitions of the format parameter are:

                                          999-999-9999
                                          999 999-9999
                                          999/999-9999
                                          (999)999-9999

                      If you enter an incomplete phone number (e.g., you enter
                      only an area code which in all probability would not be
                      consistent with the default format), the following
                      warning message appears:

                      Does not match standard phone number format of
                      (999)999-9999. Use anyway?
Patient's Address, Employer, Person to Notify, Next of Kin (5.1.2)         Page 81



                      If you enter Y, the system accepts your entry at
                      this prompt. If you enter N, the following
                      message appears:

                            Phone Format is (999)999-9999.

                      You may then enter a number using the correct format.
                      When you enter the phone number in the correct format
                      (i.e., probably using the entire number: area code,
                      exchange, and number), the system automatically inserts
                      hyphens and parentheses as specified in the MIS
                      Parameters.


MARITAL STATUS        Enter the mnemonic that identifies this patient's
                      marital status.

                      Lookup: MIS Marital Status Dictionary


RACE                  Enter the mnemonic that identifies this patient's
                      race.

                      Lookup: MIS Race Dictionary


SOC SEC #             Enter the patient's social security number.    The
                      system automatically formats your entry.


RELIGION               Enter the mnemonic for the patient's religion.

                      Lookup: MIS Religion Dictionary


AFFILIATION           If appropriate, enter the patient's religious
                      affiliation using up to 30 characters of free text.
                      This field is skipped if you leave the Religion field
                      blank.


                      PATIENT'S EMPLOYER

NAME                   Enter the mnemonic of the patient's employer.

                      Lookup: MIS Employer Dictionary

                      If the patient's employer is defined in the dictionary,
                      when you enter the employer's mnemonic, the system
                      inserts the employer's full name, address and phone
Patient's Address, Employer, Person to Notify, Next of Kin (5.1.2)      Page 82



                      number.

                      If the patient's employer is not defined in the Employer
                      Dictionary, enter the employer's name using up to 30
                      characters of free text. The system responds:

                              Not found.   NEW?   Y

                      Press <Enter> to confirm that this employer is not in
                      the Employer Dictionary, or delete the Y and press
                      <Enter> to go back to the NAME field.


                      NOTE:    Information entered for a NEW employer
                               is not automatically added to the Employer
                               Dictionary.


                      If you enter a NAME, the system requires responses to
                      the following prompts in this section:

                           *    STREET            *   STATE       *   PHONE

                           *    CITY              *   ZIP CODE


STREET                Enter the employer's street address using up to
                      30 characters of free text. This is a required field.


STREET                If necessary, enter additional street address
                      information using up to 30 characters of free text.


CITY                   Enter the employer's zip or postal code.

                      If the code is defined in the MIS Zip/Postal Code
                      Dictionary, the system copies the city, state and zip
                      code into the appropriate fields.

                      If your entry is not defined in the Zip/Postal Code
                      Dictionary, it is copied to the ZIP/POSTAL CODE
                      field, and the cursor returns to this field where you
                      can enter the employer's city.

                      This is a required field.


STATE                 Enter the standard two character abbreviation of the
                      state. This is a required field.
Patient's Address, Employer, Person to Notify, Next of Kin (5.1.2)     Page 83



ZIP CODE              Enter the employer's zip code in standard five
                      or nine digit format (nnnnn or nnnnn-nnnn). This is a
                      required field.


EMP PHONE             Enter the employer's phone number, using up to
                      18 characters of free text. This is a required field.

                      Your heath care organization defines a format for
                      entering a phone number in the MIS Parameters.

                      The MIS parameter defines how the organization wants to
                      format the first 7 or 10 digits of phone numbers. Sample
                      definitions of the format parameter are:

                                          999-999-9999
                                          999 999-9999
                                          999/999-9999
                                          (999)999-9999

                      If you enter an incomplete phone number (e.g., you
                      enter only an area code which in all probability would
                      not be consistent with the default format), the
                      following warning message appears:

                      Does not match standard phone number format of
                      (999)999 -9999. Use anyway?

                      If you enter Y, the system accepts your entry at the
                      PHONE prompt. If you enter N, the following
                      message appears:

                            Phone Format is (999)999-9999.

                      You can then enter a number at the PHONE prompt
                      using the correct format. When you enter the phone
                      number in the correct format (i.e., probably using the
                      entire number: area code, exchange, and number), the
                      system automatically inserts hyphens and parentheses as
                      specified in the MIS Tool Box Parameters.


PT OCCUP              Enter the patient's occupation, using up to
                      20 characters of free text.


                      NEXT OF KIN

NAME                  Enter the name of the patient's next of kin in
                      standard LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format, using up to 30
Patient's Address, Employer, Person to Notify, Next of Kin (5.1.2)      Page 84



                      characters of free text.


                      NOTE:    If the guarantor or person to notify has
                               already been defined for this patient, you can
                               enter SG or SPTN if appropriate.


                      If you enter a NAME, the system requires responses to
                      the following prompts in this section:

                           *   STREET       *   STATE       *   HOME PHONE

                           *   CITY         *   ZIP CODE    *   RELATIONSHIP TO
                                                                PATIENT


STREET                Enter the next of kin's street address, using up
                      to 30 characters of free text.

                      NOTE:    If the guarantor or person to notify has
                               already been defined for this patient, you can
                               enter SG or SPTN, if appropriate. Also, if the
                               next of kin lives with the patient, you can enter
                               SP.


STREET                If necessary, enter additional street address
                      information using up to 30 characters of free text. For
                      example, you can enter data for an apartment building or
                      condominium at this prompt.


CITY                   Enter the next of kin's zip or postal code.

                      If the code is defined in the MIS Zip/Postal Code
                      Dictionary, the system copies the city, state and
                      zip/postal code into the appropriate fields.

                      If your entry is not defined in the Zip/Postal Code
                      Dictionary, it is copied to the ZIP/POSTAL CODE
                      field, and the cursor returns to this field where you
                      can identify the next of kin's city.


STATE                 Enter the standard two character abbreviation
                      of the state.


ZIP CODE               Enter the next of kin's zip code in standard five or
Patient's Address, Employer, Person to Notify, Next of Kin (5.1.2)      Page 85



                      nine digit format (nnnnn or nnnnn-nnnn).

                      When you enter a nine digit zip code at the CITY
                      prompt, the corresponding city and state appear on the
                      questionnaire. If the nine digit zip code does not
                      exist in the MIS Zip Code Dictionary, the system checks
                      the first five digits, and, if they exist in the
                      dictionary, the corresponding city and state appear on
                      the questionnaire.

                      If, for example, you enter 02135-1234, the corresponding
                      city (Brighton) and state (MA) appear if the code exists
                      in the MIS Zip Code Dictionary. If the nine digit code
                      does not exist in the dictionary, the system checks for
                      the five digit code (02135).

                      If the Default Zip Code field in the ADM parameters is
                      set to Y, you can enter the city and state and the
                      zip code automatically appears on the questionnaire.
                      This free text field can contain five digits of the zip
                      code.

                      The Zip Code Statistics Report files   the nine digit zip
                      code. If a nine digit code does not    exist, the system
                      checks for a five digit entry. If a    five digit entry
                      does not exist, you can file the zip   code as
                      UNKNOWN.

                      NOTE (regarding the Canadian System): A new prompt,
                      STATS ONLY, has been added to the MIS Zip/Postal
                      Code Dictionary. This prompt allows your hospital to
                      define three character zip codes; otherwise, you can
                      enter six character zip codes that are defined in the
                      MIS Zip/Postal Code Dictionary.


HOME PHONE            Enter the next of kin's home phone number,
                      using up to 18 characters of free text.

                      Your hospital defines a format for entering a phone
                      number in the MIS Parameters.

                      The MIS parameter defines how the hospital wants to
                      format the first 7 or 10 digits of phone numbers. Sample
                      definitions of the format parameter are:

                                          999-999-9999
                                          999 999-9999
                                          999/999-9999
                                          (999)999-9999
Patient's Address, Employer, Person to Notify, Next of Kin (5.1.2)     Page 86




                      If you enter an incomplete phone number (e.g., you
                      enter only an area code which in all probability would
                      not be consistent with the default format), the
                      following warning message appears:

                      Does not match standard phone number format of
                      (999)999 -9999. Use anyway?

                      If you enter Y, the system accepts your entry at the
                      PHONE prompt. If you enter N, the following
                      message appears:

                            Phone Format is (999)999-9999.

                      You can then enter a number at the PHONE prompt
                      using the correct format. When you enter the phone
                      number in the correct format (i.e., probably using the
                      entire number: area code, exchange, and number), the
                      system automatically inserts hyphens and parentheses as
                      specified in the MIS Tool Box Parameters.


WORK PHONE            Enter the next of kin's work phone number, using
                      up to 18 characters of free text.

                      Your hospital defines a format for entering a phone
                      number in the MIS Parameters.

                      The MIS parameter defines how the hospital wants to
                      format the first 7 or 10 digits of phone numbers. Sample
                      definitions of the format parameter are:

                                          999-999-9999
                                          999 999-9999
                                          999/999-9999
                                          (999)999-9999

                      If you enter an incomplete phone number (e.g., you
                      enter only an area code which in all probability would
                      not be consistent with the default format), the
                      following warning message appears:

                      Does not match standard phone number format of
                      (999)999 -9999. Use anyway?

                      If you enter Y, the system accepts your entry at the
                      PHONE prompt. If you enter N, the following
                      message appears:
Patient's Address, Employer, Person to Notify, Next of Kin (5.1.2)         Page 87



                              Phone Format is (999)999-9999.

                      You can then enter a number at the PHONE prompt
                      using the correct format. When you enter the phone
                      number in the correct format (i.e., probably using the
                      entire number: area code, exchange, and number), the
                      system automatically inserts hyphens and parentheses as
                      specified in the MIS Tool Box Parameters.


REL TO PT             Enter the mnemonic that describes the relationship
                      between the next of kin and the patient.

                      Lookup: MIS Relationship Dictionary

                      When you enter a relationship mnemonic, the full name of
                      the relationship appears in the next field, to
                      completely identify it.


                      PERSON TO NOTIFY

NAME                  Enter the name of the person to notify in standard
                      LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format, using up to 30 characters
                      of free text.


                      NOTE:    If the guarantor or next of kin has already
                               been defined for this patient, you can enter
                               SG or SNOK if appropriate.


                      If you enter a NAME, the system requires responses to
                      the following prompts in this section:

                           *   STREET       *   STATE          *   HOME PHONE

                           *   CITY         *   ZIP CODE       *   RELATIONSHIP TO
                                                                   PATIENT


STREET
                           Enter the street address of the person to notify,
                           using up to 30 characters of free text.

                      NOTE:    If the guarantor or patient's next of kin has
                               already been defined for this patient, you can
                               enter SG or SNOK, if appropriate. Also, if the
                               person to notify lives with the patient, you can
                               enter SP.
Patient's Address, Employer, Person to Notify, Next of Kin (5.1.2)      Page 88



STREET                If necessary, enter additional street address
                      information using up to 30 characters of free text. For
                      example, you can enter data for an apartment building or
                      condominium at this prompt.


CITY                   Enter the person to notify's zip or postal code.

                      If the code is defined in the MIS Zip/Postal Code
                      Dictionary, the system copies the city, state and
                      zip/postal code into the appropriate fields.

                      If your entry is not defined in the Zip/Postal Code
                      Dictionary, it is copied to the ZIP/POSTAL CODE
                      field, and the cursor returns to this field where you
                      can identify the person to notify's city.


STATE                 Enter the standard two character abbreviation of the
                      state.


ZIP CODE              Enter the person to notify's zip code in standard
                      five or nine digit format (nnnnn or nnnnn-nnnn).

                      When you enter a nine digit zip code at the CITY
                      prompt, the corresponding city and state appear on the
                      questionnaire. If the nine digit zip code does not
                      exist in the MIS Zip Code Dictionary, the system checks
                      the first five digits, and, if they exist in the
                      dictionary, the corresponding city and state appear on
                      the questionnaire.

                      If, for example, you enter 02135-1234, the corresponding
                      city (Brighton) and state (MA) appear if the code exists
                      in the MIS Zip Code Dictionary. If the nine digit code
                      does not exist in the dictionary, the system checks for
                      the five digit code (02135).

                      If the Default Zip Code field in the ADM parameters is
                      set to Y, you can enter the city and state and the
                      zip code automatically appears on the questionnaire.
                      This free text field can contain five digits of the zip
                      code.

                      The Zip Code Statistics Report files   the nine digit zip
                      code. If a nine digit code does not    exist, the system
                      checks for a five digit entry. If a    five digit entry
                      does not exist, you can file the zip   code as
                      UNKNOWN.
Patient's Address, Employer, Person to Notify, Next of Kin (5.1.2)      Page 89




                      NOTE (regarding the Canadian System): A new prompt,
                      STATS ONLY, has been added to the MIS Zip/Postal
                      Code Dictionary. This prompt allows your hospital to
                      define three character zip codes; otherwise, you can
                      enter six character zip codes that are defined in the
                      MIS Zip/Postal Code Dictionary.


HOME PHONE            Enter the person to notify's home phone number
                      using up to 18 characters of free text.

                      Your hospital defines a format for entering a phone
                      number in the MIS Parameters.

                      The MIS parameter defines how the hospital wants to
                      format the first 7 or 10 digits of phone numbers. Sample
                      definitions of the format parameter are:

                                          999-999-9999
                                          999 999-9999
                                          999/999-9999
                                          (999)999-9999

                      If you enter an incomplete phone number (e.g., you
                      enter only an area code which in all probability would
                      not be consistent with the default format), the
                      following warning message appears:

                      Does not match standard phone number format of
                      (999)999 -9999. Use anyway?

                      If you enter Y, the system accepts your entry at the
                      PHONE prompt. If you enter N, the following
                      message appears:

                            Phone Format is (999)999-9999.

                      You can then enter a number at the PHONE prompt
                      using the correct format. When you enter the phone
                      number in the correct format (i.e., probably using the
                      entire number: area code, exchange, and number), the
                      system automatically inserts hyphens and parentheses as
                      specified in the MIS Tool Box Parameters.


WORK PHONE            Enter the person to notify's work phone number,
                      using up to 18 characters of free text.

                      Your hospital defines a format for entering a phone
Patient's Address, Employer, Person to Notify, Next of Kin (5.1.2)     Page 90



                      number in the MIS Parameters.

                      The MIS parameter defines how the hospital wants to
                      format the first 7 or 10 digits of phone numbers. Sample
                      definitions of the format parameter are:

                                          999-999-9999
                                          999 999-9999
                                          999/999-9999
                                          (999)999-9999

                      If you enter an incomplete phone number (e.g., you
                      enter only an area code which in all probability would
                      not be consistent with the default format), the
                      following warning message appears:

                      Does not match standard phone number format of
                      (999)999 -9999. Use anyway?

                      If you enter Y, the system accepts your entry at the
                      PHONE prompt. If you enter N, the following
                      message appears:

                            Phone Format is (999)999-9999.

                      You can then enter a number at the PHONE prompt
                      using the correct format. When you enter the phone
                      number in the correct format (i.e., probably using the
                      entire number: area code, exchange, and number), the
                      system automatically inserts hyphens and parentheses as
                      specified in the MIS Tool Box Parameters.


REL TO PT             Enter the mnemonic that describes the relationship
                      between the person to notify and the patient.

                      Lookup: MIS Relationship Dictionary

                      When you enter a relationship mnemonic, the full name of
                      the relationship appears in the next field, to
                      completely identify it.
Guarantor, Guarantor's Employer, Order of Insurances (5.1.3)             Page 91



5.1.3:    Guarantor, Guarantor's Employer, Order of Insurances


NOTE:    There are two variations of this screen: one for systems that
         feature patient indexing and the other for guarantor indexing systems.
         The only difference is that the guarantor indexing screen has two
         additional prompts:

            *   GUARANTOR'S SOCIAL SECURITY #

            *   EDIT every patient with this guarantor -or- SWITCH only this
                patient

        The guarantor indexing screen is shown below. If your system is not set
        up for guarantor indexing, simply ignore these two prompts.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                              DEMO RECALL EDIT           Page 3                             |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient                                                                                     |
|                                                                                            |
|Guarantor's Social Security #                                                               |
|                                                                                            |
|Change guarantor for Visit, Patient or All of the guarantor's patients                      |
|                                                                                            |
|-------------------Guarantor-------------------   --------Guarantor's Employer------------- |
|Name                                              Name                                      |
|Street                                                                                      |
|Street                                            Street                                    |
|City                                              Street                                    |
|State               de                            City                                      |
|Home Ph                                           State                ode                  |
|Rel To Pt                                         Phone                                     |
|                                                  Guar Occup                                |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|--------------------Insurances-------------------                                           |
|Ins #1                                            Fin Class                                 |
|Ins #2                                                                                      |
|Ins #3                                                                                      |
|Ins #4                                            Update Ins Demo Recall?                   |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+



GUARANTOR'S SOCIAL SECURITY #

                         Enter the guarantor's social security number.
Guarantor, Guarantor's Employer, Order of Insurances (5.1.3)              Page 92



                      Alternate Ways To Respond To This Prompt

                           *   Enter SP if the guarantor is the same as the
                               patient. The system enters the appropriate data
                               for this prompt and the GUARANTOR section on this
                               screen.

                               NOTE:   The patient's social security number
                                       must have been entered on the first page
                                       of this questionnaire.

                           *   Enter a partial LASTNAME and select the
                               appropriate guarantor from the Guarantor Name
                               lookup.

                           *   Enter T to assign a temporary six digit
                               number (prefaced by a T) in lieu of the
                               guarantor's actual social security number. For
                               example, this entry would be appropriate if the
                               guarantor's social security number is not known.

                           *   Enter a previously assigned temporary number for
                               this guarantor (in the format: Tnnnnnn).


CHANGE GUARANTOR FOR VISIT, PATIENT OR ALL OF THE GUARANTOR'S PATIENTS?

                      To change guarantor information for this visit only,
                      enter V.

                      To change it for this patient's Demo Recall records,
                      enter P.

                      To change it for this patient and all other patients
                      associated with this guarantor, enter A


If the guarantor is the same as the PATIENT (SP), NEXT OF KIN (SNOK), or PERSON
TO NOTIFY (SPTN), enter the appropriate abbreviation to complete the GUARANTOR
information. Otherwise, enter the required data at the following prompts.


                      ------ GUARANTOR ------

NAME                  Enter the guarantor's name in standard format
                      (LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME REST), using up to 30 characters
                      of free text.


STREET                 Enter the guarantor's street address using up to
Guarantor, Guarantor's Employer, Order of Insurances (5.1.3)          Page 93



                      30 characters of free text.


STREET                If necessary, enter additional street address
                      information, using up to 30 characters of free text.


CITY                   Enter the guarantor's zip or postal code.

                      If the code is defined in the MIS Zip/Postal Code
                      Dictionary, the system copies the city, state and zip
                      code into the appropriate fields.

                      If your entry is not defined in the Zip/Postal Code
                      Dictionary, it is copied to the ZIP/POSTAL CODE
                      field, and the cursor returns to this field where you
                      can enter the patient's city.

                      If you are pre-admitting or pre-registering a patient, a
                      response is not required.

                      If you are admitting or registering a patient, this is
                      a required field.


STATE                 Enter the state's standard two character
                      abbreviation.


ZIP CODE              Enter the guarantor's zip code in standard five or
                      nine digit format (nnnnn or nnnnn-nnnn).


HOME PHONE            Enter the guarantor's home telephone number, using
                      up to 18 characters of free text.


RELATIONSHIP TO PATIENT

                      Enter the mnemonic that describes the relationship
                      between the guarantor and the patient. When you
                      identify a relationship mnemonic, its full name appears
                      in the field on the right.

                      Lookup:   MIS Relationship Dictionary

                      If you are pre-admitting or pre-registering a patient,
                      a response to this prompt is not required.

                      If you are admitting or registering a patient, this
Guarantor, Guarantor's Employer, Order of Insurances (5.1.3)             Page 94



                      isa required field.


                      ------ GUARANTOR'S EMPLOYER ------

NAME                  If listed, enter the mnemonic of the guarantor's
                      employer. The system automatically inserts the
                      employer's full name, address and phone number.

                      LOOKUP:   MIS Employer Dictionary.

                      If the guarantor's employer is not defined in the
                      Employer Dictionary, enter the employer's name using up
                      to 30 characters of free text. The system responds with
                      the prompt:

                                       Not found, NEW?     Y

                      Press <RETURN> to confirm that this employer is not in
                      the Employer Dictionary, or delete the Y and press
                      <RETURN> to go back to the NAME field.


STREET                Enter the guarantor's employer's street address,
                      using up to 30 characters of free text.


STREET                If necessary, enter additional street address
                      information, using up to 30 characters of free text.


CITY                  Enter the guarantor's employer's zip or postal
                      code.

                      If the code is defined in the MIS Zip/Postal Code
                      Dictionary, the system copies the city, state and zip
                      code into the appropriate fields.

                      If your entry is not defined in the Zip/Postal Code
                      Dictionary, it is copied to the ZIP/POSTAL CODE
                      field, and the cursor returns to this field where you
                      can enter the patient's city.

                      If you are pre-admitting or pre-registering a patient, a
                      response is not required.

                      If you are admitting or registering a patient, this is
                      a required field.
Guarantor, Guarantor's Employer, Order of Insurances (5.1.3)           Page 95



STATE                 Enter the state's standard two character
                      abbreviation.


ZIP CODE              Enter the guarantor's employer's zip code in
                      standard five or nine digit format (nnnnn or
                      nnnnn-nnnn).


PHONE                 Enter the guarantor's employer's phone number,
                      using up to 18 characters of free text.

                      Your hospital defines a format for entering a phone
                      number in the MIS Parameters.

                      The MIS parameter defines how the hospital wants to
                      format the first 7 or 10 digits of phone numbers. Sample
                      definitions of the format parameter are:

                                          999-999-9999
                                          999 999-9999
                                          999/999-9999
                                          (999)999-9999


                      If you enter an incomplete phone number (e.g., you
                      enter only an area code which in all probability would
                      not be consistent with the default format), the
                      following warning message appears:

                      Does not match standard phone number format of
                      (999)999 -9999. Use anyway?

                      If you enter Y, the system accepts your entry at the
                      PHONE prompt. If you enter N, the following
                      message appears:

                            Phone Format is (999)999-9999.

                      You can then enter a number at the PHONE prompt
                      using the correct format. When you enter the phone
                      number in the correct format (i.e., probably using the
                      entire number: area code, exchange, and number), the
                      system automatically inserts hyphens and parentheses as
                      specified in the MIS Tool Box Parameters.


GUARANTOR'S            Enter the guarantor's occupation, using up to 20
OCCUPATION             characters of free text.
Guarantor, Guarantor's Employer, Order of Insurances (5.1.3)             Page 96



                        INSURANCES

INS #1                Enter the mnemonic of the patient's insurance
                      company. The insurance order depends on the
                      sequence of the insurances you enter at the four
                      insurances fields.

                      Lookup: MIS Insurance Dictionary.

                      A new facility multiple exists in the MIS Insurance
                      Dictionary. Insurances are restricted to those
                      facilities defined in the multiple. If no facilities
                      are listed, the insurance is valid for ALL facilities.

                      If an insurance exists in Demo Recall but that insurance
                      is not valid for the patient's current facility, then
                      the insurance is not copied and a warning message is
                      issued.

                      Only those insurances which are valid for the given
                      facility display in the MIS Insurance Dictionary Lookup.

                           *   If you enter the mnemonic of a company listed in
                               the dictionary, the system automatically inserts
                               the carrier's name, address and phone number on
                               the next page of this questionnaire.

                           *   If the patient's insurance company is not
                               listed in the dictionary, you must enter the
                               mnemonic of an "OTHER" type insurance. (See the
                               documentation of the MIS Insurance Dictionary for
                               more details.)

                               For OTHER insurances, enter the name and address
                               of the company on the next page of this
                               questionnaire.

                           *   The Managed Care Insurances Lookup appears if
                               the following are all true:

                               - your site has MEDITECH's Managed Care
                                 application

                               - the patient has a member plan from the
                                 Managed Care Module

                               - the member plan has one or more entries
                                 from the MIS Insurance Dictionary
                                 associated with it
Guarantor, Guarantor's Employer, Order of Insurances (5.1.3)             Page 97



                                If no Managed Care insurances are found, or if
                                the user does not select one, the standard Lookup
                                into the MIS Insurance Dictionary displays.

                           *    If the patient does not have any insurance, enter
                                your hospital's mnemonic for SELF PAY (defined
                                in the MIS parameters).

                      You can enter up to four insurances for a patient. Each
                      insurance must be entered in numerical sequence, i.e.,
                      enter the primary insurance at INS #1, secondary
                      insurance at INS #2, etc. The sequence affects the
                      patient's insurance order.

                      Enter policy information for each insurance, e.g.,
                      policy number and subscriber, on the next page.

                      Editing a Patient's Insurance

                      To change one of the patient's insurance carriers,
                      delete the incorrect mnemonic and enter the correct one.
                      The system then looks in the MIS Insurance Dictionary to
                      see if the new insurance has a policy number check. If
                      it does, the system passes the old policy number through
                      the check.

                      If there is no check or if the old policy number
                      passes the check, the following prompt appears:

                            Retain policy holder information
                            for <deleted insurance>?

                        If the policy information (e.g., policy number,
                        subscriber, company/organization) for the new insurance
                        is the same as for the old, enter Y. That
                        information then appears on the next screen, where you
                        can change it if necessary.

                        If the old policy number fails the check, the
                        following message appears, and the old information is
                        erased from the patient's record:

                               Policy holder data from (insurance mnemonic)
                               cannot be retained

                        In this case, you must enter the new policy information
                        on the next screen.


INS #2                 If applicable, enter the mnemonic of the
Guarantor, Guarantor's Employer, Order of Insurances (5.1.3)            Page 98



                      patient's second insurance carrier from the MIS
                      Insurance Dictionary.


INS #3                If applicable, enter the mnemonic of the patient's
                      third insurance carrier from the MIS Insurance
                      Dictionary.


INS #4                If applicable, enter the mnemonic of the patient's
                      fourth insurance carrier from the MIS Insurance
                      Dictionary.


FIN CLASS             The system displays the mnemonic of the financial
                      class for the first insurance carrier. The financial
                      class indicates who is responsible for payment of the
                      patient's account.

                      This is a required field.

                      *   If a financial class is associated with this
                          insurance in the MIS Insurance Dictionary, that
                          financial class appears as the default response to
                          this prompt.

                      *   If a financial class is not associated with
                          this insurance in the MIS Insurance Dictionary, the
                          default response will be U (i.e., "unknown").

                      *   If necessary, you may change the financial class
                          without changing the primary insurance carrier.

                      *   If you change the insurance carrier, the system
                          updates the financial class automatically to that of
                          the new carrier.

                      *   The major implication associated with the FIN(ancial)
                          CLASS field is in the Case Mix/Abstracting
                          application where it determines patient class.

                      When a patient is readmitted/reregistered and patient
                      information is retrieved from demo recall, the system
                      checks if the patient's financial class from demo recall
                      matches the primary insurance's financial class in the
                      MIS Insurance Dictionary. If the patient's financial
                      class does not match that of the primary insurance in
                      the MIS Insurance Dictionary, the system displays a
                      warning message to inform you of the discrepancy. With
                      the warning message, the system displays a prompt asking
Guarantor, Guarantor's Employer, Order of Insurances (5.1.3)          Page 99



                      if you want to change the financial class.

                      If you answer N, the financial class is not changed, and
                      the information copied from demo recall is filed for the
                      patient.

                      If you answer Y, the primary insurance's financial class
                      appears along with another prompt asking if the
                      financial class should be changed to the financial class
                      of the primary insurance. If at the second prompt you
                      answer N, the system allows you to return to the
                      guarantor information screen to enter another financial
                      class. If you answer Y, the system changes the
                      financial class to the primary insurance's financial
                      class. The updated information is then filed for the
                      patient.
Insurance Data (5.1.4)                                                     Page 100



5.1.4:   Insurance Data


|============================================================================================|
|Patient                                                                                     |
|                                                                                            |
|---------- Insurance Company ---------- --------------- Policy Holder -----------------     |
|Ins #                                    Policy #                                           |
|Name                                     Status                 On                          |
|Street                                   Benefit Plan                                       |
|Street                                   Coverage #                                         |
|City                                     Subscriber                                         |
|State                                    Rel To Pt                                          |
|ZIP Code                                 Eff Date                                           |
|Phone                                    Exp Date                                           |
|                                                                                            |
|-------- Company/Organization --------- ---------------- Authorization ------------------- |
|Name                                     Auth #                                             |
|Number                                   Status                 On                          |
|                                         Diag Code              4A                          |
|------------- Employer ---------------- Auth Visits             imb Amt                     |
|Status                                                                                      |
|Name                                        Proc       Amt      Units Copay                 |
|                                                                                            |
|Location                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                         Ref Prov               Eff Date                    |
|Query Screen                                                    Exp Date                    |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


INS #                     The number 1 appears (the primary insurance carrier
                          specified on the previous screen).
                          After you finish entering/editing the information for
                          this carrier, the system displays the same screen for
                          the next carrier specified (up to a total of four
                          insurance carriers).


INS MNEMONIC              The insurance carrier's mnemonic (if one is
                          specified in the MIS Insurance Dictionary) appears to
                          the right of its number.


                          NOTE:   If this insurance carrier's name and address
                                  are already listed in the MIS Insurance
Insurance Data (5.1.4)                                                   Page 101



                                Dictionary (i.e., there is an N entered after
                                the MIS Insurance Dictionary's OTHER prompt
                                for that carrier) that information appears here.

                                If this insurance carrier's name and address are
                                not listed in the MIS Insurance Dictionary
                                (i.e., there is a Y entered after the
                                OTHER prompt), enter the name, address, and
                                phone.


NAME                     Enter the name of the insurance company, using up
                         to 30 characters of free text.

                         If the insurance company name is the same as the
                         name of the patient's employer, enter SPE (Same as
                         Patient Employer). The system automatically inserts
                         the employer's name, address, and phone.

                         If the insurance company name is different from
                         the name of the patient's employer but the address is
                         the same, enter SPE at the STREET prompt. The
                         system automatically inserts the employer's address
                         and phone.


STREET ADDRESS           Enter the first line of the street address of this
                         insurance carrier, using up to 30 characters of free
                         text.


STREET ADDRESS           Enter the second line of the street address of this
                         insurance carrier, using up to 30 characters of free
                         text.


CITY                     Enter the city, using up to 20 characters of free
                         text.


STATE                    Enter the state's standard two character
                         abbreviation.


ZIP CODE                 Enter the zip code in standard five or nine digit
                         format (nnnnn or nnnnn-nnnn).


PHONE                    Enter the phone number, using up to 18 characters.
Insurance Data (5.1.4)                                                     Page 102



                         ------ POLICY HOLDER ------

POLICY HOLDER and COMPANY/ORGANIZATION information print on the UB82/92 form.


POLICY #                 Enter the insurance policy number, using up to
                         30 characters of free text.

                         If the policy number is the same as the patient's Social
                         Security number, enter SP. The system inserts the
                         number automatically.

                         If the policy number is the same as the guarantor's
                         Social Security number, enter SG. The system
                         inserts the number automatically.

                         If you enter SP or SG, the system inserts the
                         insured's name at the SUBSCRIBER prompt, and the
                         correct relationship in the RELATIONSHIP TO PT
                         field. (The guarantor's relationship to the patient is
                         copied from the guarantor screen.)

                         If your system includes the Managed Care Module, and the
                         member's information is verified during eligibility
                         check, the following information appears on this screen,
                         as defined in Managed Care:

                               * member's policy number

                               * company/organization

                               * employer information


STATUS                   This field is used to record the insurance's
                         eligibility status. It is not a required field.

                         Choose one of the following statuses:

                                 VERIFIED
                                 QUEUED
                                 PENDING
                                 RECEIVED
                                 FAILED
                                 DENIED
                                 DEFERRED

                         A Lookup is available. These statuses are editable,
                         and, if the site is utilizing the EZ-CAP Insurance
                         Authorization Interface, this status will default
Insurance Data (5.1.4)                                                   Page 103



                         accordingly.


ON                       The date on which the eligibility status was entered
                         displays here. This field may be edited as necessary.


BENEFIT PLAN             Enter a Benefit Plan to assign any one of a multiple
                         of insurance benefits to each insurance on an account as
                         defined in the MIS Insurance Dictionary.

                         All print and view routines that involve insurance
                         information have been modified to include the new field.

                         Press the Lookup key at the BENEFIT PLAN prompt to see
                         a list of benefits that are effective for today's date.

                         When this is done, the following screen will appear:

                         ========================================================
                         |             BENEFIT PLANS as of 06/20/97             |
                         |------------------------------------------------------|
                         |    Mnemonic     Name                       Product   |
                         |                                                      |
                         | 1 HCHP           HARVARD CARE HMO          HMO       |
                         | 2 HCHP-MGH       HVD CARE HLTH PLAN-MGH              |
                         |                                                      |
                         |                                                      |
                         ========================================================

                         You will see that the benefit plans in effect for a
                         particular date onward (in the above, 06/20/97 is
                         today's date).

                         To force a Lookup on benefits that are effective on a
                         different date, enter "/D" then press the lookup key.
                         This will cause a system prompt of "As of effective
                         date?" to appear. If you enter a date (for example,
                         "T"oday's date), you will get a Lookup on the benefits
                         that are effective for today's date.

                         You can also append the "/D" to a known benefit, and
                         press lookup (for example, "HCHP-MGH/D"<lookup>). This
                         will cause a pop up window prompting for an effective
                         date. If the benefit entered is effective during that
                         date, it, and any subsequent benefit alphabetically
                         after the benefit used in the Lookup, will appear in the
                         Lookup window.

                         You can enter an effective date after the /D to avoid
Insurance Data (5.1.4)                                                    Page 104



                         using the pop-up window, ie. "(benefit mnemonic)/D
                         07/21/96". This will bring you directly to the BENEFIT
                         PLANS screen.


COVERAGE #               If applicable, enter the insurance coverage
                         number or code, using up to 20 characters of free text.


SUBSCRIBER               Enter the name of the policy's subscriber using
                         standard LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format. If applicable,
                         you can enter SP, SNOK, SPTN or SG. (To do this,
                         the guarantor, person to notify or next of kin should be
                         identified on a previous screen.)

                         If you enter, SP, SNOK, SPTN or SG, the system
                         displays the response to the RELATION TO PT field,
                         as it has been entered on a previous screen.


REL TO PT                Enter the mnemonic that describes the relationship
                         between the subscriber and the patient. When you
                         identify a relationship mnemonic, its full name
                         appears below for positive identification.

                         Lookup:   MIS Relationship Dictionary

                         Note that if you identified the patient, guarantor,
                         person to notify or next of kin as the SUBSCRIBER of
                         the policy, this response is inserted by the system.

                         The SELF relationship mnemonic, which appears if you
                         identified the patient, is defined in the MIS
                         parameters.


EFF DATE                 Enter the date on which this insurance benefit
                         becomes effective. Use the standard date format,
                         MM/DD/YY (in the U.S.) and DD/MM/YY (elsewhere).


EXP DATE                 Enter the date on which this insurance benefit
                         expires. Use the standard date format, MM/DD/YY (in
                         U.S.) and DD/MM/YY (elsewhere).


                         ------ COMPANY/ORGANIZATION ------

NAME                     If the subscriber is the patient, enter SP.
                         If the subscriber is the guarantor, enter SG.   The
Insurance Data (5.1.4)                                                      Page 105



                         system inserts the patient's or guarantor's employer as
                         collected on previous screens.

                         If the subscriber is someone other than the guarantor or
                         patient, enter the mnemonic of the subscriber's
                         employer; otherwise, enter the employer, using up to 30
                         characters of free text.

                         Lookup:   MIS Employer Dictionary


NUMBER                   If applicable, enter the insured's employer group
                         insurance number using up to 15 characters.


                         ------ EMPLOYER ------

STATUS                   Enter the patient's employment status in this field
                         using up to 10 characters.

                         Lookup:   MIS Employment Status Dictionary


NAME                     Enter the mnemonic of the patient's employer.

                         Lookup: MIS Employer Dictionary

                         The system automatically inserts the employer's
                         name in the field below.

                         If the patient's employer is not defined in the
                         Employer Dictionary, enter the employer's name using up
                         to 30 characters of free text.

                         The system responds with the prompt:

                              Not found, NEW? Y

                         Press <Enter> to confirm that this employer is not in
                         the Employer Dictionary, or delete the Y and press
                         <Enter> to go back to the NAME field.


LOCATION                 If you have entered SP, SG or an Employer
                         Dictionary mnemonic, the associated city appears
                         here. You may change it if appropriate.

                         Otherwise, enter the city of the employer using up to
                         20 characters of free text.
Insurance Data (5.1.4)                                                   Page 106




                         ------ QUERY SCREEN ------

                         Each insurance carrier can have a Customer Defined
                         Screen appear on this section of the questionnaire.
                         The mnemonic of the Customer Defined Screen assigned to
                         the selected insurance appears here.

                         Because your hospital defines the prompts on the
                         Customer Defined Screen, no standard documentation is
                         included. To see if your hospital includes
                         documentation for these prompts, press <Docum>.


AUTH #                   If applicable, enter a treatment authorization code
                         (from the patient's insurance company). A maximum of 18
                         characters is allowed.

                         This code is used to authorize patient treatment and is
                         transmitted to the billing department for proper patient
                         identification.

                         If your system includes MEDITECH's Managed Care (MC)
                         Module, you can verify the insurance authorization
                         number. To do this, press <Enter> with this field and
                         the Status field left blank.

                         A Lookup window appears, containing existing MC
                         authorizations for the patient's insurance. Choose
                         the authorization you want to use and press <Enter>.
                         The View Authorization screen from MC appears. When you
                         press <Enter> or OK, a confirmation window appears,
                         allowing you to confirm that this is the correct
                         authorization, or to return to the Lookup window
                         containing other authorizations.


STATUS                   This field is used to record the status of the
                         treatment authorization from the patient's insurance
                         company. It is not a required field.

                         A Lookup is available to choose one of the following
                         statuses:

                                  APPROVED
                                  REQUESTED
Insurance Data (5.1.4)                                                   Page 107



                                  DENIED
                                  EXPIRED
                                  CANCELLED
                                  DEFERRED
                                  MODIFIED


STATUS                   This field is used to record the process status of
                         the patient account on the Insurance Verification
                         Worklist.

                         A Lookup is available to choose one of the following
                         process statuses:

                                  VERIFIED
                                  QUEUED
                                  PENDING
                                  DENIED
                                  DEFERRED


ON                       The date on which the process status was entered
                         will default in here. This field may be edited.


DIAG CODE                Enter the ICD-9 code that identifies the patient's
                         diagnosis. The diagnosis description will default into
                         the field to the right.

                         Lookup: ABS Diagnosis Code Dictionary


AUTH VISITS/LOS          This field is used to record the number of visits
                         for outpatients or the length of stay for inpatients,
                         authorized for the patient by the insurance company
                         for this treatment.


REIMB AMT                This field is used to record the reimbursement
                         dollar amount authorized by the insurance company for
                         this treatment.


PROC                     Enter or edit the procedure code for this visit.
                         This field is a multiple of authorized CPT procedures.

                         Lookup: ABS CPT (Current Procedure Terminology) Code
                                 Dictionary
Insurance Data (5.1.4)                                                      Page 108



AMT                      Enter or edit the dollar amount that you want to
                         apply to this procedure performed during this visit.


UNITS                    Enter the number of times this procedure was
                         performed during the visit.


COPAY                    Enter the dollar amount that the patient pays for
                         a copayment for this procedure.


REF PROV                 Enter the physician who referred the patient for
                         treatment.

                         Lookup: MIS Provider Dictionary

                         Identifying a Doctor in the MIS Provider Dictionary

                         To see list of         Do the following:
                         doctors ordered by:

                         -------------------    ---------------------------

                         Mnemonic                Press <Lookup>, or type a
                                                 partial mnemonic and press
                                                 <Lookup>.

                         Name                    Type N\ or N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                                 and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                                 N\JOHNS.

                         --------------------    --------------------------
                         To see an expanded      Do the following:
                         list of doctors
                         ordered by:

                         --------------------    --------------------------

                         Mnemonic                Type /X or partial mnemonic/X
                                                 and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                         Name                    Type N\/X or
                                                 N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                                 N\JO/X
                         --------------------    --------------------------

                         The following information appears in the expanded
                         Lookup:
Insurance Data (5.1.4)                                                     Page 109



                              *   mnemonic           *   ADM service

                              *   name               *   ABS service

                              *   telephone number   *   if doctor has admitting
                                                         privileges
                              *   doctor type
                                                     *   is doctor on staff
                              *   doctor group


EFF DATE                 Enter the effective date of this authorization.


EXP DATE                 Enter the expiration date of this authorization.
UB82 Data (and Allergies) (5.1.5)                                      Page 110



5.1.5:   UB82 Data (and Allergies)


+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                               DEMO RECALL EDIT       Page 5                                |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient                                                                                     |
|                                                                                            |
|Emp Info Data    Emp Status     Employer Name                   Employee ID                 |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                 Employer Loc                                                               |
|                                                                                            |
|Emp Info Data    Emp Status     Employer Name                   Employee ID                 |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                 Employer Loc                                                               |
|                                                                                            |
|---Allergies--- Spec Program Indicator                                                      |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


                       ------ EMPLOYMENT INFORMATION DATA ------

                       This section of the screen allows you to enter
                       employment information for the guarantor. This data is
                       submitted to UB82 form locators 71 through 75.


EMP INFO DATA          Enter the mnemonic that describes the relationship
                       of the primary or secondary guarantor to the patient.

                       Lookup: MIS Employment Information Data Dictionary


EMP STATUS             Enter the mnemonic that describes the employment
                       status of the guarantor.

                       Lookup: MIS Employment Status Dictionary


EMPLOYER NAME          You can enter SG or SP if the employer for UB82
                       purposes is the same as the guarantor's or patient's
                       employer entered on a previous screen.
UB82 Data (and Allergies) (5.1.5)                                       Page 111



                      Otherwise, you can identify an employer mnemonic.

                      Lookup:   MIS Employer Dictionary

                      If you enter SP, SG or an employer mnemonic, the system
                      inserts the employer's full name and city. You may
                      change the city (see EMPLOYER LOC prompt).

                      If the guarantor's employer is not defined in the
                      Employer Dictionary, enter the employer name using up
                      to 30 characters of free text. The system responds with
                      the message:

                            Not found.   NEW?   Y


                      To enter the employer's address, press <Enter>.

                      To go back to the name field, delete the Y and press
                      <Enter>.


EMPLOYER LOC          If you have entered SP, SG or an Employer Dictionary
                      mnemonic, the associated city appears here. You may
                      change if appropriate.

                      Otherwise, enter the city of the guarantor's employer
                      using up to 20 characters of free text.


EMPLOYEE ID           Enter the employee's ID number using up to 11
                      characters of free text. This number is assigned by the
                      employer to identify third party payors for payment
                      purposes.

                      Enter SPS (same as patient's social security number)
                      to copy the social security number from the Social
                      Sec # field. If the patient's social security number
                      was not entered at the Social Security # prompt, the
                      following message appears:

                                    No Patient Social Security #


                      Employment Information Data for Guarantor


                      This section of the screen collects primary employment
                      information for the guarantor. This data is submitted
                      to UB82 form locators 71 through 75.
UB82 Data (and Allergies) (5.1.5)                                        Page 112




EMP INFO DATA         Enter the mnemonic that describes the relationship
                      of the primary or secondary guarantor to the patient.

                      Lookup: MIS Employment Information Data Dictionary


EMP STATUS            Enter the mnemonic that describes the employment
                      status of the guarantor.

                      Lookup: MIS Employment Status Dictionary


EMPLOYER NAME         You can enter SG or SP if the employer for UB82
                      purposes is the same as the guarantor's or patient's
                      employer entered on a previous screen.

                      Otherwise, you can identify an employer mnemonic.

                      Lookup:   MIS Employer Dictionary

                      If you enter SP, SG or an employer mnemonic, the system
                      inserts the employer's full name and city. You may
                      change the city (see EMPLOYER LOC prompt).

                      If the guarantor's employer is not defined in the
                      Employer Dictionary, enter the employer name using up
                      to 30 characters of free text. The system responds with
                      the message:

                            Not found.   NEW?   Y


                      To enter the employer's address, press <RETURN>.

                      To go back to the name field, delete the Y and press
                      <RETURN>.


EMPLOYEE ID           Enter the employee's ID number using up to 11
                      characters of free text. This number is assigned by the
                      employer to identify third party payors for payment
                      purposes.

                      Enter SPS (same as patient's social security number)
                      to copy the social security number from the Social
                      Sec # field. If the patient's social security number
                      was not entered at the Social Security # prompt, the
                      following message appears:
UB82 Data (and Allergies) (5.1.5)                                        Page 113




                                    No Patient Social Security #


ALLERGIES             If applicable, enter or edit the patient's
                      allergies, using up to 15 characters of free text.    You
                      may enter up to four allergies.

                      These allergies appear in the Admissions Module's
                      Pre-Registration /Edit Routine for emergency room
                      patients and in the Demo Recall for Medical Records and
                      the Admissions Module.




SPECIAL PROGRAM       If applicable, enter the mnemonic that describes
INDICATOR             any special UB92 program with which this patient is
                      associated.

                      Lookup: MIS Special Program Indicator Dictionary
View Data (5.2)                                                                Page 114



5.2:       View Data


This routine allows you to view a patient's Demo Recall data.

When you identify the patient, the upper portion of the screen displays the:


       *    unit number            *     sex

       *    name                     *   folder date (when the folder was created)

       *    birthdate              *     most recent visit date

    *      age                     *     most recent edit date (when the Demo Recall
                                         data was last edited)


If this patient has been flagged as a confidential patient in the Admissions
Module, the message **CONFIDENTIAL** appears to the right of the
PATIENT field. For more information, see the section titled "System
Security and Patient Confidentiality."

The lower portion of the screen lists the following seven VIEW OPTIONS (i.e.,
routines which display segments of the patient's Demo Recall files):


    1.      PATIENT DEMOGRAPHICS

    2.      PATIENT'S EMPLOYER, PERSON TO NOTIFY, NEXT OF KIN

    3.      GUARANTOR, GUARANTOR'S EMPLOYER, ORDER OF INSURANCES

    4.      INSURANCE DATA

    5.      UB82 DATA (including information about the patient's allergies)

    6.      OTHER DEMO RECALL DATA

    7.      ** ENTIRE PATIENT ** (i.e., all 6 of the above options, in sequence)


To view some or all of the patient's Demo Recall files, select a number.

The OTHER DEMO RECALL DATA screen appears only if a Customer-Defined Screen has
first been associated with the patient. For more information, see the section
titled "Edit Data."
View Data (5.2)                                                          Page 115



Note that the information displayed here cannot be edited. To change any of
the patient's demographic data, use the Edit (Demo Recall) Data Routine.



Allergies

You can view the following types of allergies on the UB82 Data screen:

     *    allergies from the Admissions Module

          You can use the Edit (Demo Recall) Data Routine to enter or edit
          allergies (i.e., the ALLERGIES field) on UB82 Data screen. These
          allergies appear only in the Admissions Module's Pre-Registration/Edit
          Routine for emergency room patients.

     *    allergies from the Nursing Module

         The UB82 Data screen in this View Data routine allows you to see the
         allergies that were entered in the Nursing Module. These allergies
         appear in the NURSING ALLERGIES field. This information does not
         appear in the Enter (Demo Recall) Data Routine.
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                       Demo Recall View                                     |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient                                                                                     |
|                                                                                            |
|Name                                                                                        |
|Birthdate                                   Folder Created                                  |
|Age                                         Last Visit                                      |
|Sex                                         Last Edit Date                                  |
|Exp Date                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                  -----View Options-----                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|    1. Patient Demographics                                                                 |
|     2. Patient's Address, Employer, Person To Notify, Next Of Kin                          |
|     3. Guarantor, Guarantor's Employer, Order Of Insurances                                |
|     4. Insurance Data                                                                      |
|     5. Additional Billing Info                                                             |
|     6. Other Demo Recall Data                                                              |
|     7. ** Entire Patient **                                                                |
|                                                                                            |
|Select                                                                                      |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PATIENT                 To identify the patient whose demographic data you
                        wish to view, enter one of the following:
View Data (5.2)                                                        Page 116




                            *   The patient's primary unit number.

                            *   The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
                                prefaced by an E#.

                            *   The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                            *   The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                            *   The patient's social security number, prefaced
                                by a pound sign (#).

                                If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                                number within your facility, it replaces the
                                social security number.

                                If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                                unit number, the system erases the social
                                security number, leaving this field blank.

                            *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                                in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                                The system then begins a search of the Master
                                Patient Index to identify the patient.

                            *   An other number (e.g., a unit number
                                assigned by another facility or a number
                                assigned by a department, service, etc.)

                                As when you enter the social security number,
                                if the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                                number within your facility, it replaces the
                                other number.

                                If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                                unit number, the system erases the other
                                number, leaving this field blank.


                       When you identify a patient by number or locate the
                       patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays
                       his/her primary unit number (if one has been assigned),
                       name, birthdate, age, sex and expiration date (if
                       applicable) to help identify the patient.


SELECT (VIEW OPTION)   Enter the number (1 - 7) that corresponds to the
                       type of Demo Recall data you wish to view. Selections 1
View Data (5.2)                                                  Page 117



                  through 5 are standard screens. Selection 6 appears
                  only if a Customer Defined Screen (CDS) has been
                  associated with the patient. Selection 7 displays all 6
                  of the Demo Recall screens in order. After viewing each
                  screen, a Continue? prompt lets you proceed to the next
                  screen.

                  Select another number if you wish to continue viewing
                  this patient's data. When you are finished, press
                  <Enter>. The system then clears the current patient's
                  data from the screen, and the cursor moves back to the
                  PATIENT prompt to allow you to identify another
                  patient.
Print Data (5.3)                                                       Page 118



5.3:    Print Data


Use this routine to print the Demo Recall Print Report, which contains the
patient's Demo Recall data. When you identify the patient, the system displays
that patient's:


    *   unit number                       *   age

    *   name                              *   sex

    *   birthdate


You can use this information to verify that this is, in fact, the patient whose
Demo Recall data you wish to print.

The Print on prompt appears at the bottom of the screen. When you specify
the device on which you wish to print the report, the system prints all of the
data in this patient's Demo Recall file.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                               Demo Recall Print                               |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Patient                                                                        |
|                                                                               |
|Name                                                                           |
|                                                                               |
|Birthdate                                                                      |
|Age                                                                            |
|Sex                                                                            |
|Exp Date                                                                       |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PATIENT               To identify the patient whose demographic data you
                      wish to print, enter one of the following:

                            *   The patient's primary unit number.

                            *   The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
                                prefaced by an E#.

                            *   The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                            *   The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.
Print Data (5.3)                                                   Page 119



                        *   The patient's social security number, prefaced
                            by a pound sign (#).

                            If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                            number within your facility, it replaces the
                            social security number.

                            If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                            unit number, the system erases the social
                            security number, leaving this field blank.

                        *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                            in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                            The system then begins a search of the Master
                            Patient Index to identify the patient.

                        *   An other number (e.g., a unit number
                            assigned by another facility or a number
                            assigned by a department, service, etc.)

                            As when you enter the social security number,
                            if the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                            number within your facility, it replaces the
                            other number.

                            If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                            unit number, the system erases the other
                            number, leaving this field blank.


                   When you identify a patient by number or locate the
                   patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays
                   his/her primary unit number (if one has been assigned),
                   name, birthdate, age, sex and expiration date (if
                   applicable) to help identify the patient.
Managing Unit Numbers (6)                                              Page 120



Chapter 6:   Managing Unit Numbers


The following routines allow users to manage unit numbers:


    *   Edit Unit Number               *   Merge Patients

    *   Delete/Restore Patients        *   Unmerge Patients


These routines are often restricted to medical records administrators in order
to protect the validity of the Master Patient Index and Demo Recall files. The
Medical Records Module preserves the integrity of patient data by allowing only
one user to access a patient's record at a time.

For example, if someone is editing a patient's Master Patient Index data, and
another user attempts to access the same patient's record (either through the
Medical Records or Admissions Modules), the system refuses the second user and
informs him/her that this patient's record is in use.



Correcting Mis-assigned Unit Numbers

When a patient has been assigned an incorrect unit number, Medical Records
Department personnel can correct the error using the Edit Unit Number Routine.
The incorrect unit number can be changed to the correct number and the
discontinued number can be manually re-assigned, if desired, to another
patient.

In addition, if a patient is mistakenly assigned more than one unit number
and more than one record is created as a result, those records can be merged
into a single record using the Merge Patients Routine. The system also allows
you to unmerge these records at any time (using the Unmerge Patients Routine),
should you discover that the merge was made in error.



Managing Unit Numbers for Duplicate Patients

If you find duplicate patients after you run the Compile Duplicate Patients
Routine, you may want to merge the files for the patient. First, decide
whether you want to make one of the unit numbers assigned to this patient
available later for manual reassignment.

If you want to re-assign one of the unit numbers (e.g., you want to re-use one
of the pre-numbered folders in your department), first edit the unit number by
substituting no unit number using the Edit Unit Number Routine. This step
allows you to dissociate the unit number from the MPI file with which it is
associated. Next, merge the two records, one with the unit number you wish the
patient to have and the one without a unit number, using the Merge Patients
Managing Unit Numbers (6)                                              Page 121



Routine.

If you want only to merge the two records, use the Merge Patients Routine. In
this case, You cannot use the unit number assigned to the removed patient
again. Note, however, that this allows you to use the removed patient's unit
number to identify him or her at a later date.



Deleting/Restoring Patients

The Delete/Restore Patients Routine allows you to remove records (e.g.,
records of expired patients) from the system. In this way the Master Patient
Index and Demo Recall files are kept current, database storage is minimized
and the chance of making identification errors is reduced. Deleted records
with unit numbers or S numbers (used by some hospitals to identify
referred patients) may later be restored to the system, if necessary. Records
without unit numbers or S numbers, however, cannot be restored.

NOTE:   The system automatically updates the Master Patient Index and the
        Demo Recall files when the above routines are used to edit patient
        data. However, with the exception of edits to unit numbers and some key
        demographic data, Admissions files are not automatically updated.
        See Appendix A (The Interaction Between the MRI & ADM Modules) for more
        information.
Additional Patient Routines (7)                                        Page 122



Chapter 7:   Additional Patient Routines


The Additional Patient Routines menu contains routines which enable you to
perform various functions that help in the management of the Medical Records
Module. Some of these functions are: editing of unit and EPI numbers,
compiling and printing duplicate patients in the MPI, editing and viewing of
Demo Recall, printing of swipe cards, Archival Routines and conversion tape
routines.


+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                      MRI Additional Patient Routines Menu [ ]                  |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                                                                |
|    ------Enter/Edit------                      -- Demo Recall --               |
|11. Edit Unit Number                        51. View Data                       |
|12. Delete/Restore Patient                  52. Print Data                      |
|13. Merge Patients                          53. Edit Data                       |
|14. Unmerge Patients                                                            |
|15. Fast Input                                  -- Tape/PC Routines ---         |
|16. Edit EPI Number                         60. Tape/PC Routines Menu           |
|17. Switch Visit                                                                |
|                                                ------Utilities-------          |
|    ----Duplicate Patients----              70. Enter/Edit MRI CCI CDS          |
|21. Compile List                            71. View MRI CCI CDS                |
|22. Print List                                                                  |
|23. Duplicate HC/SS # Report                    ------Form Routines-------      |
|                                            80. Enter/Edit Forms Manually       |
|    --Other Routines---                     81. Delete Forms                    |
|30. Other Routines Menu                     82. Audit Trail Inquiry             |
|                                                                                |
|    ------Logs-------                           ------Archival Routines------- |
|40. Log Routines Menu                      101. Print Record Subset             |
|                                           102. Cache Record Subsets            |
|    ---Swipe Cards---                      103. Edit Archival Form Assignments |
|50. Print                                  104. Deindex Archival Forms          |
|                                           105. View/Print Deindexed Archival Forms|
|                                                                                |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Edit Unit Number (7.1)                                                   Page 123



7.1:       Edit Unit Number



Use this routine to correct mis-assigned numbers (primary unit numbers or
other numbers).

For example, a patient may have been manually assigned a unit number, then
later entered as a new patient, with another unit number assigned by the
system. If the record with the manually assigned number contains only the
patient's name and number, while the record with the system assigned number
has all of the patient's demographic data, current account number, etc., you
may want to delete the manually assigned number. In this case, there would be
no need to merge the two records (see below).

When you identify a patient, the   system lists all of the patient's numbers and
allows you to edit or delete any   number with your facility's prefix. You can
set up an automatic broadcast of   an OA message to occur after you file a unit
number edit or patient merge via   the MRI OA Message Dictionary Enter/Edit
routine.

Once the Medical Records Department assigns the correct number using this
routine, the system automatically updates the hospital's Master Patient Index
(MPI) and the patient's Demo Recall file. In addition, if the patient is a
current admission, the following fields are also updated in the Admissions
application's datafile:

       *    name                         *   mother's name

       *    sex                          *   maiden/other name

       *    birthdate

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

The discontinued number may then be manually re-assigned to another patient, if
desired.

The Edit Transaction Log routine allows you to list all changes made using this
routine.

The List Available Unit Numbers routine allows you to keep track of
discontinued numbers.

If you prefer to merge two records into one instead of changing the number, use
the Merge Patients routine. That routine retains the discontinued number and
associated patient data, and allows you to unmerge the records at a later date.

Multifacility Systems Which Use Root Unit Numbers
Edit Unit Number (7.1)                                                  Page 124




Some multifacility systems use root unit numbers. For such systems, if a
patient is seen in more than one facility, his/her unit number will be the same
in each facility except for the prefix (which is facility-specific). (For
more information, see Appendix E: Multifacility Systems and Appendix F:
Patient Numbers.)

In that case, if you want to edit a patient's primary unit number, first use
the Edit Unit Number routine to delete all unit numbers which share the same
root. Next, you can use the Enter/Edit Patient routine to assign a new primary
unit number to the patient.

The discontinued root number may then be manually re-assigned to another
patient.

Similarly, if you want to edit an other number in such a system, delete it
using the Edit Unit Number routine and enter the new other number using the
Enter/Edit Patient routine.

_______________________________________________________________________________

WARNING!

MEDITECH suggests that you use this routine with caution.   Before you edit a
number, verify that the number was incorrectly assigned.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                      Edit Unit Number                                      |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient:                                          5                                         |
|                                                                                            |
|Name:                                 Birthdate:           Age:          ex:                |
|                                                                                            |
|Maiden/Other Name:                                   Folder Created:                        |
|Mother's Name:                                       More Data on Fiche:                    |
|Record Locator:                                      Portion Signed Out:                    |
|Discharge Disp:                                      Portion Incomplete:                    |
|                                                                                            |
|Comment:                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|      Date      Type    Account #     Location    Doctor      Res Date Disch Dt Disch Disp|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------             |
|    Old Unit# Delete? New Unit#                                                             |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Edit Unit Number (7.1)                                                    Page 125



PATIENT                  To identify the patient whose number(s) you want to
                         change, enter one of the following:

                             *    The patient's primary unit number.

                             *    The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
                                  prefaced by an E#.

                             *    The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                             *    The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                             *    The patient's social security number, prefaced
                                   by a pound sign (#).

                                  If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                                  number within your facility, it replaces the
                                  social security number.

                                  If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                                  unit number, the word NEW replaces the
                                  social security number.

                              *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                                  in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                                  The system then begins a search of the Master
                                  Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                                  Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                                  process).

                              *   An other number (i.e., a unit number
                                  assigned by another facility or a number
                                  assigned by a department, service, etc.).

                                  As when you enter the social security number,
                                  the system replaces the other number with
                                  either the unit number or the word NEW (See
                                  above).


                         When you identify a patient by number or locate the
                         patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays
                         his/her primary unit number (if one has been assigned),
                         name, birthdate, age, sex and other Master Patient Index
                         data. In addition, a list of all numbers (primary and
                         other) assigned to this patient appears.

                         The cursor moves to the left of the DATE field. If
                         you are sure that this is the patient whose number(s)
Edit Unit Number (7.1)                                                     Page 126



                         you want to edit or delete, press <Enter> to move the
                         cursor to the DELETE? prompt. If you do not
                         want to edit or delete the unit number, press <EXIT>.


DELETE?                  N appears. To change this number to a new
                         number, press <Enter>. The cursor moves to the
                         NEW UNIT# prompt to allow you to enter the new
                         number.

                         If, on the other hand, you want to delete this number,
                         delete the N and enter Y. The cursor then moves
                         directly to the next DELETE? field (if there are
                         additional numbers listed).

                         NOTE:    You may only edit or delete a number
                                  assigned by your facility (i.e., you cannot edit
                                  or delete a number with another facility's
                                  prefix).

                                   Therefore, if the number was not assigned by your
                                   facility, the system does not allow you to enter
                                   Y at the DELETE prompt, and the cursor
                                   does not stop at the NEW UNIT # prompt
                                   (except as noted in the next paragraph).

                                   If your facility uses root unit numbers, the
                                   system does allow you to enter Y at the
                                   DELETE prompt. To edit a root unit number
                                   you must delete all unit numbers which share this
                                   root. However, the cursor does not stop at
                                   the NEW UNIT # prompt. In this case, use the
                                   Enter/Edit Patient Routine to assign a new
                                   primary unit number to the patient. (For more
                                   information, see the introduction to this
                                   routine.)


NEW UNIT#                Enter a new number, if desired. Note that this
                         number must have the same prefix as the old number.

                         If the number is a primary unit number:

                                 Enter the prefix and number, with or without the
                                 leading zeros. For example, if you wish the new
                                 number to be ZZ000139, you can enter ZZ139.

                         If the number is an other number:

                                 You can either enter a number (as above), or have
Edit Unit Number (7.1)                                             Page 127



                         the system assign the next available number by
                         entering the word NEW, followed by the
                         appropriate prefix. For example, to have the
                         system assign the next available S number,
                         enter NEWS.

                         After you file the data, the system displays, at
                         the bottom of the screen, any new other numbers
                         it assigned.
Delete/Restore Patient (7.2)                                            Page 128



7.2:    Delete/Restore Patient


Use this routine to remove a patient (e.g., an expired patient) from the Master
Patient Index (MPI) or to restore the MPI data of an erroneously deleted
patient without having to retype the information.

IMPORTANT

To restore a deleted patient, enter his or her unit number or other number.
Only patients with at least one of these numbers can be restored.

Once the Medical Records Department deletes or restores a patient's MPI data
using this routine, the system automatically updates the Demo Recall files.

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

The Delete/Restore Log routine tracks all changes made using this routine.

NOTE:   To merge two patients' MPI data instead of deleting one patient, use
        the Merge Patients routine. That routine retains the discontinued
        number and MPI data and allows you to unmerge the records at a later
        date.

_______________________________________________________________________________

WARNING!

MEDITECH suggests you use this routine with caution. If several facilities
share one Medical Records database, this routine deletes the patient from
all facilities, not simply the facility selected by the user at sign-on.

There is no way to restore a patient without a unit number or other number,
if such a patient is deleted by mistake, all of the patient's MPI data would
have to be reentered manually.
Delete/Restore Patient (7.2)                                             Page 129

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                   Delete/Restore Patient                                   |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient:                                          6                                         |
|                                                                                            |
|Name:                                 Birthdate:           Age:          ex:                |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|Maiden/Other Name:                                   Folder Created:                        |
|Mother's Name:                                       More Data On Fiche:                    |
|Record Locator:                                      Portion Signed Out:                    |
|Discharge Disp:                                      Portion Incomplete:                    |
|Comment:                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|Px Number                                                                                   |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|      Date     Type     Account #     Location    Doctor      Res Date Disch Dt Disch Disp|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PATIENT               To DELETE a patient from the system, enter the
                      patient's primary unit number, social security number,
                      other number, or name. To RESTORE a patient to
                      the system, you must enter the patient's unit number,
                      other number or social security number, but not the
                      name. NOTE: Users can identify a patient's demographic
                      recall via their insurance policy number by entering
                      the new syntax "P#nnnnnnnnnn". If the user enters a
                      policy number which does not exist in the system, an
                      error message will appear: Patient not found.

                      To DELETE a patient:

                               Enter the patient's primary unit number, social
                               security number, or name. For more information
                               about the PATIENT prompt, see the on-line
                               documentation for the Enter/Edit Patient Routine.

                               For more information about the PATIENT prompt,
                               see the section titled "Enter/Edit Patient."

                               When you identify the patient, the system displays
                               his or her primary unit number (if one has been
                               assigned) and Master Patient Index data.
Delete/Restore Patient (7.2)                                              Page 130




                               Check this information to confirm that this is the
                               patient you want to delete.

                               If this is the correct patient, press <Enter>. The
                               Delete? prompt appears at the bottom of the
                               screen. To delete the patient's MPI/Demo
                               Recall data from the system, enter Y.

                               NOTE:   The system does not allow you to delete
                                       a patient if his or her record is incomplete
                                       or a portion has been signed out or
                                       reserved.

                               If you do not wish to delete the patient, enter
                               N.


                      To RESTORE a deleted patient:

                               Enter the patient's primary unit number, other
                               number, or social security number. For more
                               information about the PATIENT prompt, see the
                               on-line documentation for the Enter/Edit Patient
                               Routine.


                               When the deleted patient's MPI data appears, press
                               <Enter>. The Restore? prompt appears. To
                               restore the patient's MPI data to the system, enter
                               Y.

                               If you do not want to restore the patient's
                               data, enter N.
Merge Patients (7.3)                                                   Page 131



7.3:    Merge Patients


If more than one medical record has been mistakenly established for a patient,
this routine can be used to merge all of the Master Patient Index (MPI) data
onto one record. Once you merge the patient's MPI data, the system
automatically updates the Demo Recall information. If the patient has
departmental files (e.g., laboratory files, radiology files, etc.), the system
merges them as well.

NOTE: Users can set up an automatic broadcast of an OA message to occur after
a patient is merged.

This routine allows you to save one record (the "Saved Patient") and copy any
of the following information from the other record (the "Removed Patient") into
it:

    *   name                             *   maiden/other name

    *   birthdate                        *   mother's (first) name

    *   sex                              *   expired date

    *   social security number           *   Demo Recall data

In cases where both records have MPI data on file, any data you copy from the
removed record overwrites the corresponding data in the saved record.
The visit history is consolidated, and all visits for both records appear on
the saved record.

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

If you use this routine to copy (i.e., overwrite) patient data, such as the
patient's name, and later decide to unmerge the two records, the original
information associated with the removed patient's data is not restored
unless you have responded "Y"es to the SAVE PRE-MERGE DEMO RECALL DATA?
parameter AND the number of days listed at the PRE-MERGE DEMO RECALL DATA DAYS
parameter (which is the maximum amount of time that the data is able to be
restored within, before it gets file maintained) has not been reached.

For example, you decide to copy a saved patient's name, e.g., SMITH,JOHN
into the removed patient's name, e.g., BROWN,JOHN, and merge the two
records. The name, SMITH,JOHN, now appears for both records. If you unmerge
the two records, SMITH,JOHN still appears as the patient's name in both
unmerged records, unless you have a value of "Y"es at the SAVE PRE-MERGE DEMO
RECALL DATA? parameter and it is within the number of days at the PRE-MERGE
DEMO RECALL DATA DAYS parameter value.

For this reason, MEDITECH recommends that you first use the Demo Recall Print
Merge Patients (7.3)                                                   Page 132



routine to print a copy of both patients data before using the Merge
Patients routine. After an unmerge, you can take advantage of the Demo Recall
Print routine's output to re-enter the original information you had
overwritten.

In cases where both records have unit numbers and other numbers with the
same prefix, only the saved record's numbers are retained in the merge.
However, if the removed record has a unit number or other number with a
different prefix, that number is added to the merged record. (See the
multifacility example below for more information.)

In cases where a removed patient has more than one maiden/other name
entered in the Maiden/Other Names field in the Enter/Edit Patient routine,
the entries after the first one are placed in the saved patient's
Maiden/Other Names field.

The unit numbers of patients who have been merged appear in the Merged From
field in the View Patient routine.

If the patient is a current admission, the following information will be
updated in his/her Admissions application datafile:

    *    unit number(s)                   *   birthdate

    *    name                             *   maiden/other name

    *    sex                              *   mother's (first) name

    *    expired date                     *   social security number

Using Discontinued Numbers

If you enter one of the following discontinued numbers at a Patient or
Record prompt, the system alerts you to the merge and displays the correct
unit number, along with the patient's name and birthdate:

     *   primary unit number

     *   other number

The system keeps all discontinued numbers (i.e., a number removed by the
merge) on file in case you wish to unmerge the numbers later (see the Unmerge
Patients routine).

Tracking Merges

The output from the Merge/Unmerge Log routine lists all patients merged via
this routine. In the View Patient routine, you can see the merged numbers
associated with a patient.

Multifacility Merges

Multifacility system users should note that the Merge Patient and Unmerge
Merge Patients (7.3)                                                    Page 133



Patient routines are not facility-specific. As a result, it is possible to
merge records from different facilities (as long as the facilities share a
common database).

Assume, for example, that you just converted two separate medical records
databases into a single MEDITECH Medical Records Module Version 4.6 database;
you now have two facilities (Facility A and Facility B) sharing that one
database. Facility A uses the prefix A for its unit numbers, while
facility B uses the prefix B.

You decide that you want to merge any duplicate records, so that each patient
has a single medical record. Therefore, you sign-on to one facility (e.g.,
Facility A) and use the Merge Patients routine.

For our example, assume that Florence Brunnings has a medical record originally
established in Facility B, with the unit number B0002347. Ms. Brunnings also
has a record established in Facility A, with the unit number A0036548. The
demographic data on the Facility A record is more up-to-date, so you decide to
save the Facility A record and remove the Facility B record when you merge
them.

You merge the accounts.

After the merge, the unit numbers are combined, and the visit history is
consolidated. The merged record retains both original unit numbers. If
you sign on to Facility A, A0034548 is Ms. Brunnings' primary unit number.    If
you sign on to Facility B, B0002347 is her primary unit number.


For more information, see the section titled "Appendix E:   Multifacility
Systems."


Restrictions

You cannot merge patients if:

    *   Any portion of the removed record is incomplete,
        on reserve, or signed out to a recipient.

    *   Any portion of the saved record is incomplete

You can merge patients if only the saved patient has portions signed
out.

NOTE:   There may be times when, rather than merge records, you want to
        correct a single misassigned number (e.g., a new unit number was
        mistakenly given to a patient who is already in the Master Patient
        Index, but little data has been entered in his/her record). In that
        case, use the Edit Unit Number routine.
Merge Patients (7.3)                                                   Page 134

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                       Merge Patients                                       |
|============================================================================================|
|Save Patient:                                                                               |
|Remove Patient:                                                                             |
|             #   Save        Remove                                                         |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                     Discrepancies?
|
|               Saved Pt                           Removed Pt         Use Removed Pt Data?   |
|Name
|
|                                                                                            |
|Birthdate
|
|                                                                                            |
|Sex
|
|                                                                                            |
|Maiden/Other
|
|                                                                                            |
|Mother's Nm
|
|                                                                                            |
|Expired Date
|
|                                                                                            |
|Soc Sec #
|
|                                                                                            |
|Demo Recall
|
|Address,etc.                                                                                |
|                                                                                            |
|                             ...                                 ...                        |
|Add Removed Patient's Names To Saved Patient's Other Names?                                 |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Save Patient           To identify the record to be saved (i.e., the older,
                       more accurate, or more complete record), enter one of
                       the following:

                           *   The patient's primary unit number.

                           *   The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
                               prefaced by an E#.

                           *   The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                           *   The patient's social security number, prefaced
                               by a pound sign (#).

                           *   The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                           *   The patient's home telephone number, prefaced
                               by T#.
Merge Patients (7.3)                                                       Page 135



                               If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                               number within your facility, it replaces the
                               social security number.

                               If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                               unit number, the word NEW replaces the
                               social security number.

                           *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                               in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                               The system then begins a search of the Master
                               Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                               Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                               process).

                           *   An other number (i.e., a unit number
                               assigned by another facility or a number
                               assigned by a department, service, etc.).

                               As when you enter the social security number,
                               the system replaces the other number with
                               either the unit number or the word NEW (See
                               above).

                       When you identify a patient by number or locate the
                       patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays
                       his/her primary unit number (if one has been assigned).
                       In addition, a list of all numbers associated with
                       this record appears in the Save multiple field.

                       The patient's name, birthdate, sex, the first
                       maiden/other name entered in the Enter/Edit Patient
                       routine, mother's name, expired date and the patient's
                       address (as it appears in the Demo Recall feature)
                       appear following under the Saved Pt side of the
                       screen and the cursor moves to the Remove Patient
                       prompt.


Remove Patient         Identify the record to be merged (i.e., the
                       less accurate, less complete record). See the
                       documentation for the previous prompt for more
                       information on identifying a patient.

                       When you identify a patient, the system displays his/her
                       primary unit number (if one has been assigned). In
                       addition, a list of all numbers associated with this
                       record appears in the Remove multiple field.
Merge Patients (7.3)                                                    Page 136



                       The patient's name, birthdate, sex, maiden/other name,
                       mother's name, expired date and some of the Demo Recall
                       data appear under the Removed Pt side of the screen.

                       Once this is done, the cursor moves to the left of the
                       list of numbers. Note that these numbers cannot be
                       edited. Press <Return> to scroll through them. These
                       numbers are paired by prefix.

                       For example, when you view the numbers, you might see a
                       series such as the following:

                           #      Save          Remove
                           1      0034567       0034599
                           2                    R000029
                           3      S000779       S000816

                       After all the numbers have appeared, when you press
                       <Enter>, the cursor moves to a Use Removed Pt Data?
                       prompt as follows:

                       *   The cursor stops at one or more of the first seven
                           Use Removed Pt Data? prompts only when the
                           pair of Saved Pt and Removed Pt fields
                           contains conflicting data.

                       For example, if the birthdates in the Saved Pt and
                       Removed Pt fields differ, the cursor stops at the
                       Use Removed Pt Data? prompt for the Birthdate line;
                       if they are the same, it does not (and cannot) stop
                       there.

                       *   The cursor stops at the last Use Removed Pt Data
                           prompt (Demo Recall) whenever any Demo Recall
                           data exists for the record you are removing.

                       Although only the patient's address is shown, the system
                       checks all the Demo Recall data. While the data in
                       both the Saved Pt and Removed Pt fields may be
                       the same, there may be other differences between the two
                       patients Demo Recall files.

                       The only time the cursor does not stop at this prompt is
                       when the removed patient has no Demo Recall data on
                       file.

                       If you use this routine to copy (i.e., overwrite)
                       patient data, such as the patient's name, and later
                       decide to unmerge the two records, the original
                       information associated with the removed patient's
Merge Patients (7.3)                                                      Page 137



                       data is not restored unless you have responded "Y"es
                       to the SAVE PRE-MERGE DEMO RECALL DATA? parameter AND
                       the number of days listed at the PRE-MERGE DEMO RECALL
                       DATA DAYS parameter (which is the maximum amount of time
                       that the data is able to be restored within, before it
                       gets file maintained) has not been reached.

                       For example, you decide to copy a saved patient's
                       name, e.g., SMITH,JOHN into the removed patient's
                       name, e.g., BROWN,JOHN, and merge the two records. The
                       name, SMITH,JOHN, now appears for both records. If you
                       unmerge the two records, SMITH,JOHN still appears as the
                       patient's name in both unmerged records, unless you have
                       a value of "Y"es at the SAVE PRE-MERGE DEMO RECALL DATA?
                       parameter and it is within the number of days at the
                       PRE-MERGE DEMO RECALL DATA DAYS parameter value.


                       NOTE: In cases where both records have unit numbers
                       and other numbers with the same prefix, only the
                       numbers in the Save field are retained. However, if
                       there is a number in the Remove field which does not
                       have a match in the Save field, that number is added
                       to the Saved Pt record.

                       Assume, for example, 0034599 and S000816 do not appear
                       in the Saved Pt record (i.e., they are removed in the
                       merge). However, because the Saved Pt record did not
                       have an other number with the prefix R, R000029
                       is added to the Saved Pt record.


Name                   To have the saved patient's name appear on the
                       merged record, enter N.

                       To have the removed patient's name appear on the
                       record, enter Y.


Birthdate              To have the saved patient's birthdate appear on
                       the merged record, enter N.

                       To have the removed patient's birthdate appear on
                       the record, enter Y.


Sex                    To have the saved patient's sex appear on the
                       merged record, enter N.

                       To have the removed patient's sex appear on the
Merge Patients (7.3)                                                     Page 138



                       record, enter Y.


Maiden/Other           To have the first name in the saved patient's
                       maiden/other name multiple appear on the merged record,
                       enter N.

                       To have the first name in the removed patient's
                       maiden/other name multiple appear on the merged record,
                       enter Y.

                       NOTE:   If the Maiden/Other Names multiple in the
                               Enter/Edit Patient routine contains several
                               entries for that patient, this Merge Patients
                               routine affects only the first entry.


Mother's Nm            To have the saved patient's mother's name appear
                       on the merged record, enter N.

                       To have the removed patient's mother's name appear
                       on the record, enter Y.


Expired Date           To have the saved patient's expired date appear
                       on the merged record, enter N.

                       To have the removed patient's expired date appear on
                       the record, enter Y.


Soc Sec #              To have the saved patient's social security
                       number appear on the merged record, enter N.

                       To have the removed patient's social security number
                       appear on the record, enter Y.
Unmerge Patients (7.4)                                                 Page 139



7.4:    Unmerge Patients



Use this routine to return merged Master Patient Index (MPI) files to their
original, unmerged state. Once the Medical Records Department unmerges these
files, the original number(s) and the accompanying patient data are
automatically re-entered into the hospital's MPI and Demo Recall files.

If the patient is a current admission, the following information will be
updated in the Admissions application's datafile:

    *   name                             *   maiden/other name

    *   birthdate                        *   mother's (first) name

    *   sex                              *   expired date

    *   unit number(s)

    *   social security number           *   Demo Recall data

Once a merge number is chosen, if any "OLD" demo recall data exists for the
saved patient, a new screen fragment will present the user with options to
restore some or all of the saved demo recall data. Only the fields that were
answered "Y" to USE REMOVED PT DATA during the MERGE routine will be
restored.

For more information, see the section titled "Appendix A: The Interaction
Between the MRI & ADM Modules" in the Medical Records Module User Manual.


NOTE:   Once the files are unmerged, any information added to the merged
        record between the time of the merge and the time of the unmerge appears
        only in the files SAVED in the merge. Since there is no way to
        know the original source of the data (the SAVED record, the
        REMOVED record or later edits), unmerged files must be manually
        updated (see the Enter/Edit Patient and Demo Recall Edit routines.)

The output from the Merge/Unmerge Log routine lists all patient records that
are unmerged via this routine.

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.
Unmerge Patients (7.4)                                                    Page 140

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                      Unmerge Patients                                      |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient:                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|Name:                                 Birthdate:           Age:          ex:                |
|                                                                                            |
|Maiden/Other Name:                                   Folder Created:                        |
|Mother's Name:                                       More Data on Fiche:                    |
|Record Locator:                                      Portion Signed Out:                    |
|Discharge Disp:                                      Portion Incomplete:                    |
|Comment:                                                                                    |
|Other Names                                                                                 |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|Unmerge Number:                                                                             |
|                                                                                            |
|#   Unit #      Name                         Sex Bdate     Mother's Name                    |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|       (After Unmerge, review/edit Demo Recall, Other Names and Visits)                     |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PATIENT                  To identify the patient whose record you wish to
                             unmerge, enter one of the following:

                            *    The patient's primary unit number.

                            *    The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                            *    The patient's social security number, prefaced
                                 by a pound sign (#).

                            *    The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                            *    The patient's home telephone number, prefaced
                                 by T#.
                                  If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                                  unit number, an error message of "Patient not
                                  found." will appear, and you will not be able to
                                  proceed with the routine.


                             *    The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                                  in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                                  The system then begins a search of the Master
Unmerge Patients (7.4)                                                     Page 141



                                 Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                                 Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                                 process).

                             *   An other number (i.e., a unit number
                                 assigned by another facility or a number
                                 assigned by a department, service, etc.).

                                 As happened with the social security number,
                                 the system replaces the other number with
                                 either the unit number or the word NEW (see
                                 above).

                                 NOTE: You cannot unmerge records if a portion
                                 of the merged record is incomplete. If you
                                 attempt to unmerge such a record, the following
                                 error message appears:

                                      Complete or delete patient's incomplete
                                      records before unmerging.

                                 To unmerge the record, exit from this routine and
                                 use one of the following routines:

                                      *   Process Incomplete Records routine (to
                                          complete the record's incomplete portion)

                                      *   Delete Record routine (to remove the
                                          record from the Incomplete Records
                                          Feature)

                                 You can then return to the Unmerge Patients
                                 routine and unmerge the records.

                                 When you identify a patient by number, or locate
                                 the patient via a search of the MPI, the system
                                 displays his/her primary unit number (if one has
                                 been assigned) and key Master Patient Index data
                                 at the top of the screen.

                                 The cursor moves to the left of the number(s),
                                 patient name(s), and other key MPI data
                                 identifying removed record(s), which appear
                                 at the bottom of the screen.

                                 To move the cursor to the UNMERGE NUMBER
                                 prompt, press <Enter>.


UNMERGE NUMBER           Identify the patient (previously removed in the
Unmerge Patients (7.4)                                                    Page 142



                         merge) you want to unmerge by entering the number to
                         the left of that patient's unit number.

                         After you identify the patient whose record you want to
                         unmerge, the Unmerge? prompt appears at the bottom
                         of the screen. To unmerge the record, enter Y.

                         If you change your mind (e.g., you selected the wrong
                         unit number), enter N. The records are not
                         unmerged, and the cursor returns to the UNMERGE
                         NUMBER prompt.

                         NOTE: If you choose to unmerge a record which has
                         at least one portion active in the Record Locator
                         Feature, check the record's portions to determine which
                         portion belongs to which record. When this is the case,
                         the system alerts you with the following message:

                         Check whether Locator portions are correct for
                         (number).

                         This number is the unit number of the record being
                         unmerged.
Edit EPI Number (7.5)                                                    Page 143



7.5:   Edit EPI Number


This routine allows you to edit the Enterprise Patient Identifer (EPI) for each
medical record. The EPI # is a global identifier for the medical record and is
a unique number. The generation of the EPI # will be driven by the EPI
Parameter in MIS.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                      Edit EPI Number                                       |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient:                                          5                                         |
|                                                                                            |
|Name:                                 Birthdate:            Age:          ex:               |
|                                                                                            |
|Maiden/Other Name:                                    Folder Created:                       |
|Mother's Name:                                        More Data on Fiche:                   |
|Record Locator:                                       Portion Signed Out:                   |
|Discharge Disp:                                       Portion Incomplete:                   |
|                                                                                            |
|Comment:                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|      Date      Type    Account #     Location    Doctor       Res Date Disch Dt Disch Disp|
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------             |
|                                                                                            |
|Old EPI#                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|New EPI#                                                                                    |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PATIENT                  To identify the patient whose number(s) you want to
                         change, enter one of the following:

                             *   The patient's primary unit number.

                             *   The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
                                 prefaced by an E#.

                             *   The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                             *   The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                             *   The patient's home telephone number, prefaced
                                 by T#.
Edit EPI Number (7.5)                                                   Page 144



                            *   The patient's social security number, prefaced
                                by a pound sign (#).

                                If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                                number within your facility, it replaces the
                                social security number.

                                If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                                unit number, the word NEW replaces the
                                social security number.

                            *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                                in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                                The system then begins a search of the Master
                                Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                                Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                                process).

                            *   An other number (i.e., a unit number
                                assigned by another facility or a number
                                assigned by a department, service, etc.).

                                As when you enter the social security number,
                                the system replaces the other number with
                                either the unit number or the word NEW (See
                                above).

                        When you identify a patient by number or locate the
                        patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays
                        his/her primary unit number (if one has been assigned),
                        name, birthdate, age, sex and other Master Patient Index
                        data. In addition, a list of all numbers (primary and
                        other) assigned to this patient appears.

                        The cursor moves to the left of the DATE field. If
                        you are sure that this is the patient whose number(s)
                        you want to edit or delete, press <Enter> to move the
                        cursor to the DELETE? prompt. If you do not
                        want to edit or delete the unit number, press <EXIT>.


NEW EPI#
                             You can either enter a number, or have the system
                             assign the next available number by entering the
                             word NEW.

                             After you file the data, the system displays, at
                             the bottom of the screen, any new EPI numbers
                             it assigned.
Next EPI Number To Be Assigned (7.6)                                    Page 145



7.6:   Next EPI Number To Be Assigned


Documentation for following three routines is included below.   Scroll down to
the routine of interest.

* Next EPI Number to be Assigned
* Increase Next EPI # Assignment
* List Available EPI Numbers

Next EPI Number to be Assigned Routine

Use this routine to view the next Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) to
be assigned by the system. When you select this routine the system displays
the EPI number it will assign next.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                         Next EPI Number To Be Assigned                        |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Next EPI Number Will Be:                                                       |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Increase Next EPI # Assignment Routine

When you select this routine, the next EPI number to be assigned by the system
appears.

Specify the EPI number that you want the system to assign next. This reserves
the original next EPI number and all intervening numbers for manual
assignment.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                           Increase EPI # Assignment                           |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Next EPI Number Is Currently:                                                  |
|                                                                               |
|Increase Next EPI Number To:                                                   |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


INCREASE NEXT EPI
NUMBER TO
                           Enter the significant digits of the EPI number you
                           want the system to assign next (omitting any leading
                           zeros). For example, if the next number is 00029,
Next EPI Number To Be Assigned (7.6)                                   Page 146



                          enter 39 to increase the next number to 00039.

                      You cannot enter a number that is less than the current
                      next EPI number.


List Available EPI Numbers Routine

Use this routine to print the Available EPI Numbers List Report. The report
provides a list of numbers, within a user-specified range, which are available
for assignment. The numbers include any numbers reserved using the Increase
Next EPI Number Assignment Routine, as well as numbers which were mis-assigned
and later edited using the Edit EPI Number Routine.

This list allows the Medical Records Department to monitor EPI that are
available for manual assignment.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                          Available EPI Numbers List                           |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From EPI Number:                                                               |
|Thru EPI Number:                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FROM NUMBER           Enter the number from which you wish the system to
                      begin its search for available numbers.



THRU NUMBER           Enter the number through which you wish the system
                      to search for available numbers.


The system searches for any unassigned numbers within the specified range, and
prints these numbers in ascending numerical order.
Increase Next EPI # Assignment (7.7)                                    Page 147



7.7:   Increase Next EPI # Assignment


Documentation for following three routines is included below.   Scroll down to
the routine of interest.

* Next EPI Number to be Assigned
* Increase Next EPI # Assignment
* List Available EPI Numbers

Next EPI Number to be Assigned Routine

Use this routine to view the next Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) to
be assigned by the system. When you select this routine the system displays
the EPI number it will assign next.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                         Next EPI Number To Be Assigned                        |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Next EPI Number Will Be:                                                       |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Increase Next EPI # Assignment Routine

When you select this routine, the next EPI number to be assigned by the system
appears.

Specify the EPI number that you want the system to assign next. This reserves
the original next EPI number and all intervening numbers for manual
assignment.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                           Increase EPI # Assignment                           |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Next EPI Number Is Currently:                                                  |
|                                                                               |
|Increase Next EPI Number To:                                                   |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


INCREASE NEXT EPI
NUMBER TO
                           Enter the significant digits of the EPI number you
                           want the system to assign next (omitting any leading
                           zeros). For example, if the next number is 00029,
Increase Next EPI # Assignment (7.7)                                   Page 148



                          enter 39 to increase the next number to 00039.

                      You cannot enter a number that is less than the current
                      next EPI number.


List Available EPI Numbers Routine

Use this routine to print the Available EPI Numbers List Report. The report
provides a list of numbers, within a user-specified range, which are available
for assignment. The numbers include any numbers reserved using the Increase
Next EPI Number Assignment Routine, as well as numbers which were mis-assigned
and later edited using the Edit EPI Number Routine.

This list allows the Medical Records Department to monitor EPI that are
available for manual assignment.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                          Available EPI Numbers List                           |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From EPI Number:                                                               |
|Thru EPI Number:                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FROM NUMBER           Enter the number from which you wish the system to
                      begin its search for available numbers.



THRU NUMBER           Enter the number through which you wish the system
                      to search for available numbers.


The system searches for any unassigned numbers within the specified range, and
prints these numbers in ascending numerical order.
List Available EPI Numbers (7.8)                                        Page 149



7.8:   List Available EPI Numbers


Documentation for following three routines is included below.   Scroll down to
the routine of interest.

* Next EPI Number to be Assigned
* Increase Next EPI # Assignment
* List Available EPI Numbers

Next EPI Number to be Assigned Routine

Use this routine to view the next Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) to
be assigned by the system. When you select this routine the system displays
the EPI number it will assign next.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                         Next EPI Number To Be Assigned                        |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Next EPI Number Will Be:                                                       |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Increase Next EPI # Assignment Routine

When you select this routine, the next EPI number to be assigned by the system
appears.

Specify the EPI number that you want the system to assign next. This reserves
the original next EPI number and all intervening numbers for manual
assignment.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                           Increase EPI # Assignment                           |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Next EPI Number Is Currently:                                                  |
|                                                                               |
|Increase Next EPI Number To:                                                   |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


INCREASE NEXT EPI
NUMBER TO
                           Enter the significant digits of the EPI number you
                           want the system to assign next (omitting any leading
                           zeros). For example, if the next number is 00029,
List Available EPI Numbers (7.8)                                       Page 150



                          enter 39 to increase the next number to 00039.

                      You cannot enter a number that is less than the current
                      next EPI number.


List Available EPI Numbers Routine

Use this routine to print the Available EPI Numbers List Report. The report
provides a list of numbers, within a user-specified range, which are available
for assignment. The numbers include any numbers reserved using the Increase
Next EPI Number Assignment Routine, as well as numbers which were mis-assigned
and later edited using the Edit EPI Number Routine.

This list allows the Medical Records Department to monitor EPI that are
available for manual assignment.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                          Available EPI Numbers List                           |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From EPI Number:                                                               |
|Thru EPI Number:                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FROM NUMBER           Enter the number from which you wish the system to
                      begin its search for available numbers.



THRU NUMBER           Enter the number through which you wish the system
                      to search for available numbers.


The system searches for any unassigned numbers within the specified range, and
prints these numbers in ascending numerical order.
Switch Visit (7.9)                                                     Page 151



7.9:   Switch Visit


The Switch Visit routine is used to "switch" a specified patient visit
(account number) from an existing medical record (unit number) to a different
medical record after the visit has been purged from the Admissions application.

For example, this routine can be used in the following situation:

A new visit was entered for a patient and, during a search of the Master
Patient Index, the wrong medical record (unit number) was selected. This
routine will allow a user to switch this visit's account number from one
existing unit number to another.

Both unit numbers remain unchanged. The patient visit (account number) is
simply removed from one medical record and associated with another existing
medical record.

This routine can only switch visits entered through ADM. It will not switch
visits that have incomplete records associated with them.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                        Switch Visit                                        |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient:                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|Name:                                  Birthdate:            Age:          Sex:             |
|Unit #                                     Exp Date:                                        |
|                                                                                            |
|Maiden/Other Names:                                     Other Numbers:                      |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|Mother's Name:                         Discharge Disp:                                      |
|Comment:                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|    Date       Type   Account #    Con Location PRE Reservation Date                        |
|          Doctor      Disch Dt Disch Disp Reason For Visit                                  |
|                       54                                                                   |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                       54                                                                   |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                       54                                                                   |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|Switch Visit #:           0                                                                 |
|To New Patient:                                                                             |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Switch Visit (7.9)                                                     Page 152



PATIENT              To identify a patient, enter his/her primary unit
                     number (i.e., a unit number with your facility's
                     prefix), social security number or other number
                     (i.e., a unit number from another facility, or a
                     department or service number). Enter the patient's name
                     if he/she does not have a previously assigned number, or
                     that number is unknown.

                     Other number or Social Security number

                     When you enter an other number or a social security
                     number prefaced by a pound sign (#):

                            *   If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                                number, it appears on the screen in place of the
                                number you entered.

                     Name

                     If the patient's number is not known, enter his/her
                     name, using up to 30 characters, in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME
                     REST format. Do not leave a space between the comma
                     and the FIRSTNAME.

                     Leading titles such as Mr., Mrs., or Dr. should be
                     omitted. Honorifics, such as M.D., REV., JR., or III,
                     may be entered (without punctuation) after the FIRSTNAME
                     or REST and must be separated by a space (e.g.,
                     JOHNSON,PETER H JR).

                     The system then begins a search of the Master Patient
                     Index to identify the patient (see Appendix B for a
                     detailed description of this process).

                     Previously Entered Patient

                     When you identify a patient by number, or locate the
                     patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays his
                     or her primary unit number (if one has been assigned),
                     all previously entered MPI data and a list of all
                     other numbers assigned to this patient.

                     If this patient has been flagged as a confidential
                     patient in the Admissions application, a message,
                     **CONFIDENTIAL**, appears in the upper right of this
                     screen. When a specific visit has been flagged as a
                     confidential visit, a "Y" appears in the CON
                     column (on the bottom half of this screen).

                     If the patient does not have a unit number, the name of
Switch Visit (7.9)                                                     Page 153



                     the patient will appear; otherwise, the unit number will
                     appear.




SWITCH VISIT #       Enter the number of the visit that is to be
                     switched. The account number associated with the visit
                     will appear next to it.

                     Visits with incomplete records associated with them may
                     not be chosen.


TO NEW PATIENT       To identify the new medical record to be associated
                     with the selected visit, enter the primary unit number
                     (i.e., a unit number with your facility's prefix),
                     social security number or other number (i.e., a unit
                     number from another facility, or a department or service
                     number). Enter the patient's name if he/she does not
                     have a previously assigned number, or that number is
                     unknown.

                     Other number or Social Security number

                     When you enter an other number or a social security
                     number prefaced by a pound sign (#):

                            *   If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                                number, it appears on the screen in place of the
                                number you entered.

                     Name

                     If the patient's number is not known, enter his/her
                     name, using up to 30 characters, in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME
                     REST format. Do not leave a space between the comma
                     and the FIRSTNAME.

                     Leading titles such as Mr., Mrs., or Dr. should be
                     omitted. Honorifics, such as M.D., REV., JR., or III,
                     may be entered (without punctuation) after the FIRSTNAME
                     or REST and must be separated by a space (e.g.,
                     JOHNSON,PETER H JR).

                     The system then begins a search of the Master Patient
                     Index to identify the patient (see Appendix B for a
                     detailed description of this process).
Switch Visit (7.9)                                                   Page 154



                     If the patient's unit number exists, it will display
                     after the patient's name; if the patient's unit number
                     does not exist, just the patient name will display.
Verifying Unit Number Assignments (7.10)                                  Page 155



7.10:   Verifying Unit Number Assignments


This section describes the routines which you use to identify, reserve and
list available unit numbers, as well as the routine which enables you to verify
that previously assigned unit numbers have been assigned correctly.


_______________________________________________________________________________

         Identifying Unit Numbers/Verifying Unit Number Assignments
_______________________________________________________________________________

If you want to:                             Use the following routine:

Display the next unit number                Next Unit Number to be Assigned
to be assigned


Reserve a block of unit numbers             Increase Next Unit Number Assignment
which can then be manually
assigned to patients


List all available unit numbers             List Available Unit Numbers
within a user-specified range


Review all unit numbers assigned           Verify Daily Assignments
during a specified time period
to make sure that these unit
numbers have been correctly
assigned.
_______________________________________________________________________________


These routines are described in detail on the following pages.
Next Unit Number to be Assigned (7.10.1)                               Page 156



7.10.1:   Next Unit Number to be Assigned


Use this routine to view the next number (primary unit number or other
number) to be assigned by the system. When you select this routine and
specify a prefix, the system displays the number (with that prefix) it will
assign next.



Gaps in the Unit Number Sequence


Numbers Set Aside for Manual Assignment

The system allows you to set aside a series of numbers which can then be
assigned manually. (See the Increase Next Unit Number Assignment Routine for
more information). This will cause gaps in the sequence of numbers assigned by
the system.

Assume, for example, that the last unit number assigned by the system was
0000567. If you reserve the next 20 numbers for manual assignment, 0000587
appears in the NEXT UNIT NUMBER WILL BE field.


Multifacility Systems Which Use Root Unit Numbers

Some multifacility systems use root unit numbers. For such systems, if a
patient is seen in more than one facility, his/her unit number will be the same
in each facility except for the prefix (which is facility-specific).

In this case, once a patient is assigned a unit number via one facility, the
system sets aside the associated root number. This will cause gaps in the
number sequence.

Assume, for example, that you have two facilities: Hospital A (which uses the
prefix A for its unit numbers) and Clinic B (which uses the prefix B).
Patient Frank Child is first seen in the hospital and assigned unit number
A000909. The system then sets aside the root number (909), and as a result,
the clinic cannot assign B000909 to anyone other than Frank Child.

If you knew that the last unit number assigned in the clinic was B000908, you
would expect B000909 to appear in the NEXT UNIT NUMBER WILL BE field of
this routine when you are signed-on to the clinic. In this case, however, the
next number will be B000910.

In addition, if a patient with a record in one facility is seen in a second
facility, the system assigns the root unit number to this patient and attaches
the second facility's prefix to it. This number will not necessarily be the
"next unit number to be assigned" displayed by this routine.

For example, if Frank Child is later seen in the clinic, he will be assigned
Next Unit Number to be Assigned (7.10.1)                                Page 157



B000909, even though this is not the number which appears in the
NEXT UNIT NUMBER WILL BE field.

For more information, see Appendix E:   Multifacility Systems and Appendix F:
Patient Numbers.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                        Next Unit Number To Be Assigned                        |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Unit Number Prefix:                                                            |
|                                                                               |
|Next Unit Number Will Be:                                                      |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


UNIT NUMBER PREFIX    The unit number prefix used by your facility
                      appears. Press <Enter> to display the next unit number
                      to be assigned.

                      To view the next number with a different prefix, delete
                      the unit number prefix and enter the desired other
                      number prefix. The next number with that prefix to be
                      assigned by the system appears. (Eligible prefixes for
                      your facility are specified by MEDITECH in the Facility
                      Dictionary.)

                      Press <Enter> to clear the screen and return to the
                      UNIT NUMBER PREFIX prompt. Enter another prefix, if
                      desired, or press <Enter> again to return to the menu
                      screen.
Increase Next Unit Number Assignment (7.10.2)                          Page 158



7.10.2:   Increase Next Unit Number Assignment


This routine allows the user to reserve a series of numbers (primary unit
numbers or other numbers) that can be manually assigned to patients at any
time (e.g., when the system is down during routine database maintenance).
Manually assigned numbers and the accompanying patient data can be entered into
the system later using the Enter/Edit Patient Routine or the Fast Input
Routine.

When you select this routine, the primary unit number prefix for your facility
and the next primary unit number to be assigned by the system defaults in.
Specify the unit number that you want the system to assign next. This reserves
the original next unit number and all intervening numbers for manual
assignment.

For example, if the next available unit number is now ZZ00029 and you enter 39,
the next unit number assigned by the system is ZZ00039. The numbers ZZ00029
through ZZ00038 are reserved (i.e., they are not be assigned by the system).
You can now manually assign these unit numbers as necessary.

You can also delete the default prefix and enter any prefix used by your
facility. The next available number with the specified prefix appears and you
can enter the new next number with this prefix.

To identify all numbers available for manual assignment (within a user-
specified range), use the List Available Unit Numbers Routine.



Multifacility Systems Which Use Root Unit Numbers

Some multifacility systems use root unit numbers. For such systems, if a
patient is seen in more than one facility, his/her unit number will be the same
in each facility except for the prefix (which is facility-specific). (For
more information, see Appendix E: Multifacility Systems and Appendix F:
Patient Numbers.)

In that case, when you use this routine to reserve a series of unit numbers,
the system reserves the root unit number (not simply the number which has your
facility's prefix). This ensures that the root number cannot be assigned to
more than one patient.

Assume, for example, that you have two facilities, Hospital A and Clinic B,
which share the same database. Hospital A uses the prefix A and Clinic B
uses the prefix B. If you sign-on to the hospital and reserve the numbers
A000100 through A000125, the system reserves B000100 through B000125 as well.
The next unit number automatically assigned in the hospital is A000126 and the
next number assigned in the clinic is B000126.

Note, however, that you must make your own arrangements to ensure that these
reserved root numbers are not manually assigned to more than one patient.
Increase Next Unit Number Assignment (7.10.2)                          Page 159



For example, you may want to reserve a series of numbers, and then set aside
one sub-set of these numbers for manual assignment in the hospital and another
sub-set of these numbers for manual assignment in the clinic.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                          Increase Unit # Assignment                           |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Unit Number Prefix:                                                            |
|                                                                               |
|Next Unit Number Is Currently:                                                 |
|Increase Next Unit Number To:                                                  |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


UNIT NUMBER PREFIX    The primary unit number prefix used by your facility
                      (specified in the MRI parameters) appears. If this is
                      the prefix of the number(s) you want to reserve, press
                      <Enter>.

                      To change the prefix, delete the default prefix and
                      enter the appropriate prefix. (Eligible prefixes for
                      your facility are specified by MEDITECH).

                      When you press <Enter>, the next number to be assigned
                      by the system appears at the
                      NEXT UNIT NUMBER IS CURRENTLY prompt, and the cursor
                      moves to the INCREASE NEXT UNIT NUMBER TO prompt.


INCREASE NEXT UNIT    Enter the significant digits of the unit number you
NUMBER TO             want the system to assign next (i.e., omit the
                      prefix and any leading zeros). For example, if the next
                      number is ZZ00029, enter 39 to increase the next number
                      to ZZ00039.

                      You cannot enter a number that is less than the current
                      next unit number.
List Available Unit Numbers (7.10.3)                                     Page 160



7.10.3:   List Available Unit Numbers


Use this routine to print the Available Unit Numbers List Report. The report
provides a list of numbers, within a user-specified range, which are available
for assignment. The numbers include any numbers reserved using the Increase
Next Unit Number Assignment Routine, as well as numbers which were mis-assigned
and later edited using the Edit Unit Number Routine.

This list allows the Medical Records Department to monitor all numbers (unit
numbers and other numbers) that are available for manual assignment.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                          Available Unit Numbers List                          |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|For Prefix:                                                                    |
|                                                                               |
|From Number:                                                                   |
|Thru Number:                                                                   |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FOR PREFIX             The primary unit number prefix used by your facility
                       appears. Press <Enter> to print the list for patients
                       who have unit numbers with this prefix.

                       To print the list for patients who have other
                       numbers delete the default prefix and enter the
                       desired prefix. (Note that you may only enter
                       prefixes used by your facility.)


FROM NUMBER            Enter the number from which you wish the system to
                       begin its search for available numbers.



THRU NUMBER            Enter the number through which you wish the system
                       to search for available numbers.


The system searches for any unassigned numbers within the specified range, and
prints these numbers in ascending numerical order.
Verify Daily Assignments (7.10.4)                                       Page 161



7.10.4:    Verify Daily Assignments


Use this routine to review all primary unit numbers that were assigned during
user-specified hours on any user-specified date. This allows you to verify
that each unit number has been assigned correctly.

You first enter the desired date and time frame. The system then displays a
second screen (similar to the Enter/Edit Patient Routine screen); the first
unit number assigned during the specified time appears in the PATIENT
field. To verify that duplicate unit numbers have not been assigned, you
display this patient's Master Patient Index (MPI) data and search the MPI for
similarly named patients.

The system displays all unit numbers assigned during the specified time frame.
In addition, when you finish verifying the numbers displayed, you may also
verify any number (primary unit number or other number) regardless of
its assignment date.

NOTE:   For multifacility systems, this routine is facility-specific (i.e.,
        you can only verify unit numbers assigned by the facility to which you
        signed-on).



+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                           Verify Daily Assignments                            |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|For Date:                                                                      |
|                                                                               |
|From Time:                                                                     |
|Thru Time:                                                                     |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FOR DATE                Yesterday's date appears. Press <Enter> to
                        verify medical record numbers assigned for that date, or
                        delete it and enter another date, using the standard
                        date format or a T combination.


FROM TIME               0000 appears. Press <Enter> to verify unit
                        numbers entered starting with midnight on the selected
                        date, or delete 0000 and enter the desired time in
                        the standard 24 hour clock format (HHMM).
Verify Daily Assignments (7.10.4)                                     Page 162



THRU TIME             2359 appears. Press <Enter> to verify unit
                      numbers entered through 11:59 P.M. of the selected date,
                      or delete 2359 and enter the desired ending time.


When you press <Enter>, the VERIFY ASSIGNMENT screen appears.


+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                     Verify Assignment                                      |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient:                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|Name:                                 Birthdate:           Age:          ex:                |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|Maiden/Other Name:                                   Folder Created:                        |
|Mother's Name:                                       More Data On Fiche:                    |
|Record Locator:                                      Portion Signed Out:                    |
|Discharge Disp:                                      Portion Incomplete:                    |
|Comment:                                                                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|Px Numbers                                                                                  |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|    Date       Type    Account #     Location    Doctor      Res Date Disch Dt Disch Disp |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PATIENT               The first primary unit number assigned during the
                      specified time appears. Press <Enter> to verify this
                      patient's MPI data (or delete the default unit number,
                      identify any patient whose data you wish to verify, then
                      press <Enter>). The patient's MPI data appears, and
                      the cursor moves to the PX field.

                      You can either go directly to the search of the Master
                      Patient Index, (by pressing <OK>), or scroll through all
                      the patient's other numbers and visit history (by
                      pressing <Enter>).

                      If you press <OK>, the "Search records?" prompt appears
                      immediately at the bottom of the screen. If you scroll
Verify Daily Assignments (7.10.4)                                     Page 163



                      through the data, the "Search records?" prompt appears
                      when you have viewed the entire record.

                      In either case, enter Y to continue the verification
                      process (see below), or N to return directly to the
                      next assigned unit number.


                      To Continue Verification

                      When you press Y, you initiate a Soundex search of
                      the Master Patient Index (see Appendix B for a detailed
                      description of this process). This allows you to
                      determine if the recently assigned unit number was
                      incorrectly given to a similarly-named patient with an
                      existing medical record.

                      To check the MPI data of any one of the patients
                      displayed, enter the number to the left of the patient
                      name after SEE MORE DATA FOR #. The following
                      information appears on the lower part of the screen:

                      ADDRESS (if known):
                      SS#:      OTHER NAME:
                      COMMENTS:
                      OTHER #S:
                      VISITS:

                      The system then asks:   Is this the one?

                      If the patient is not the same as the one
                      whose unit number you are verifying:

                            Enter N. If the patient is not found through
                            the Soundex search, the system displays the next
                            assigned unit number for verification.

                      If the patient is the same as the one whose
                      unit number you are verifying:

                            Enter Y. In this case you should take
                            appropriate steps to cancel the recently-assigned
                            unit number (e.g., edit the unit number or merge
                            the records). Unit numbers edits automatically
                            appear in the MPI, the Demo Recall files and, if
                            the patient is a current admission, in his/her
                            Admissions file. See Appendix A for more
                            information.

                            The system then displays the next patient unit
Verify Daily Assignments (7.10.4)                                    Page 164



                            number for verification.

                      When you have reviewed all the primary unit numbers that
                      were assigned during the specified time, the screen no
                      longer displays a unit number. Press <EXIT> to leave
                      the routine, or enter the number (primary unit number or
                      other number) or name of any patient you wish to
                      verify (regardless of the assignment date) and follow
                      the above procedures.
Critial Care Indicators and Adverse Drug Information (8)               Page 165



Chapter 8:   Critial Care Indicators and Adverse Drug Information


Your health care organization can create a critical care indicator
customer-defined screen (CCI CDS) for the Demo Recall files. The CCI CDS
appears if users indicate that they want to see the View Critical Care
Indicators Screen after entering the patient's admission/registration
information on the first page of the Admissions questionnaire. The information
comes from the patient's current entries in Demo Recall. Note that Patients
must have a prior visit (e.g., a Demo Recall file) for the CCI CDS screen to
appear.

Using CCI CDSs allows you to efficiently manage critical care indicator and
adverse drug information as well as alert different areas or your health care
organization of a patient's prior medical conditions during
admission/registration. For example, you might want to know that the patient
showed an allergic reaction to a medication only recently. Increased accuracy
in the entering and maintaining the information improves patient care and
lessens chance of liability.

Note that critical care indicator information is stored in Demo Recall.   Two
MRI routines provide access to the CCI CDS information:

     _ Enter/Edit MRI CCI CDS Routine

     _ View MRI CCI CDS Routine
Enter/Edit MRI CCI CDS Name (8.1)                                      Page 166



8.1:   Enter/Edit MRI CCI CDS Name


Use this routine to attach a Critical Care Indicator customer-defined screen
(CDS) for use within the Medical Records application.

If there is a Critical Care Indicator customer-defined screen identified, it
will be used when in the Demo Recall routines.

NOTE: If this is to be utilized in the Admissions application as well, the CDS
used in ADM must be identical to the one used here.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                            Enter/Edit CCI CDS Name                            |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Critical Care Indicators CDS Name                                              |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


--CUSTOMER DEFINED SCREEN--

                    Enter the mnemonic of the CDS that you want to appear
                    within Medical Records. If you want this CDS to also
                    appear in Admissions, the mnemonic of the CDS must be
                    entered in the Admissions Module. Both screens must be
                    identical. If you want to restrict Critical Care
                    Indicators to Medical Records DO NOT enter the CDS mnemonic
                    in ADM. You may enter Critical Care Indicator data for an
                    individual patient in routine 70, or view it with 71. A
                    <Lookup> into the MIS Customer Defined Screen Dictionary is
                    available.
Enter/Edit MRI CCI CDS (8.2)                                            Page 167



8.2:   Enter/Edit MRI CCI CDS


This routine lets users enter/edit patient data on the Critical Care Indicator
customer-defined screen noted in the Enter/Edit CCI CDS Name routine.

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

Please note that users are now able to specify a critical care indicator
customer-defined screen (CCI CDS) for the Demo Recall. Users can also enter
and view critical care indicators and adverse drug information on the CDS in
MRI. This will efficiently manage CCIs and adverse drug information and to
alert different areas of the health care organization when a patient with a
previous condition visits.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                          Enter/Edit DRC Critical Care Indicators                           |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient                                           5                                         |
|                                                                                            |
|Name                                     Birthdate           Age          Sex               |
|                                                                                            |
|Maiden/Other Names                                                                          |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PATIENT                     To identify the patient for whom you wish to
                            Enter or Edit Critical Care Indicators for, enter
                            one of the following:

                            *   The patient's primary unit number.

                            *   The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
                                prefaced by an E#.

                            *   The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                            *   The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                            *   The patient's home telephone number, prefaced
                                 by T#.

                            *   The patient's social security number, prefaced
                                 by #.

                                If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
Enter/Edit MRI CCI CDS (8.2)                                               Page 168



                                   number within your facility, it replaces the
                                   social security number.


                                   If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                                   unit number, the word NEW replaces the
                                   social security number.

                               *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                                   in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                                   The system then begins a search of the Master
                                   Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                                   Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                                   process).

                               *   An other number (i.e., a unit number
                                   assigned by another facility or a number
                                   assigned by a department, service, etc.).

                                   As when you enter the social security number,
                                   the system replaces the other number with
                                   either the unit number or the word NEW (See
                                   above).

                                   If you fail to locate the patient:

                               *   Delete the patient name and identify another
                                   patient to continue

                                                   or

                               *   Press <EXIT> to return to the menu screen

Once you identify the patient the Critical Care Indicator customer-defined
screen noted in the Enter/Edit CCI CDS Name routine becomes available for the
user to enter responses in the queries defined on this screen.
View MRI CCI CDS (8.3)                                                  Page 169



8.3:   View MRI CCI CDS


This routine lets users view the patient information entered on the Critical
Care Indicator customer-defined screen defined for the Medical Records
application.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                             View DRC Critical Care Indicators                              |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient                                            5                                        |
|                                                                                            |
|Name                                     Birthdate           Age          Sex               |
|                                                                                            |
|Maiden/Other Names                                                                          |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PATIENT                    To identify the patient for whom you wish to
                           Enter or Edit Critical Care Indicators for, enter
                           one of the following:

                           *    The patient's primary unit number.

                           *    The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
                                prefaced by an E#.

                           *    The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                           *    The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                           *    The patient's home telephone number, prefaced
                                 by T# .

                           *    The patient's social security number, prefaced
                                 by # .

                                If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                                number within your facility, it replaces the
                                social security number.

                                If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                                unit number, the word NEW replaces the
                                social security number.

                            *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                                in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                                The system then begins a search of the Master
View MRI CCI CDS (8.3)                                                 Page 170



                                Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                                Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                                process).

                            *   An other number (i.e., a unit number
                                assigned by another facility or a number
                                assigned by a department, service, etc.).

                                As when you enter the social security number,
                                the system replaces the other number with
                                either the unit number or the word NEW (See
                                above).

                                If you fail to locate the patient:

                            *   Delete the patient name and identify another
                                patient to continue

                                                or

                            *   Press <EXIT> to return to the menu screen

Once you identify the patient the user will be able to view the Critical Care
Indicator Customer-defined screen responses that had been entered for this
patient in the Enter/Edit Critical Care Indicator Customer-Defined screen
routine.
Seal Patient EMR (8.4)                                                    Page 171



8.4:   Seal Patient EMR


EMR (Enterprise Medical Record)

A MEDITECH module that collects, stores, and displays clinical data for
patients within a health care organization. Health care providers use EMR to
access multiple sources of patient information at one time. EMR accepts data
from many separate MEDITECH enterprises, such as hospitals, clinics, and
provider offices, as well as data from outside vendor applications. Patient
information processed by EMR ranges from demographic and status data to orders
performed and medications administered during a visit. Because this information
is never purged from EMR, patient histories are permanently maintained.

The use of this routine causes a transaction to go to EMR to seal either a
whole record or a specific visit for a record.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                       Seal Patient EMR                                     |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient:
|
|                                                                                            |
|Name:                                   Birthdate:             Age:           Sex:          |
|Unit #                                      Exp Date:          Record Sealed:               |
|                                                                                            |
|    Date      Type    Account #     Con Location PRE Reservation Sealed                     |
|          Doctor      Disch Dt Disch Disp Reason For Visit                                  |
|                       54                                                                   |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                       54                                                                   |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                       54                                                                   |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|Seal Visit #:          110                                                                  |
|                                                                                            |
|Users Who May Access this Patient's            EMR                                          |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PATIENT                   To identify a patient, enter his/her primary unit
Seal Patient EMR (8.4)                                                      Page 172



                         number (i.e., a unit number with your facility's
                         prefix), social security number or other number
                         (i.e., a unit number from another facility, or a
                         department or service number). Enter the patient's name
                         if he/she does not have a previously assigned number, or
                         that number is unknown.

                         Other number or Social Security number

                         When you enter an other number or a social security
                         number prefaced by a pound sign (#):

                                *   If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                                    number, it appears on the screen in place of the
                                    number you entered.

                         Name

                         If the patient's number is not known, enter his/her
                         name, using up to 30 characters, in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME
                         REST format. Do not leave a space between the comma
                         and the FIRSTNAME.

                         Leading titles such as Mr., Mrs., or Dr. should be
                         omitted. Honorifics, such as M.D., REV., JR., or III,
                         may be entered (without punctuation) after the FIRSTNAME
                         or REST and must be separated by a space (e.g.,
                         JOHNSON,PETER H JR).

                         The system then begins a search of the Master Patient
                         Index to identify the patient (see Appendix B for a
                         detailed description of this process).

                         Previously Entered Patient

                         When you identify a patient by number, or locate the
                         patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays his
                         or her primary unit number (if one has been assigned),
                         all previously entered MPI data and a list of all
                         other numbers assigned to this patient.

                         If this patient has been flagged for as a confidential
                         patient in the Admissions application, a message,
                         **CONFIDENTIAL**, appears in the upper right of this
                         screen. When a specific visit has been flagged as a
                         confidential visit, a "Y" appears in the CON
                         column (on the bottom half of this screen).

                         If the patient does not have a unit number, the name of
                         the patient will appear; otherwise, the unit number will
Seal Patient EMR (8.4)                                                   Page 173



                         appear.

                         The Functionality of the Field

                         A patient's record will display much as it does in the
                         Enter/Edit Patient routine, with some additional fields:

                         - Record Sealed (this is for the record as a whole)

                         - Sealed (this is for the individual visits)

                         - Seal Visit # (to either seal a specific visit or
                           to seal ALL visits for the record)

                         - Users Who Can Access this Patient's ______ in EMR
                           (the entry in the field is either RECORD, if the
                           whole record/record's visits is to be sealed, where
                           the entry at the Seal Visit # field would have
                           been ALL; or the entry in the field is VISIT,
                           if one of the record's visits is to be sealed, where
                           the entry at the Seal Visit # field would have
                           been a specific visit's line number)

                           This last field comes with an accompanying multiple
                           where users (from the MIS User Dictionary) may be
                           entered. This multiple is used to set which user(s)
                           may access the patient's record/visit data in EMR.




SEAL VISIT #             Enter the number of the specific visit that is to be
                         sealed, or ALL if the whole record is to be sealed.

                         If ALL is used, the text of "Filing will SEAL this
                         Patient's Record" will appear to the right of the
                         display field for a specific visit's account number
                         (which would, in this case, be blank). Use of this will
                         cause all visits with a status of SEALED to be
                         changed to UNSEALED.

                         (NOTE: Visits whose status was nil, neither SEALED
                         nor UNSEALED, will remain nil and will not be
                         changed to UNSEALED.)

                         Once the user enters ALL, the following prompt will
                         appear at the bottom of the screen:

                                   UNSEAL Patient RECORD in EMR?
Seal Patient EMR (8.4)                                                   Page 174




                         If a specific visit is sealed, entering the line
                         number containing the specific visit's account number
                         will cause the account number to appear next to it;
                         also, the text of "Patient Visit is currently UNSEALED"
                         will display to the right of the account number. Next,
                         the cursor will move to the user multiple where the user
                         is to enter those users who are to have access to the
                         record's/record visit's data in EMR.

                         If no users are entered in the user multiple, a warning
                         message of "No Users will be able to Access this Patient
                         VISIT in EMR. OK?" will appear. Enter "Y"es if this is
                         acceptable; enter "N"o if you wish to make any edits.

                         Once the user enters a specific visit number, the
                         following prompt will appear at the bottom of the
                         screen:

                                SEAL Patient VISIT in EMR?


USERS WHO MAY ACCESS THIS PATIENT'S ______ IN EMR

                         Enter the mnemonic for the users who will be allowed
                         access to the visit or record in EMR.

                         A Lookup is available from the MIS User Dictionary.

                         This is not a required field, but if no users are
                         entered in the multiple, a warning message of "No Users
                         will be able to Access this Patient VISIT in EMR. OK?"
                         will appear. Enter "Y"es if this is acceptable; enter
                         "N"o if you wish to make any edits.
Unseal Patient EMR (8.5)                                               Page 175



8.5:   Unseal Patient EMR


The use of this routine causes a transaction to go to EMR to unseal either a
whole record or a specific visit for a record.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                      Unseal Patient EMR                                    |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient:
|
|                                                                                            |
|Name:                                   Birthdate:             Age:           Sex:          |
|Unit #                                      Exp Date:          Record Sealed:               |
|                                                                                            |
|    Date      Type    Account #     Con Location PRE Reservation Sealed                     |
|          Doctor      Disch Dt Disch Disp Reason For Visit                                  |
|                       54                                                                   |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                       54                                                                   |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                       54                                                                   |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|Unseal Visit #:           0                                                                 |
|                                                                                            |
|Users Who Can Access this Patient's           EMR                                           |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PATIENT                To identify a patient, enter his/her primary unit
                       number (i.e., a unit number with your facility's
                       prefix), social security number or other number
                       (i.e., a unit number from another facility, or a
                       department or service number). Enter the patient's name
                       if he/she does not have a previously assigned number, or
                       that number is unknown.

                       Other number or Social Security number

                       When you enter an other number or a social security
                       number prefaced by a pound sign (#):
Unseal Patient EMR (8.5)                                                Page 176




                             *   If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                                 number, it appears on the screen in place of the
                                 number you entered.

                      Name

                      If the patient's number is not known, enter his/her
                      name, using up to 30 characters, in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME
                      REST format. Do not leave a space between the comma
                      and the FIRSTNAME.

                      Leading titles such as Mr., Mrs., or Dr. should be
                      omitted. Honorifics, such as M.D., REV., JR., or III,
                      may be entered (without punctuation) after the FIRSTNAME
                      or REST and must be separated by a space (e.g.,
                      JOHNSON,PETER H JR).

                      The system then begins a search of the Master Patient
                      Index to identify the patient (see Appendix B for a
                      detailed description of this process).

                      Previously Entered Patient

                      When you identify a patient by number, or locate the
                      patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays his
                      or her primary unit number (if one has been assigned),
                      all previously entered MPI data and a list of all
                      other numbers assigned to this patient.

                      If this patient has been flagged for as a confidential
                      patient in the Admissions application, a message,
                      **CONFIDENTIAL**, appears in the upper right of this
                      screen. When a specific visit has been flagged as a
                      confidential visit, a "Y" appears in the CON
                      column (on the bottom half of this screen).

                      If the patient does not have a unit number, the name of
                      the patient will appear; otherwise, the unit number will
                      appear.

                      The Functionality of the Field

                      If the patient's record has neither any sealed visits,
                      nor is the record as a whole sealed, then an error
                      message of "There is no sealed/unsealed activity for
                      this patient." will appear.

                      If the patient's record has either sealed visits, or the
                      record as a whole is sealed, then the data for the
Unseal Patient EMR (8.5)                                                 Page 177



                      record (as a whole) and the visits for that record will
                      display much as it does in the Enter/Edit Patient
                      routine, with some additional fields:

                      - Record Sealed (this is for the record as a whole)

                      - Sealed (this is for the individual visits)

                      - Unseal Visit # (to either unseal a specific visit
                        or to unseal ALL visits)

                      - Users Who Can Access this Patient's ______ in EMR
                        (the entry in the field is either RECORD, if the
                        whole record/record's visits is to be unsealed, where
                        the entry at the Unseal Visit # field would have
                        been ALL; or the entry in the field is VISIT,
                        where the entry at the Unseal Visit # field would
                        have been a specific visit's line number)

                           This last field comes with an accompanying multiple
                           which lists the users associated with a specific visit.
                           Users will only appear in the multiple when a visit
                           number with appropriate users is entered at the
                           Unseal Visit # field.




UNSEAL VISIT #        Enter the number of the specific visit that is to
                      be unsealed, or ALL if the whole record is to be
                      unsealed.

                      If ALL is used, the text of "Filing will UNSEAL this
                      Patient's Record" will appear to the right of the
                      display field for a specific visit's account number
                      (which would, in this case, be blank). Use of this will
                      cause all visits with a status of SEALED to be
                      changed to UNSEALED.

                      (NOTE: Visits whose status was nil, neither SEALED
                      nor UNSEALED, will remain nil and will not be
                      changed to UNSEALED.)

                      Once the user enters ALL, the following prompt will
                      appear at the bottom of the screen:

                                 UNSEAL Patient RECORD in EMR?

                      If a specific visit is sealed, entering the line
Unseal Patient EMR (8.5)                                              Page 178



                      number containing the specific visit's account number
                      will cause the account number to appear next to it;
                      also, the text of "Patient Visit is currently SEALED"
                      will display to the right of the account number. The
                      users associated with the visit when it was sealed (in
                      the Users Who May Access this Patient's ______ in EMR
                      field multiple) will display at the bottom of the
                      screen. (NOTE: this will not occur if ALL was
                      entered in the Unseal Visit # field.)

                      Once the user enters a specific visit number, the
                      following prompt will appear at the bottom of the
                      screen:

                             UNSEAL Patient VISIT in EMR?

                      If a line number associated with a specific visit is
                      entered, but that visit is not sealed, an error message
                      of "This visit is not sealed." will appear.
List Sealed/Unsealed EMRs (8.6)                                          Page 179



8.6:   List Sealed/Unsealed EMRs


This routine provides lists of records with sealed/unsealed activity.

Within the routine, users can define their records of interest through
the utilization of its fields: List EMR Sealed/Unsealed Visits? and
Record.

Using the fields, you restrict the records that will be included by whether
their status is Sealed, Unsealed or both (Sealed and Unsealed) and the
specific record (or ALL records), if it satisfies the criteria established
in the List EMR Sealed/Unsealed Visits? field for having EMR activity.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                      List Sealed & Unsealed Record EMRs                       |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|List EMR Sealed/Unsealed Visits?                                               |
|                                                                               |
|Record                                                                         |
|                                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


LIST EMR SEALED/UNSEALED VISITS?

                       At this field you specify which patient records that
                       have had sealed/unsealed activity are to display on
                       the report's output. The choices are SEALED,
                       UNSEALED or BOTH.

                       The default value for this field is BOTH.

                       This is a required field.


RECORD                 This field is to be used to define the record(s)
                       whose sealed/unsealed activity is to be included on the
                       output.

                       A record must be included in this field.

                                                   or

                       There is an option to include all patient records with
                       sealed/unsealed activity; this is done through the use
                       of the word ALL. The default value for this field is
                       ALL. This is a required field.
List Sealed/Unsealed EMR Audit Detail (8.7)                             Page 180



8.7:   List Sealed/Unsealed EMR Audit Detail


This routine provides audit detail for records that have been sealed/unsealed.

Within the routine, users can define their record(s) of interest through use of
the field Record; either a single record may be defined, or the user may
utilize the ALL function (which will list all records with SEALED or
UNSEALED activity).

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                List Sealed & Unsealed Record EMR Audit Detail                 |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Record                                                                         |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|From Date                                                                      |
|Thru Date                                                                      |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Record                 This routine is to be used to define the record(s)
                       whose sealed/unsealed audit data activity is to be
                       included on the output.

                       A record must be included in this field.

                                                   or

                       There is an option to include all patient records with
                       sealed/unsealed activity; this is done through the use
                       of the word ALL.

                       The default value for this field is ALL.

                       The following information is provided for each record:

                           -   Activity (SEALED or UNSEALED)
                           -   Date (the activity's date)
                           -   Time (the activity's time)
                           -   User (the user who performed the activity)
                           -   Device (the device the activity was performed on)
                           -   Visits (all of the visit numbers that had
                               the activity listed in the ACTIVITY field)

                       This is a required field.
List Sealed/Unsealed EMR Audit Detail (8.7)                              Page 181



FROM DATE
                      Enter the beginning date for the record(s) whose
                      sealed/unsealed audit data activity is to be
                      included on the output.


THRU DATE
                        Enter the ending date for the record(s) whose
                        sealed/unsealed audit data activity is to be
                        included on the output.
Enter/Edit Forms Manually (8.8)                                        Page 182



8.8:   Enter/Edit Forms Manually


 The MRI FORMS Routines provide users with a direct link between the Incomplete
 Chart Function in the Medical Records module and the Departmental reports in
 the Order Entry module.

 The benefit to users is that they will save time in the processing of
 incomplete records/reasons/deficiencies since it will not be necessary for a
 clerk to manually update dictated reports in the incomplete chart function.
 The accuracy would be better through automation and the lag time between
 actual and entered would be eliminated.

 The Enter/Edit Forms Manually routine allows patients to be identified first
 by unit number, then by account number. Once a FORM MNEMONIC is chosen, at
 the FORM # prompt you can choose an existing form that this patient has stored
 (a Lookup is available), or you can type "N" (for "N"ext) to create a new
 instance for this form mnemonic. Users may enter a description if they wish;
 it is not a required field. Multiple doctors may be entered/edited, as well
 as corresponding form statuses. If a particular status is linked to an
 incomplete reason, it will display next to the status. Edits to the form
 status for each doctor will auto-update incomplete records in the same way as
 the MRI background job. If a doctor is deleted from the form, this will cause
 all reasons that were auto-generated by this form to be removed from the
 incomplete record for this doctor.

 At the FORM # prompt you can also enter "T"emporary to create a temporary
 form. When "T" is chosen, a screen fragment will pop up asking for the
 Temporary Form Database. Enter the database for which the temporary form is
 intended. When the background job processes form data in that database, if it
 comes upon a form number that has not yet been filed in MRI, it first checks
 to see if there is a possible match with a temporary form number. A match
 occurs when the Temporary Form Database is the same, and one of the doctors on
 the temporary form is the same. If a match is found, the temp form number is
 replaced by the form number generated by the actual application.

 The purpose of the temporary form feature is to allow reasons to be generated
 for a form that may not have been generated in the actual application yet.

 NOTE: If, at the FORM # prompt, a user enters anything other than "N" or
 "T", then <Enter>, the Lookup will appear. This includes entering any
 existing forms urns.

 The PROCESS A FORM MANUALLY Routine appears as follows:
Enter/Edit Forms Manually (8.8)                                        Page 183

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                  Process a Form Manually                                   |
|============================================================================================|
|Record                                                                                      |
|                                                                                            |
|Account Number                                                                              |
|                                                                                            |
|Form Mnemonic                                                                               |
|                                                                                            |
|Form #                                                                                      |
|                                                                                            |
|Description                                                                                 |
|                                                                                            |
|Physician                                  Status                          ICR              |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


 RECORD                 To identify the record, enter one of the following:

                           *   The patient's primary unit number.

                           *   The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
                               prefaced by an E#.

                           *   The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                           *   The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                           *   The patient's home telephone number, prefaced
                               by T# .

                           *   The patient's social security number, prefaced
                               by a pound sign (#).

                               If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                               number within your facility, it replaces the
                               social security number.

                               If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                               unit number, the system erases the social
                               security number, leaving this field blank.

                           *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                               in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                               The system then begins a search of the Master
                               Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                               Appendix B details this process).
Enter/Edit Forms Manually (8.8)                                           Page 184




                             *    An other number (i.e., a unit number
                                  assigned by another facility or a number
                                  assigned by a department, service, etc.).

                                  As when you enter the social security number,
                                  the system replaces the other number with
                                  either the unit number or leaves this field
                                  blank (See above).


                     When you identify the record by number or locate the
                     patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays the
                     patient's primary unit number (if one has been assigned)
                     and name.


ACCOUNT NUMBER       Enter the account number associated with the record
                     portion you are processing. A Lookup of eligible
                     account numbers is available.

                     NOTE:       If Y is entered at the MAINTAIN UNIT #
                                 ACROSS FACILITIES prompt in your MRI
                                 parameters, you can only enter account numbers
                                 which have the prefix of the facility to which
                                 you are signed-on. If you attempt to enter an
                                 account number with a different prefix, the
                                 following message appears:

                                           Not a valid account #

                                 This restriction ensures that all Incomplete
                                 Record reports for each facility contain only
                                 information specific to that facility.


Choose a FORM MNEMONIC from the MEDICAL RECORDS FORMS Dictionary in MIS.

In Departmental, (OE module) each report will be associated with one of
these forms. In Medical Records, a link will be made between the forms and
the Incomplete Reasons.


At the FORM # prompt, choose an existing form that this patient has stored (a
Lookup is available), or you can type "N" to create a new instance for this
form mnemonic. You may enter a description if you wish; it is not a required
field.

A "T" may also be entered at the FORM # prompt to create a temporary form.
When "T" is chosen, a screen fragment will pop up asking for the Temporary
Enter/Edit Forms Manually (8.8)                                         Page 185



Form Database. Enter the database for which the temporary form is intended.
When the background job processes form data in that database, if it comes upon
a form # that has not yet been filed in MRI, it first checks to determine if
there is a possible match with a temporary form #. A match occurs when the
Temporary Form Database is the same, and one of the doctors on the temporary
form is the same. If a match is found, the temp form # is replaced by the
form # generated by the actual application.

The purpose of the temporary form feature is to allow reasons to be generated
for a form that may not have been generated in the actual application as yet.


Enter a description of the form if you wish.   This is not a required field.


Enter a doctor mnemonic as defined in the MIS PROVIDER Dictionary.   A multiple
of physicians may be entered in this field.


STATUS
                        Enter any of the STATUSES that are associated with
                        this form in the MIS MEDICAL RECORDS FORMS
                        dictionary. These statuses are referenced by MRI in
                        determining when the report is flagged as an Incomplete
                        medical record or when it is considered complete.

                        If an Incomplete Reason is associated with this status
                        (as entered in the Enter/Edit Reasons dictionary) then
                        the corresponding ICR reason will default in to the ICR
                        field.
Delete Forms (8.9)                                                     Page 186



8.9:   Delete Forms


Forms are identified in the same way as the Enter/Edit Forms Manually routine,
except that only existing forms may be specified. All form data is deleted,
and all reasons auto-generated by this form are removed from the incomplete
record, for ALL doctors on the form.

The screen for the DELETE FORMS Routine appears as follows:

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                       Delete a Form                                        |
|============================================================================================|
|Record                                                                                      |
|                                                                                            |
|Account Number                                                                              |
|                                                                                            |
|Form Mnemonic                                                                               |
|                                                                                            |
|Form #                                                                                      |
|                                                                                            |
|Description                                                                                 |
|                                                                                            |
|Physician                                  Status                          ICR              |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+



RECORD                To identify the record, enter one of the following:

                           *   The patient's primary unit number.

                           *   The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
                               prefaced by an E#.

                           *   The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                           *   The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                           *   The patient's home telephone number, prefaced
                                by T# .

                           *   The patient's social security number, prefaced
                               by a pound sign (#).

                               If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
Delete Forms (8.9)                                                       Page 187



                                 number within your facility, it replaces the
                                 social security number.

                                 If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                                 unit number, the system erases the social
                                 security number, leaving this field blank.

                             *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                                 in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                                 The system then begins a search of the Master
                                 Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                                 Appendix B details this process).

                             *   An other number (i.e., a unit number
                                 assigned by another facility or a number
                                 assigned by a department, service, etc.).

                                 As when you enter the social security number,
                                 the system replaces the other number with
                                 either the unit number or leaves this field
                                 blank (See above).

                     When you identify the record by number or locate the
                     patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays the
                     patient's primary unit number (if one has been assigned)
                     and name.



ACCOUNT NUMBER       Enter the account number associated with the record
                     portion you are processing. A Lookup of eligible
                     account numbers is available.

                     NOTE:   If Y is entered at the MAINTAIN UNIT #
                             ACROSS FACILITIES prompt in your MRI
                             parameters, you can only enter account numbers
                             which have the prefix of the facility to which
                             you are signed-on. If you attempt to enter an
                             account number with a different prefix, the
                             following message appears:

                                        Not a valid account #

                             This restriction ensures that all Incomplete
                             Record reports for each facility contain only
                             information specific to that facility.
Delete Forms (8.9)                                                       Page 188



FORM MNEMONIC

                     Choose a FORM MNEMONIC from the MEDICAL RECORDS FORMS
                     Dictionary in MIS.

                     In Departmental, (OE module) each report will be associated
                     with one of these forms. In Medical Records, a link will be
                     made between the forms and the Incomplete Reasons.



FORM #

                     At the FORM # prompt, choose an existing form that this
                     patient has stored (a lookup is available) that you want to
                     delete. All form data is deleted, and all reasons
                     auto-generated by this form are removed from the incomplete
                     record, for ALL doctors on the form.
Audit Trail Inquiry (8.10)                                                Page 189



8.10:   Audit Trail Inquiry


 The AUDIT TRAIL INQUIRY Report will include the edit history of all forms;
 including the user, date, type of edit, any incomplete reasons that were
 either generated or resolved, status, doctor, form #, form, source database,
 and description. The user will be required to identify the patient name and
 account number.

 The FORM AUDIT INQUIRY input screen appears as follows:

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                              Form Audit Inquiry                               |
|===============================================================================|
|Patient                                                                        |
|                                                                               |
|Account Number                                                                 |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PATIENT              To identify the patient whose Medical Record Form activity
                     you wish to track, enter one of the following:

                              *   The patient's primary unit number.

                              *   The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
                                  prefaced by an E#.

                              *   The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                              *   The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                              *   The patient's home telephone number, prefaced
                                  by T# .

                              *   The patient's social security number prefixed by
                                  a pound sign (#).

                              *   The patient's name, using up to 25 characters,
                                  in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                                  The system then begins a search of the Master
                                  Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                                  Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                                  process).

                              *   An other number (i.e., a department or
                                  service number with your facility's prefix).
Audit Trail Inquiry (8.10)                                            Page 190



                             If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                             number (i.e., a unit number with your facility's
                             prefix), it appears on the screen in place of
                             the other number.

                             If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                             unit number, the system erases the other
                             number, leaving this field blank.

                      When you identify a patient by number or locate the
                      patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays
                      his/her primary unit number (if one has been assigned)
                      and name.


ACCOUNT NUMBER
                      Choose the account number for which you would like
                      to track any Medical Record Form activity. Pressing
                      <Enter> or <Lookup> will cause a lookup window to
                      appear, displaying all accounts which have any
                      Medical Record Form activity. If a particular
                      account does not appear on the Lookup, it can be
                      assumed that no Medical Record Form activity has
                      occurred on that account.
Reporting Medical Records Information (9)                                Page 191



Chapter 9:    Reporting Medical Records Information


This section describes the various reports that help you monitor the activities
of the Medical Records Department. These reports provide a complete audit
trail that includes

     *   logs of unit number assignments, edits, merges, etc.

     *   a population count

     *   a duplicate patient list


The following routines are described in detail in this section:

    *    Print Unit Number Assignment Log     *   Merge/Unmerge Log

    *    Monthly Assignments by Name          *   Edit Transaction Log

    *    Monthly Assignments by Number        *   Population Count

    *    Fast Input Log                       *   Compile Duplicate Patients List

    *    Delete/Restore Log                   *   Print Duplicate Patients List
Logs routine menu (10)                                                 Page 192



Chapter 10:   Logs routine menu


The Log Routines Menu includes the following functions:

Monthly Assignments By Name

Use this routine to print the Monthly Unit Number Assignments by Name report.
This report lists the names, in alphabetical order, of the patients entered
into the Master Patient Index (MPI) during a user-specified month (including
those patients entered via the Fast Input routine).

Monthly Assignments By Number

Use this routine to print the Monthly Assignments by Unit Number report. This
report contains a list of the unit numbers, in ascending numerical order, of
the patients who were entered into the Master Patient Index (MPI) during a
user-specified month (including those patients entered via the Fast Input
routine).

Delete/Restore Log

Use this routine to print the Delete/Restore Log report. This report lists all
patients with a unit number or other number who were deleted from the MPI
and/or restored to the MPI via the Delete/Restore Patient routine during a
user-specified time period.

Merge/Unmerge Log

Use this routine to print the Merge/Unmerge Log report. This report lists all
patients whose medical records have been merged and/or unmerged (via the Merge
Patients or Unmerge Patients routines) during a user-specified time period.

Edit Transaction Log

Use this routine to print the Edit Transaction Log report. This report contains
a list of specific changes that were made to patient data via the Enter/Edit
Patient routine and/or the Edit Unit Number routine during a user-specified
time period. The Edit Transaction Log indicates which user edited the visit
history originally entered via the Enter/Edit Patient routine in MRI.

Edit Transaction Log By Patient

Use this routine to print the Edit Transaction Log by Patient report. This
report contains a list of specific changes that were made to patient data via
the Enter/Edit Patient routine and/or the Edit Unit Number routine during a
user-specified time period. The Edit Transaction Log by Patient indicates
which user edited the visit history originally entered via the Enter/Edit
Patient routine in MRI.

Fast Input Log
Logs routine menu (10)                                                Page 193



Use this routine to print the Fast Input Log report. The report lists the unit
numbers and key Master Patient Index data of the patients who were entered
through the Fast Input routine during the user-defined date range. The list is
sorted by user (the person who entered the patient data). You can run the
report for all users, a group of users, or a single user.


+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                             MRI Log Routines Menu [ ]                         |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                                                               |
|41. Monthly Assignments By Name                                                |
|42. Monthly Assignments By Number                                              |
|43. Delete/Restore Log                                                         |
|44. Merge/Unmerge Log                                                          |
|45. Edit Transaction Log                                                       |
|46. Edit Transaction Log By Patient                                            |
|47. Fast Input Log                                                             |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Print Unit Number Assignment Log (10.1)                                  Page 194



10.1:   Print Unit Number Assignment Log


Use this routine to list the Unit Number Assignment Log report. This log
contains a list of all patient numbers (unit numbers or other numbers) for
a user-specified prefix that were assigned during a user-specified time period.

The list includes, for each unit number assigned:

                          *   the date the unit number was assigned

                          *   the actual unit number that was assigned

                          *   the patient's name

                          *   his/her birthdate

                          *   his/her sex

                          *   his/her mother's name

                          *   the user (in the format of: the mnemonic of the
                              application where the patient came from; followed
                              by a "/"; followed by the mnemonic (from the MIS
                              User Dictionary) which identifies the user who
                              firstentered the patient's data)

                          *   the time that the number was assigned

                          *   notes (see below)

If the current number is not the same as the UNIT # ASSIGNED at the time the
patient was entered into the system, the current number appears under the
heading NOTES.

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                          Unit Number Assignment Log                           |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|For Prefix:                                                                    |
|                                                                               |
|From Date:                                                                     |
|Thru Date:                                                                     |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Print Unit Number Assignment Log (10.1)                                 Page 195



FOR PREFIX            The primary unit number prefix used by your facility
                      appears. To print the Unit Number Assignment Log for
                      patients who have unit numbers with this prefix, press
                      the <Enter> key.

                      To print the log for patients who have other
                      numbers, delete the default prefix and enter the
                      appropriate prefix. (Note that you may only enter
                      prefixes used by your facility.)


FROM DATE             Enter the date on which you want the system to begin
                      its search for newly assigned numbers. Use the standard
                      date format or a T combination (e.g., T-1 for
                      yesterday).


THRU DATE             Enter the date through which you want the system to
                      locate newly assigned numbers. Use the standard date
                      format or a T combination (e.g., T-1 for
                      yesterday).

                      The routine's output lists all numbers with the
                      specified prefix which were assigned during the
                      specified period.

                      To find numbers assigned on one single date, enter that
                      date at both the FROM DATE and THRU DATE fields.
Monthly Assignments by Name (10.2)                                        Page 196



10.2:   Monthly Assignments by Name


Use this routine to print the Monthly Unit Number Assignments by Name report.
This report lists the names, in alphabetical order, of the patients entered
into the Master Patient Index (MPI) during a user-specified month (including
those patients entered via the Fast Input routine). You can list only those
patients assigned numbers with a specific prefix, or you can choose to include
patients without a unit number or other number. Users can print Monthly
Unit Number Assignment Logs for periods greater than one month at a time.

For each patient listed, the report provides the following information:

    *   patient name                      *   mother's name

    *   unit number (if assigned)         *   user (the mnemonic, from the MIS
                                              User dictionary, which identifies
    *   birthdate                             the person who entered the data)

    *   sex                               *   EPI #

An Enterprise Patient Identifer (EPI Field) has been created which can be used
to identify a patient across all facilities of the enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                    Monthly Unit Number Assignments By Name                    |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|For Prefix:                                                                    |
|                                                                               |
|Beginning Date:                                                                |
|                                                                               |
|Ending Date:                                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|Include Patients With No Unit Numbers:                                         |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FOR PREFIX             The primary unit number prefix used by your facility
                       appears. Press <Enter> to print the log for patients
                       who have unit numbers with this prefix.

                       To print the log for patients who have other
                       numbers, delete the default prefix and enter the
                       desired prefix. (Note that you may only enter
                       prefixes used by your facility.)
Monthly Assignments by Name (10.2)                                     Page 197



BEGINNING DATE
(MM/DD/YY)
                 Enter the appropriate month, day and year in the format
                 indicated. The system finds patients entered into
                 the MPI during that month.




 ENDING DATE
 (MM/DD/YY)
                    Enter the appropriate month, day and year in the format
                    indicated. The system finds patients entered into
                    the MPI during that month.




INCLUDE PATIENTS       Enter Y if you wish the list to include patients
WITH NO UNIT NUMBERS   who have no assigned unit number or other
                       number.

                       Enter N if you wish the list to contain only those
                       patients with assigned numbers.
Monthly Assignments by Number (10.3)                                   Page 198



10.3:   Monthly Assignments by Number



Use this routine to print the Monthly Assignments by Unit Number report. This
report contains a list of the unit numbers, in ascending numerical order, of
the patients who were entered into the Master Patient Index (MPI) during a
user-specified month (including those patients entered via the Fast Input
routine). You can list only those patients assigned numbers with a specific
prefix, or you can choose to include patients without a unit number or
other number.

For each patient listed, the report provides the following information:

    *   patient name                      *   mother's name

    *   unit number (if assigned)         *   user (the mnemonic from the MIS
                                              User dictionary, which identifies
    *   birthdate                             the person who entered the data)

    *   sex                               *   EPI #

Users can print Monthly Unit Number Assignment Logs for periods greater than
one month at a time. Healthcare organizations can use monthly assignment logs
to supplement the microfiche report, especially during downtime.

An Enterprise Patient Identifer (EPI Field) has been created which can be used
to identify a patient across all facilities of the enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                Monthly Unit Number Assignments By Unit Number                 |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|For Prefix:                                                                    |
|                                                                               |
|Beginning Date:                                                                |
|                                                                               |
|Ending Date:                                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|Include Patients With No Unit Numbers:                                         |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FOR PREFIX             The primary unit number prefix used by your facility
                       appears. To print the log for patients who have unit
                       numbers with this prefix, press <Enter>.
Monthly Assignments by Number (10.3)                                      Page 199



                       To print the log for patients who have other
                       numbers, delete the default prefix and enter the
                       desired prefix. (Note that you may only enter
                       prefixes used by your facility.)


BEGINNING DATE
(MM/DD/YY)
                        Enter the appropriate month, day and year in the format
                        indicated. The system finds patients entered into the
                        MPI during that month.


 ENDING DATE
 (MM/DD/YY)
                         Enter the appropriate month, day and year in the
                         format indicated. The system finds patients entered
                         into the MPI during that month.


INCLUDE PATIENTS       To include all patients, with and without assigned
WITH NO UNIT NUMBERS   numbers on the list, enter Y.

                       To include only those patients with assigned numbers on
                       the list, enter N.
Fast Input Log (10.4)                                                           Page 200



10.4:   Fast Input Log


Use this routine to print the Fast Input Log report. The report lists the unit
numbers and key Master Patient Index data of the patients who were entered
through the Fast Input routine during the user-defined date range. The list is
sorted by user (the person who entered the patient data). You can run the
report for all users, a group of users, or a single user.

The data which appears on this report per patient includes:

            *   the date the patient was entered          *    mother's name

            *   unit number                               *    admit/service date

            *   patient name                              *    patient type

            *   birthdate                                  *   discharge date

                                   *   discharge disposition

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                Fast Input Log                                 |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|For Prefix:                                                                    |
|                                                                               |
|From Date:                                                                     |
|Thru Date:                                                                     |
|                                                                               |
|From User:                                                                     |
|Thru User:                                                                     |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FOR PREFIX                  The primary unit number prefix used by your facility
                            appears. To print the log for patients who have unit
                            numbers with this prefix, press <Enter>.


FROM DATE                   Enter the date on which you want the system to begin
                            its search for patients entered using the Fast Input
                            Routine. Use the standard date format or a T
                            combination (e.g., T-1 for yesterday).
Fast Input Log (10.4)                                                   Page 201



THRU DATE               Enter the date through which you want the system to
                        search for patients entered using the Fast Input
                        Routine. Use the standard date format or a T
                        combination (e.g., T-1 for yesterday).

                        To list patients entered on one single date, enter that
                        date after both the FROM DATE and THRU DATE
                        prompts.


FROM USER               BEGINNING appears. To print the log starting
                        with the first user in the MIS User Dictionary, press
                        <Enter>. Users are listed in alphabetical order by
                        user initials. To start the log with another user,
                        delete BEGINNING and enter that user's initials.


THRU USER               END appears. To print the log through the last
                        user in the MIS User Dictionary, press <Enter>. To end
                        the log with a different user, delete END and enter that
                        user's initials.

                        To list patients entered by a single user, enter that
                        user's initials after both the FROM USER and THRU
                        USER prompts.
Delete/Restore Log (10.5)                                                 Page 202



10.5:   Delete/Restore Log


Use this routine to print the Delete/Restore Log report. This report lists all
patients with a unit number or other number who were deleted from the MPI
and/or restored to the MPI via the Delete/Restore Patient routine during a
user-specified time period.

For each patient listed, the report provides the following information:

    *   date (on which the patient          *   sex
        was deleted or restored)
                                            *   mother's name
    *   time (of this action)
                                            *   user (the mnemonic, from the MIS
    *   unit number                             User Dictionary, identifying the
                                                user who deleted or restored the
    *   patient name                            patient)

    *   birthdate                           *   action (delete or restore)

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                              Delete/Restore Log                               |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|For Prefix:                                                                    |
|                                                                               |
|From Date:                                                                     |
|Thru Date:                                                                     |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FOR PREFIX             The primary unit number prefix used by your facility
                       appears. Press <Enter> to print the log for patients
                       who have unit numbers with this prefix.

                       To print the log for patients who have other
                       numbers, delete the default prefix and enter the
                       desired prefix. (Note that you may only enter
                       prefixes used by your facility.)


FROM DATE              Enter the date on which you want the system to begin
                       its search for patients deleted or restored via the
Delete/Restore Log (10.5)                                             Page 203



                      Delete/Restore Patient Routine. Use the standard
                      date format or a T combination (e.g., T-1 for
                      yesterday).


THRU DATE             Enter the date through which you want the system to
                      search for patients who were deleted or restored via the
                      Delete/Restore Patients Routine. Use the standard date
                      format or a T combination (e.g., T-1 for
                      yesterday).

                      The report lists all patients who were deleted from the
                      MPI and/or restored to the MPI during the specfied time
                      period.

                      To find patients deleted and/or restored on one single
                      date, enter that date after both the FROM DATE and
                      THRU DATE prompts.
Merge/Unmerge Log (10.6)                                                Page 204



10.6:   Merge/Unmerge Log


Use this routine to print the Merge/Unmerge Log report. This report lists all
patients whose medical records have been merged and/or unmerged (via the Merge
Patients or Unmerge Patients routines) during a user-specified time period.

For each patient listed, the report provides the following information:

    *   date (of the merge/unmerge)    *   mother's name for both patients

    *   unit numbers of both           *   the mnemonic of the user (from the
        patients (if assigned)             MIS User Dictionary) who assigned the
                                           primary unit number

    *   names of the patients          *   the time of the merge or unmerge
        before the merge

    *   birthdates of both patients    *   the mnemonic of the user (from the
                                           MIS User Dictionary) who performed
    *   sex of both patients               the merge/unmerge

NOTE: If, when the merge was performed, the user responded "Y"es at any of the
Use Removed Pt Data? fields (there is one each for the Name, Birthdate, Sex,
Maiden/Other Name, Mother's Name, Expired Date, Social Security Number and Demo
Recall Address, etc.), the information for each line on the report will be the
same until/unless an unmerge is done.

If the unit number was assigned via an application other than the Medical
Records Module (e.g., Admissions), the mnemonic (e.g., ADM) precedes the
mnemonic of the user who assigned the unit number.

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

Assume, for example, that user TRAY creates a record via the Admissions
application for patient Barbra Sirote. You discover later that a record
already exists for Miss Sirote, and merge these records via the Merge Patient
routine. In this case, you REMOVE the new record created by TRAY and SAVE the
old record. (For more information, see that routine.)

When you print the Merge/Unmerge Log's report, ADM/TRAY appears on the report
(under the heading ASSIGNED BY) on the line associated with the MERGE
record (i.e., the one removed in the merge).

Multifacility systems

Note that this log is facility-specific. Assume, for example, that you
have two facilities, Facility A and Facility B, sharing a single database.
Merge/Unmerge Log (10.6)                                               Page 205



   *   If you sign on to Facility A and use this routine, it includes only
       records merged/unmerged by users signed-on to Facility A.

       In addition, the report lists only the Facility A unit number(s) of the
       merged/unmerged records (i.e., number with Facility A's prefix) and the
       user who assigned the primary unit number. If one of the records
       merged/unmerged was created via Facility B, and has only a Facility B
       unit number, no unit number appears in the UNIT # field on the log,
       and no mnemonic appears in the ASSIGNED BY field.

   *   If you sign on to Facility B and use this routine, the report includes
       only the above information for records merged/unmerged by users signed
       on to Facility B.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                               Merge/Unmerge Log                               |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|For Prefix:                                                                    |
|                                                                               |
|From Date:                                                                     |
|Thru Date:                                                                     |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


For Prefix             The primary unit number prefix used by your facility
                       appears. To print the log for patients who have unit
                       numbers with this prefix, press <Enter>.

                       To print the log for patients who have other
                       numbers, delete the default prefix and enter the
                       desired prefix. (Note that you may only enter
                       prefixes used by your facility.)


From Date              Enter the date on which you want the system to begin
                       its search for patients whose records have been merged
                       or unmerged. Use the standard date format or a T
                       combination (e.g., T-1 for yesterday).


Thru Date              Enter the date through which you want the system to
                       search for patients whose records have been merged or
                       unmerged. Use the standard date format or a T
                       combination (e.g., T-1 for yesterday).

                       The report lists all patients whose records were merged
                       or unmerged during the specified time period. To find
                       patients merged and/or unmerged on a single date, enter
                       that date at both prompts.
Edit Transaction Log (10.7)                                                 Page 206



10.7:    Edit Transaction Log


Use this routine to print the Edit Transaction Log report. This report contains
a list of specific changes that were made to patient data via the Enter/Edit
Patient routine and/or the Edit Unit Number routine during a user-specified
time period. The Edit Transaction Log indicates which user edited the visit
history originally entered via the Enter/Edit Patient routine in MRI.

The log lists the edits to the following information unless data had not
existed for the field prior to the most recent edit:

     *   unit number                      *       birthdate

     *   name                             *       maiden/other name

     *   sex                              *       mother's name

The Edit Transaction Log shows edits made to a patient's AGE for those records
with missing birthdates. If you add/edit a birthdate to a record that includes
the patient's age, the edit appears as a BIRTHDATE edit on the log.

First, specify a prefix to define the group of records in which you are
interested (e.g., those with a primary unit number, those with a laboratory
number, etc.). Next, define the time frame in which the edits took place.

The report lists the following information (for the records associated with the
specified prefix) in chronological order (based on the date on which the edit
was made):

    *    date (of the edit)                *       user (the mnemonic, from the
                                                   MIS User Dictionary, which
    *    number (if assigned)                      identifies the person who made
                                                   the edit)
    *    patient name
                                              *    item (the category of the
    *    birthdate                                 edited data, e.g., BIRTHDATE)

    *    sex                               *       old value/new value (the original
                                                   value and the updated value)

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

NOTE: if a patient did not have a unit number or other number, an edit to
his/her MPI data is listed when you print the log for your facility's primary
unit number prefix.
Edit Transaction Log (10.7)                                              Page 207

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                             Edit Transaction Log                              |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|For Prefix:                                                                    |
|                                                                               |
|From Date:                                                                     |
|Thru Date:                                                                     |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FOR PREFIX            The primary unit number prefix used by your facility
                      appears. To print the log for patients who have unit
                      numbers with this prefix and for patients without a unit
                      number or other number, press <Enter>.

                      To print the log for patients who have other
                      numbers, delete the default prefix and enter the
                      desired prefix. (Note that you may only enter
                      prefixes used by your facility.)


FROM DATE             Enter the date on which you want the system to begin
                      its search for patients whose records have been edited.
                      Use the standard date format or a T combination
                      (e.g., T-1 for yesterday).


THRU DATE             Enter the date through which you want the system to
                      search for patients whose records have been edited.    Use
                      the standard date format or a T combination (e.g.,
                      T-1 for yesterday).

                      The report lists all patients whose records were edited
                      during the specified time period.

                      To find all patients whose records were edited on one
                      single date, enter that date after both the FROM DATE
                      and THRU DATE prompts.
Edit Transaction Log By Patient (10.8)                                       Page 208



10.8:    Edit Transaction Log By Patient


Use this routine to print the Edit Transaction Log by Patient report. This
report contains a list of specific changes that were made to patient data via
the Enter/Edit Patient routine and/or the Edit Unit Number routine during a
user-specified time period. The Edit Transaction Log by Patient indicates
which user edited the visit history originally entered via the Enter/Edit
Patient routine in MRI.

The log lists the edits to the following information unless data had not
existed for the field prior to the most recent edit:

     *   unit number                       *       birthdate

     *   name                              *       maiden/other name

     *   sex                               *       mother's name

The Edit Transaction Log by Patient shows edits made to a patient's AGE for
those records with missing birthdates. If you add/edit a birthdate to a record
that includes the patient's age, the edit appears as a BIRTHDATE edit on the
log.

First, specify a prefix to define the group of records in which you are
interested (e.g., those with a primary unit number, those with a laboratory
number, etc.). Next, enter the patient. Lastly, define the time frame in
which the edits took place.

The report lists the following information (for the record associated with the
specified prefix) in chronological order (based on the date on which the edit
was made):

    *    date (of the edit)                 *       user (the mnemonic, from the
                                                    MIS User Dictionary, which
    *    number (if assigned)                       identifies the person who made
                                                    the edit)
    *    patient name
                                               *    item (the category of the
    *    birthdate                                  edited data, e.g., BIRTHDATE)

    *    sex                                *       old value/new value (the original
                                                    value and the updated value)

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

NOTE: if a patient did not have a unit number or other number, an edit to
his/her MPI data is listed when you print the log for your facility's primary
unit number prefix.
Edit Transaction Log By Patient (10.8)                                   Page 209




+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                        Edit Transaction Log By Patient                        |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|For Prefix:                                                                    |
|                                                                               |
|Patient:                                                                       |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|From Date:                                                                     |
|Thru Date:                                                                     |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FOR PREFIX            The primary unit number prefix used by your facility
                      appears. To print the log for a patient who has an unit
                      number with this prefix and for a patient without a unit
                      number or other number, press <Enter>.

                      To print the log for a patient who has an other
                      numbers, delete the default prefix and enter the
                      desired prefix. (Note that you may only enter
                      prefixes used by your facility.)


PATIENT               To identify the patient whose edit trail you want
                      to print, enter one of the following (the screen will
                      scroll to accommodate as many patients as you wish to
                      enter):

                           *   The patient's primary unit number.

                           *   The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
                                prefaced by an E#.

                           *   The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                           *   The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                           *   The patient's home telephone number, prefaced
                               by T# .

                           *   The patient's social security number, prefaced
                               by a pound sign (#).

                               If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                               number within your facility, it replaces the
                               social security number.
Edit Transaction Log By Patient (10.8)                                 Page 210



                               If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                               unit number, the system erases the social
                               security number and leaves this field blank.

                           *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                               in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                               The system then begins a search of the Master
                               Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                               Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                               process). If the search fails to locate the
                               patient, delete the patient name and identify
                               another patient to continue.

                           *   An other number (i.e., a unit number
                               assigned by another facility or a number
                               assigned by a department, service, etc.).

                               As when you enter the social security number,
                               the system replaces the other number with
                               either the unit number or leaves the field blank
                               (See above).


From Date             Enter the date on which you want the system to begin
                      its search for edit activity. Use the standard date
                      format or a T combination (e.g., T-1 for
                      yesterday).


Thru Date             Enter the date through which you want the system to
                      search for edit activity. Use the standard date format
                      or a T combination (e.g., T-1 for yesterday).
Other Routines Menu (11)                                                Page 211



Chapter 11:   Other Routines Menu


This menu contains routines which enable you to perform certain fuctions which
help in the managment of the Medical Records Module.

This introduction summarizes the function of these routines according to task
and will guide you in the selection of the appropriate routine for your needs:

    To Accomplish This Task                          Use This Routine


       * To calculate, and display,                  Population Count Routine
         total numbers of medical records
         in the Master Patient Index (MPI)

       * To view the next number to be              Next Unit Number To Be
         assigned by the system                     Assigned Routine

       * To reserve a series of numbers             Increase Next Unit #
         that can be manually assigned to           Assignment Routine
         patients at any time

       * To print Available Unit                    List Available Unit
         Numbers                                    Numbers Routine

       * To see how patient names are               Soundex A Name
         Soundexed                                  Routine

       * Allows qualified users to sign-on          Change User's Sign-On
         directly to another facility               Facility Routine
         which shares the same MRI database
         if your health care organization is
         Multifacility

       * To automatically assign or list new        Edit Unconverted Unit
         S numbers to all of the unconverted        Numbers Routine
         S numbers
                                                     List Unconverted Unit
                                                     Numbers Routine

       * View the system's "locks" (that            View Locks Routine
         prevent more than one user from
         accessing a patient's file at the
         same time)

       * To set   up OA messages that the           OA Message Dictionary
         system   broadcasts via the Magic Office   Routine
         Module   after a user edits or
         merges   unit numbers in MRI

       * Use this routine to attach a               Enter/Edit MRI CCI CDS
Other Routines Menu (11)                                               Page 212



          Critical Care Indicator customer-defined   Name Routine
          screen (CDS) for use within the Medical
          Records application

        * To view the next Enterprise Patient        Next EPI Number To Be
          Identifier number (EPI) to be assigned     Assigned Routine
          by the system

        * To Increase the Next EPI Number to         Increase Next EPI #
          be assigned                                Assignment

        * To print the Available EPI Numbers         List Available EPI Numbers
          numbers, within a user-specified range     Routine

        * To have a transaction to go to EMR to      Seal Patient EMR Routine
          Seal/Unseal either a whole record or a     Unseal Patient EMR Routine
          specific visit for a record.

        * To provide a list of records               List Sealed/Unsealed EMRs
          with sealed/unsealed activity              Routine

        * To provide audit detail for records        List Sealed/Unsealed EMR
          that have been sealed/unsealed.            Audit Detail




+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                             MRI Other Routines Menu [ ]                        |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                                                                |
|10. Population Count                                  --- EMR Routines ---      |
|11. Next Unit Number To Be Assigned               60. Seal Patient EMR          |
|12. Increase Next Unit # Assignment               61. Unseal Patient EMR        |
|13. List Available Unit Numbers                   62. List Sealed/Unsealed EMRs |
|14. Soundex A Name                                63. List Sealed/Unsealed EMR Audit Detail|
|15. Change User's Sign-On Facility                                              |
|16. Unconverted Unit Numbers                                                    |
|17. View Locks                                                                  |
|18. OA Message Dictionary                                                       |
|19. Enter/Edit MRI CCI CDS Name                                                 |
|20. Next EPI Number To Be Assigned                                              |
|21. Increase Next EPI # Assignment                                              |
|22. List Available EPI Numbers                                                  |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Population Count (11.1)                                                Page 213



11.1:   Population Count


This routine is used to calculate, and display, total numbers of medical
records in the Master Patient Index (MPI), grouped by number (both unit and
other numbers).

When you select this routine and enter Y at the COUNT PATIENTS? prompt,
the system calculates the total number of medical records in the MPI and
displays that number (TOTAL PATIENTS) on the screen. The population count
includes all patients, with and without assigned unit numbers or other
numbers.

The system displays the number of patients without numbers, then groups those
patients with numbers by prefix: the prefixes used by the facilities which
share this medical records database are listed on the screen, along with the
number of patients whose numbers have each prefix.

NOTE: One patient may have several numbers. Therefore, if you add all of the
numbers on this list, the total may differ from the TOTAL PATIENTS number
(i.e, the number of medical records).

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.
_______________________________________________________________________________

WARNING!

This routine may tie up your terminal for some time (depending on the number of
patients in the MPI) and cannot be easily halted once it is begun.
Therefore, you should only do a population count during a period of low system
use and at time when you will not need your terminal for other activities.
_______________________________________________________________________________
Population Count (11.1)                                               Page 214

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                               Population Count                                |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Count Patients?                                                                |
|                                                                               |
|--------------------------------------                                         |
|Total Patients:                                                                |
|                                                                               |
|Patients With No Unit Numbers:                                                 |
|                                                                               |
|Px Count                                                                       |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


COUNT PATIENTS?        To begin the population count, enter Y.

                      When the count is complete, the numbers appear on the
                      screen, and the cursor moves to the PX field. To
                      scroll through the numbers, press <Enter>.

                      If you do not want to begin the count at this time,
                      leave this field blank and press <Enter>. (Note that
                      this routine should only be performed during a period of
                      low system use.)
Compile Duplicate Patients List (11.2)                                    Page 215



11.2:    Compile Duplicate Patients List


Use this routine to initiate a search of the Master Patient Index (MPI) for
duplicate patient entries and to compile a list of patients with the same
Soundex last name and birthdate (plus or minus a user-specified number of
days).

When you select this routine, the following information for the most recent
compilation of duplicate patients appears:


    *    date and time                          *   number of records processed

    *    mnemonic of the user (as entered      *    status (RUNNING or COMPLETE)
         in the MIS User Dictionary) who
         initiated the most recent
         compilation


In addition, the date of the latest compilation appears. If you want to
compare records entered before this date (e.g., to re-check the results of
the last compilation), you can delete the default date and enter the desired
date. The system compares records created on/after the date specified.

NOTE: You can now use an exact match of the last name, first name, soundexed
first name, and the social security as selection criteria in the Compile
Duplicate List Routine to find duplicate patients. You can also print a new
report listing duplicate social security numbers.

You can also widen your search for duplicate patients by specifying a
birthdate range. For example, if you enter a range of plus or minus 30
days, the system considers each birthdate to include all dates 30 days before
and after the date that appears in the MPI. If two (or more) patients have the
same Soundexed last name and their birthdates fall within the range you
specify, the system identifies them as duplicates.

NOTE:    The compilation runs as a background job. The compilation's status
         (which appears here and on the Print Duplicate Patient List Routine
         screen) must be COMPLETE before you print the list of duplicates.



Editing Unit Numbers for Duplicate Patients

Use the Print Duplicate Patient List Routine to print the compiled list.      This
list can help you identify those patients who

     *    have been incorrectly assigned more than one number with the same
          prefix

     *    have more than one medical record
Compile Duplicate Patients List (11.2)                                     Page 216




To combine the information for the patient into one record, you can

     *   first dissociate a unit number from one record using the Edit Unit
         Number Routine, and then merge the two records using the Merge Patients
         Routine

         You can re-assign the edited number manually to another patient.

     *   merge the two records directly using the Merge Patients Routine

         The unit number of the removed patient remains unavailable for
         re-assignment.


To edit an incorrect number only, use the Edit Unit Number Routine.
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                         Compile Duplicate Patient Index                       |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Last Compilation Started On:                                                   |
|                   Started By:                                                 |
|                                                                               |
|Number Of Records Processed:                                                   |
|Possible Duplicates Found:                                                     |
|                                                                               |
|Status:                                                                        |
|                                                                               |
|Only Compare Records Created On/After Date                                     |
|Birthdate Range - Plus/Minus How Many Days                                     |
|                                                                               |
|Select Field   Select Criteria                                                 |
|------------   ---------------                                                 |
|                                                                               |
|   Last Name                                                                   |
| First Name                                                                    |
|        SS #     0                                                             |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


ONLY COMPARE RECORDS CREATED ON/AFTER DATE

                        The date of the most recent compilation appears here. To
                        compare patients entered into the MPI on or after this
                        date, press <Enter>.

                        To compare records created before this date, delete the
                        default date and enter the desired date using the
                        standard date format or a T combination (e.g.,
Compile Duplicate Patients List (11.2)                                       Page 217



                      T-1 for yesterday).


BIRTHDATE RANGE - PLUS/MINUS HOW MANY DAYS

                      30 appears.        To accept this birthdate range, press
                      <Enter>.

                      The system then recognizes a total of 61 possible
                      birthdates for a patient when it searches for duplicate
                      MPI entries. Patients only appear on the Duplicate
                      Patient List when all of the following criteria are
                      met:

                               *   They have the same Soundexed last name.

                               *   Their birthdate ranges overlap at some point
                                   (i.e., one of the possible 61 dates of one
                                   patient matches one of the 61 possible dates of
                                   another patient).

                               *   They were entered into the MPI on or after the
                                   date specified at the previous prompt.

                      To change the birthdate range, delete the default value
                      and enter the different number of days.


When you enter a birthdate range, the following prompt appears on the bottom
of the screen:

    Start a new compilation?

To start the compilation, enter Y; otherwise, enter N.


LAST NAME
                                      You can choose to either have a SOUNDEX
                                      match for the Last name or an EXACT match
                                      for the Last name.


FIRST NAME
                                     There are FOUR options at the FIRST NAME
                                     field allowing the search to be more selective
                                     when compiling:

                                     *   SOUNDEX match

                                     *   EXACT match
Compile Duplicate Patients List (11.2)                                 Page 218




                                 *   FIRST INITIAL match

                                 *   IGNORE


SS#

Two options exist for the SS# field: EXACT match and IGNORE. This field
will allow health care organizations to use this as one of the compile
critieria to only display people that have the same SS# and last soundex name,
for example. If the social security number selection is set to exact match,
then nil social security numbers will ONLY match to other nil social
security numbers. If two records have identical names and DOB but one has a
social security number and the other does not, then the two records will not be
selected as a possible match.

Ignoring the social security number will select two records which are missing
one social security number but it will also select two records which have
different social security numbers and are obviously different patients.

Two records with the same social security number are either the same
patient or one record has an incorrect social security number. To identify
these patients, use the report DUPLICATE SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER REPORT which
can be found on the MRI.patient.menu. The output format is identical to the
DUPLICATE PATIENT REPORT.
Print Duplicate Patients List (11.3)                                          Page 219



11.3:    Print Duplicate Patients List


Use this routine to print the Duplicate Patient Report. This is a list of
duplicate patients (those with the same last name and birthdate) compiled by
the Compile Duplicate Patients Routine. You can use this list to identify
patients who

     *   have been incorrectly assigned more than one number with the same
         prefix

     *    have more than one medical record

First use the Compile Duplicate Patients Routine to compile this list.
You can now use an exact match of the last name, first name, soundex match, and
social security number. When the compilation is complete, use the Print
Duplicate Patients List Routine to print the report.


The report includes the following information, arranged alphabetically by last
name, for each set of duplicate patients found:

    *    patient name                       *     primary unit number and other
                                                  numbers
    *    sex
                                              *   social security number
    *    birthdate
                                              *   address
    *    mother's name


When you select the Print Duplicate Patient Routine, the following information
from the most recent compilation appears:

    *    date and time                             *   number of records processed

    *    mnemonic of the user (as entered          *   status (RUNNING or COMPLETE)
         in the MIS User Dictionary) who
         initiated the last compilation
Print Duplicate Patients List (11.3)                                  Page 220

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                        Print Duplicate Patient Report                         |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Last Compilation Started On:                                                   |
|                 Started By:                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|Number Of Records Processed:                                                   |
|Possible Duplicates Found:                                                     |
|                                                                               |
|Status:                                                                        |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Duplicate HC/SS # Report (11.4)                                        Page 221



11.4:   Duplicate HC/SS # Report


Use this routine to initiate a search of the Master Patient Index (MPI) for
duplicate patient entries with the same Social Security Number (US) or Health
Care Number (Canadian).

Two records with the same Social Security Number are either the same patient
or one record has an incorrect Social Security Number. To identify these
patients, use this report.

When choosing this routine, the user will be prompted with:

                                   Print On:

The output of the report will display all records having the exact same Social
Security/Health Care Number. Records will be displayed in groups of records
with the same Social Security/Health Care Number.

The output format of the report is the same as that for the Duplicate Patient
Report.

For each group of records with the same SS#/HC#, the records are sorted by
internal urn.

When you select this routine, the Print on prompt appears at the bottom of
this screen. Enter the mnemonic of the device on which you wish to print this
report.
Print Swipe Cards (11.5)                                                Page 222



11.5:   Print Swipe Cards


This routine will allow you to batch print swipe cards for patients in your
health care organization.

Users will now be able to utilize swipe cards to identify patients in any
routine that has a PATIENT prompt. This will allow for fast, accurate
identification of patients throughout the system.

Use of the swipe card at any patient prompt will be the same as if the user
entered the patient's unit number directly. Further, it does not matter if the
user is in a facility that differs from that of the patient as long the
MAINTAIN UNIT #S ACROSS FACILITIES? parameter is set to "Y"es. In this case,
all of the patient's data will appear and "NEW" will appear in the PATIENT
field; also, the patient's unit number will appear in the OTHER NUMBERS field
multiple.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                  Batch Print Swipe Cards                                   |
|============================================================================================|
|Patient                     Name                             Birthdate Sex                  |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PATIENT
                            To identify the patient(s) whose swipe card(s) you
                            wish to print, enter one of the following:

                            *   The patient's primary unit number.

                            *   The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
                                prefaced by an E#.

                            *   The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                            *   The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.
Print Swipe Cards (11.5)                                               Page 223




                           *   The patient's home telephone number, prefaced
                                by T# .

                           *   The patient's social security number, prefaced
                                by # .

                               If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                               number within your facility, it replaces the
                               social security number.

                               If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                               unit number, the word NEW replaces the
                               social security number.

                           *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                               in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                               The system then begins a search of the Master
                               Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                               Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                               process).

                           *   An other number (i.e., a unit number
                               assigned by another facility or a number
                               assigned by a department, service, etc.).

                               As when you enter the social security number,
                               the system replaces the other number with
                               either the unit number or the word NEW (See
                               above).

The Birthdate and Sex fields will automatically default a response if defined
for the patient.
The Incomplete Records Feature (12)                                    Page 224



Chapter 12:   The Incomplete Records Feature


The Medical Records Module's Incomplete Records Feature allows you to manage
the processing of medical records with incomplete or insufficient data. After
a patient is discharged, his or her record is reviewed by the Medical Records
Department. In some cases, this review can start while the patient is still at
the hospital. If records are found to be incomplete, they are entered into the
Incomplete Records Feature via the Process Incomplete Records Routine.

For an overview, see the figure, The Incomplete Records Feature, which appears
at the end of this section.

When the Incomplete Records and Record Locator features are LINKED, the
system automatically signs out incomplete records to Incomplete Records
Processing (or whatever name your hospital assigns, in its MRI Locator
Recipient Dictionary, to the area where incomplete records are processed).



Monitoring the Deficiencies in the Incomplete Record

When you process a portion of an incomplete record for doctors, you can also
enter the reasons why records are deficient. These reasons are defined in the
MRI Incomplete Reasons Dictionary. You can track the deficiency or
deficiencies for which each each doctor is responsible when he or she completes
the record portion. To print a copy of the information entered via the Process
Incomplete Records Routine, use the Print Record Routine. You can attach the
Incomplete Record Report to the to the incomplete record to help users and
doctors monitor the deficiencies.



Monitoring Incomplete Records

Various lists (based on a number of different categories, such as patient name,
reasons the record is incomplete, etc.) allow the user to track the record's
progress. Notification letters can be sent to doctors who have records
outstanding. Use the Count Incompete Records Routine to obtain an accurate
count of incomplete records.



Completing Incomplete Records

To complete an incomplete record record, you can use one of the following two
routines:

     *   Process Incomplete Records

     *   Complete Records for Doctor
The Incomplete Records Feature (12)                                         Page 225




Your hospital can specify in the MRI parameters when to automatically purge
(i.e., permanently remove) the completed record from the Incomplete Records
Feature. You can also use the Delete (Incomplete) Record Routine to remove a
record (e.g., an incorrectly entered record) from the Incomplete Records
Feature at any time.



Changing the Status of Incomplete Records

Until a record is entered into the Incomplete Records Feature using the Process
Incomplete Records Routine, its Incomplete Record (ICR) status is defined as
NONE. Once the record is entered into the Incomplete Records feature,
however, that record's status changes from NONE to INCOMPLETE. When
the record is completed, the status changes to COMPLETE until the record is
purged from the Incomplete Records Feature. After the record is purged, the
ICR status returns to NONE.

When a portion of the record is INCOMPLETE or COMPLETE (i.e., it is
active in the Incomplete Records feature), Y appears after the PORTION
INCOMPLETE prompt in the following routines:

     *    Enter/Edit Patient              *    Edit Unit Number

     *    View Patient                    *    Delete/Restore Patient

     *    Verify Daily Assignments        *    Unmerge Patients



Doctor Boxes

Some Medical Records Departments file their incomplete charts in doctor
boxes. The DOCTOR BOX field helps these departments locate incomplete
records by indicating the particular doctor box in Incomplete Records
Processing in which the incomplete record portion has been placed. Your
entries in the DOCTOR BOX field appears on the reports generated in the
following routines:

    *    List Incomplete Records          *    List Incomplete Records
         by Patient Name                       by Doctor and Patient Name

    *    List Incomplete Records           *   List Incomplete Records
         by Doctor and Days Outstanding        by Doctor and Number

    *    List Incomplete Records           *    Print Record's Incomplete
         by Doctor and Unit Number              Portions


In addition, when the Incomplete Records and the Record Locator features are
LINKED, and the View Record Routine (in the Record Locator Feature) is
selected, the screen displays the doctor box in which the incomplete record
The Incomplete Records Feature (12)                                     Page 226



portion is located.



Days Outstanding, Days Suspended, Days to Process

The system automatically counts the days each record remains incomplete
(DAYS OUTSTANDING) and simultaneously keeps track of:

    *    The number of days it actually takes to process the record portion in
         Incomplete Records Processing.

    *    The number of days it takes each doctor to complete the record portion.


Whether you enter a record into the Incomplete Record Feature for discharged
patients or for patients still in the hospital, the system includes those days
in its count. You can also include the days outstanding for doctors who work
on deficiencies while the patient is still in the hospital.



When a Record is Moved or Suspended

When the Incomplete Records and Record Locator features are LINKED, the
record portion can be MOVED to another recipient using the Move Records
Routine. When these two features are not LINKED, processing can be
SUSPENDED using the Suspend/Resume Process Routine. For more information
about the LINK, see Appendix D.

In both cases, the system keeps a running tally of the number of days the
record is unavailable for processing (DAYS SUSPENDED) and subtracts this
from the number of DAYS OUTSTANDING. The difference between the two
figures is the number of days it actually takes to process the record portion
(i.e., DAYS TO PROCESS). All of these tallies appear on the screen in the
Process Incomplete Records Routine.



When a Record or a Doctor is Unavailable

When a single incomplete record is unavailable to the doctor for a period of
time (e.g., the doctor has dictated the discharge summary and it must be
transcribed before he or she can sign it), the system allows you to manually
credit days to that doctor.

In addition, the system automatically assigns credit to the doctor when a
record is

     *    MOVED (i.e., the Move Record Routine is used to sign out a record)

                          or
The Incomplete Records Feature (12)                                        Page 227



     *    SUSPENDED (i.e., the Suspend/Resume Process Routine is used to
          suspend the days outstanding count)


The system also automatically assigns credit when the doctor is unavailable
and the unavailable dates have been entered using the Enter/Edit Doctor
Availability Routine.

In all cases, the days credited are automatically subtracted from the DAYS
OUTSTANDING for the doctor. This ensures that the tally accurately reflects
the number of days it takes the doctor to complete the record portion for
which he or she is responsible.



Printing Outguides

When the Incomplete Records and Record Locator features are LINKED, the
system may print an outguide when a record is entered into the Incomplete
Records feature. This is determined by your parameters (e.g., if your
hospital has entered Y at the parameter prompt PRINT OUTGUIDE FOR ICR,
the system prints outguides when a record is signed out to Incomplete Records
Processing).



Printing Notification Letters

Notification Letters are created (and entered into the Notification Letters
Dictionary) via the Enter/Edit Notification Letters Routine. Once records are
assigned incomplete status, you can use the Print Notification Letters
Routine to generate letters addressed to the doctors responsible for
completing them. These letters, based on DAYS TO PROCESS (described on the
previous page), are sent to encourage doctors to come to the Medical Records
department to complete the records.



Reports

Several list routines allow allow you to print reports and identify the
incomplete records, the types of deficiencies and the doctors responsible for
completion of the records. The routines are:

    *    List Incomplete Records          *   List Incomplete Records
         by Days Outstanding                  by Doctor and Number

    *    List Incomplete Records          *   List Incomplete Records
         by Terminal Digit                    by Doctor and Patient Name

    *    List Incomplete Records          *   List Incomplete Records
         by Patient Name                      by Reason and Doctor
The Incomplete Records Feature (12)                                     Page 228



   *   List Incomplete Records          *   Print Record's Incomplete
       by Doctor and Days Outstanding       Portions
Additional ICR routines (13)                                            Page 229



Chapter 13:   Additional ICR routines


The Additional ICR Routines Menu includes the following functions:

Delete Record Routine
This routine allows you to delete records from the Incomplete Records
feature. (NOTE: This routine will only delete the record from the
Incomplete Records feature, not from the Master Patient Index).

Enter/Edit Doctor Availability
Use this routine to enter or edit the dates on which a doctor is
unavailable to work on incomplete records due to illness, vacation, etc.
The system will automatically assign days of credit to the doctor when
you use this routine.

Count Incomplete Records
When you select this routine, the system immediately calculates the
total number of records, which currently are active in the Incomplete
Records feature, that have at least one incomplete portion (i.e., all
records with an ICR status of incomplete). It then displays that
number on the screen.

This information can be used to satisfy JCAHO reporting requirements.

Print Record's Incomplete Portions
You can use this routine to print the Record's Incomplete Portions
report. The incomplete records data for all incomplete portion(s)
of a single, user-specified record, appears on this report. Once you
identify a record, the system prints the information that was entered
for that record via the Process Incomplete Records routine.

Audit Trail Inquiry
You can use this routine to print an Incomplete Records Audit
Inquiry report which includes all activities performed in the
Incomplete Records Feature for a user-specified record. This report
allows you to check which activities were performed, when they were
done, and who are the responsible users.

Delinquent Record Count
This routine totals the number of incomplete records that are
considered overdue or "delinquent" for doctors based on the criteria
defined in the Enter/Edit Delinquent Days for Patient Type Routine.
The count is broken down by Patient Type.

Enter Doctor Info For Doctor Visit Log
This routine allows users to log all visits made by a doctor to
the Medical Records Department for the purpose of completing charts.
This routine, based on the date entered in the VISIT DATE field,
will affect the generation of Incomplete Chart Notification Letters.
The routine also allows the user to enter a reason for the visit.
Additional ICR routines (13)                                            Page 230



When a date is entered using this routine, doctors are credited
with a visit to the department. This credit, similar to completing
a patient's chart in the Process Incomplete Record Routine, postpones
the generation of a delinquent letter.

All visits entered in the routine can be listed by using the
Doctor Visit Log.

Edit Portion Name
This routine allows you to edit the record portion name of an
incomplete record.

    Dictionaries

Enter/Edit Notification Letters
The Enter/Edit Notification Letters routine allows you to create
and edit Notification Letters that a site will plan to use on a
regular basis, such as a "Zero Days Outstanding Letter", a "Three
Days Outstanding Letter", a "Seven Days Outstanding Letter", a "Final
Warning Letter", etc, that are sent to recipients.

List Notification Letters
Use this routine to list the Notification Letters created using the
Enter/Edit Notification Letter Routine. You select the letters
by specifying their mnemonics and whether you wish to include active
letters, inactive letters or all letters (both active and inactive).

This list can then be reviewed to determine which letters, if any,
should be created or edited (via the Enter/Edit Notification
Letter Routine).

Enter/Edit Reasons
The MRI ICR Reason Dictionary defines the reasons that records
are considered incomplete. You may wish to refer to the deficiencies
currently listed on your hospital's deficiency slip (often attached
to incomplete charts) for appropriate dictionary entries. You can use
this routine to add a new reason to the dictionary, or to change the
information currently in the dictionary.

List Reasons
This routine lists the incomplete reasons which appear in the MRI
ICR Reason Dictionary (see the Enter/Edit MRI ICR Reason Dictionary
routine).

The list can then be reviewed to determine which reasons, if any,
should be edited, or whether new reasons need to be entered (via
the Enter/Edit Reasons Routine).

Enter/Edit Delinquent Days For Patient   Types
This dictionary allows users to define   the number of days, based on
either the patient's discharge/service   date or the date that the
medical record chart becomes available   to the medical record staff,
Additional ICR routines (13)                                             Page 231



that a chart becomes "delinquent" for each Patient Type. After a
chart becomes delinquent, doctors receive Notification Letters
reminding them to complete the chart.

Enter/Edit Default Date Available
This dictionary allows users to specify when charts first become
available in the Process Incomplete Record Routine. This date can
either be the patient's Discharge Date/Service Date or "T", the date
that the chart first becomes available to the medical record staff.

    User Activity

Productivity Report
This report totals, based on a specified date range, the number of
times a user group or individual user, filed activity in the
Process Incomplete Record Routine. This report can help managers
in the Medical Records Department track user activity for incomplete
records.

Analysis Report By User And Provider
This report totals, based on a specified date range, the number of
times a user analyzed/edited/created an Incomplete Record by adding
deficiencies and/or doctors. This report can help managers in the
Medical Records Department track user activity for incomplete records.

Completion Report By User And Provider
This report totals, based on a specified Completion Date range,
the number of times a user completed deficiencies for a doctor on an
incomplete record. This report can help managers in the Medical
Records Department track user activity for incomplete records.
Additional ICR routines (13)                                           Page 232




+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                          Incomplete Record Routines [ ]                        |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                                                                |
|                                                                                |
|11. Delete Record                                    ----User Activity----      |
|12. Enter/Edit Doctor Availability               30. Productivity Report        |
|13. Count Incomplete Records                     31. Analysis Report By User And Provider|
|14. Print Record's Incomplete Portions           32. Completion Report By User And Provider|
|16. Audit Trail Inquiry                                                         |
|18. Delinquent Record Count                                                     |
|19. Enter Doctor Info For Doctor Visit Log                                      |
|20. Edit Portion Name                                                           |
|                                                                                |
|21. Document History Report                                                     |
|22. Document Error Report                                                       |
|23. Scan Station Error Report                                                   |
|24. Scan Station Error Audit Trail                                              |
|                                                                                |
|    ----Dictionaries----                                                        |
|41. Enter/Edit Notification Letters                                             |
|42. List Notification Letters                                                   |
|43. Enter/Edit Reasons                                                          |
|44. List Reasons                                                                |
|45. Enter/Edit Delinquent Days For Patient Types                                |
|46. Enter/Edit Default Date Available                                           |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Setting Up Your Dictionaries (13.1)                                    Page 233



13.1:    Setting Up Your Dictionaries


The standard Additional ICR Routines Menu also contains routines for
dictionaries that allow you to define the

     *   text of your Notification letters

     *   reasons why a medical record is considered to be incomplete



Notification Letters

The routines that allow you to create and maintain the Notification Letter
Dictionary are described in the sections titled

     *   Enter/Edit Notification Letter

     *   Listing Entries in Letter Dictionaries


These two sections appear in the chapter titled "Letters, Outguides and Labels:
Dictionary Routines."

For information about printing Notification letters, see the section in this
chapter titled "Printing Notification Letters."



ICR Reasons

The routines that allow you to create and maintain the Reason Dictionary are
described in the sections titled:

     *   Enter/Edit Incomplete Reasons

     *   List Incomplete Reasons
Enter/Edit Incomplete Reasons (13.1.1)                                     Page 234



13.1.1:   Enter/Edit Incomplete Reasons


The MRI ICR Reason Dictionary defines the reasons that records are considered
incomplete. You may wish to refer to the deficiencies currently listed on
your hospital's deficiency slip (often attached to incomplete charts) for
appropriate dictionary entries. You can use this routine to add a new reason
to the dictionary, or to change the information currently in the dictionary.

When you enter a reason in the dictionary, you specify:

    *   a mnemonic

    *   whether or not you wish the reason to be active

    *   a description of the reason (i.e., the reason's "name")

When "Reasons" Are Used in the Medical Records Module

After a record is reviewed for deficiencies, you can enter it into the
Incomplete Records feature via the Process Incomplete Records routine. At
that time, you identify the reason(s) that this record is considered deficient
by choosing the appropriate mnemonic(s) from the ICR Reasons Dictionary.

These incomplete reasons also appear in the following routines:

    *   Incomplete Records List            *   Incomplete Records List
        by Terminal Digit                      by Doctor and Patient Name

    *   Incomplete Records List            *   Incomplete Records List
        by Days Outstanding                    by Reason and Doctor

    *   Incomplete Records List            *   Print Incomplete Record
        by Patient Name
                                           *   Print Record's Incomplete Portions
    *   Incomplete Records List
        by Doctor and Number              *    Delete Incomplete Records

    *   Incomplete Records List            *   Notification Letters (if reasons
        by Doctor and Days Outstanding         are entered when the letter is
                                               created)
Enter/Edit Incomplete Reasons (13.1.1)                                   Page 235

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                      Enter/Edit MRI ICR Reason Dictionary                     |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Mnemonic:                                                                      |
|                                                                               |
|Active?                                                                        |
|                                                                               |
|Name:                                                                          |
|                                                                               |
|Form:                       Form Status:                                       |
|                                                                               |
|Signature Deficiency?                                                          |
|                                                                               |
|Type:                                                                          |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


MNEMONIC              Enter a mnemonic code unique to this entry (using
                      up to 10 characters of free text).

                      If this mnemonic is a new entry (i.e., it is not
                      already listed in this dictionary):

                           The following prompt appears:

                                         Not found.   New?

                           Y appears. To enter this mnemonic in the
                           dictionary, press <Enter>. To return to the
                           MNEMONIC prompt without entering the mnemonic
                           (e.g., you make a typo in the entry), delete the
                           Y and enter N.


                      If the mnemonic is already defined in this
                      dictionary:

                           The system displays all previously entered data
                           associated with this entry. You may edit this
                           information as necessary.


                     Lookup:   Current entries in this dictionary (both active
                               and inactive)



ACTIVE?                    If this is a new entry or an existing entry with
                           a status of ACTIVE:
Enter/Edit Incomplete Reasons (13.1.1)                                    Page 236



                            Y appears. To assign (or maintain) this entry's
                            status as ACTIVE, press <Enter>. An entry must
                            be ACTIVE to be an eligible response to any
                            prompt which refers to this dictionary.

                            To make this entry INACTIVE, delete the Y
                            and enter N. Be aware that if an entry has an
                            INACTIVE status, it will not appear as a selection
                            in any dictionary Lookup within an application
                            (except for the dictionary routine itself).


                            If this entry is INACTIVE:

                            N appears. To leave this entry inactive,
                            press <Enter>.

                            To make this entry ACTIVE, delete the N and
                            enter Y.



NAME                    Enter a description of the incomplete reason (i.e.,
                        the reason's name), using up to 55 characters (e.g.,
                        Lacking discharge summary).


FORM                    This field provides a Lookup to the MIS Medical
                        Records Form dictionary.

                        Use of this field, in conjunction with the FORM STATUS
                        field, will enable users to uniquely associate an
                        incomplete reason with a specific form/status.


FORM STATUS             This field provides a Lookup to the statuses defined
                        for that FORM type in the MIS Medical Records Form Type
                        dictionary.

                        It is accessible/required only when there is an entry in
                        the FORM field.


SIGNATURE DEFICIENCY?   If this reason indicates that the form is missing
                        a signature, the user should respons "Y"es to this
                        field.

                        If this reason does not indicate a missing signature,
                        the user should respond "N"o to this field, or leave it
                        blank.
Enter/Edit Incomplete Reasons (13.1.1)                                  Page 237




                      By answering "Y"es to this prompt, the user is
                      indicating that a form (as specified in the FORM field)
                      with a status (as indicated in the FORM STATUS field)
                      is missing a signature. Only one of a forms' statuses
                      can be associated with a reason that is flagged as a
                      Signature Deficiency.


TYPE                  This field is used strictly for the DG/MedScan ICR
                      processing and will store the Incomplete Records Reason
                      Type. The default value of this field is "I"ncomplete.
                      The following responses are valid for this field:

                            I = Incomplete - Form Requires Rescanning
                            S = Missing Form - Requires Scanning
                            N = Missing Form - No Scanning Required.
Enter/Edit Delinquent Days for Patient Types (13.1.2)                   Page 238



13.1.2:    Enter/Edit Delinquent Days for Patient Types


This dictionary allows users to define the number of days, based on either the
patient's discharge/service Date or the date that the medical record chart
becomes available to the medical record staff, that a chart becomes
"delinquent" for each Patient Type. After a chart becomes delinquent, doctors
receive Notification Letters reminding them to complete the chart.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                 Enter/Edit Delinquent Days For Patient Types                  |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Patient    Delinquent After                                                    |
|Type       Number of Days      Based On                                        |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PATIENT TYPE      Enter one of the following patient types for which you
                  want to specify the number of delinquent days:


                  *   IN      Inpatient

                  *   CLI     Clinical

                  *   ER      Emergency Room

                  *   POV     Physician Office Visit

                  *   REF     Referred

                  *   RCR      Recurring

                  *   SDC     Surgical Day Care


DELINQUENT AFTER # OF DAYS

                   To indicate the number of days after which
                   an incomplete record is considered delinquent, enter the
                   number of days.


BASED ON           For each patient type, enter the date from
                   which the system should calculate the number of
Enter/Edit Delinquent Days for Patient Types (13.1.2)                     Page 239



                 delinquent days.     Your choices are:

                 *   DIS/SER DATE           Discharge or service date
                                            that appears in the Process
                                            Incomplete Record Routine

                 *   DATE AVAILABLE         Corresponds to the DAYS
                                            OUTSTANDING field in the
                                            Process Incomplete Record
                                            Routine
Enter/Edit Default Date Available (13.1.3)                             Page 240



13.1.3:   Enter/Edit Default Date Available


This dictionary allows users to specify when charts first become available in
the Process Incomplete Record Routine. This date can either be the patient's
Discharge Date/Service Date or "T", the date that the chart first becomes
available to the medical record staff.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                     Enter/Edit ICR Default Date Available                     |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Default Date Available                                                         |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


DEFAULT DATE AVAILABLE
                              Enter the date you wish to appear in the
                              DATE AVAILABLE prompt of the Process
                              Incomplete Record Routine. (You can delete the
                              default date in the Process Incomplete Record
                              Routine.) Your choices are:



                              T                  The default date is today,
                                                 e.g., the date the user selects
                                                 the Process Incomplete Record
                                                 Routine

                               DIS/SER           Discharge or service date
                                                 that appears in the Process
                                                 Incomplete Record Routine.

                               This field also affects the BASED ON field
                               in the Enter/Edit Delinquent Days for Patient
                               Types Routine.
List Incomplete Reasons (13.1.4)                                       Page 241



13.1.4:   List Incomplete Reasons


This routine lists the incomplete reasons which appear in the MRI ICR Reason
dictionary (see the Enter/Edit MRI ICR Reason dictionary routine).

You select a range of reasons by specifying Reason mnemonics in the FROM REASON
and THRU REASON fields, and whether you wish to list active reasons ("Y"es)
inactive reasons ("N"o), or all reasons ("ALL").

The list can then be reviewed to determine which reasons, if any, should be
edited, or whether new reasons need to be entered (via the Enter/Edit Reasons
Routine).

The report lists (in alphamnemonic order) each specified reason's response to
the following fields:

MNEMONIC
ACTIVE ("Y"es or "N"o)
NAME
FORM (from the MIS Medical Records Form dictionary)
FORM STATUS (from the MIS Medical Records Form Type dictionary)
SIGNATURE DEFICIENCY? ("Y"es, "N"o or blank, which is also interpreted as "N"o)
TYPE

The list includes the TYPE field which supports the optical disk image scanning
system in the Enter/Edit ICR Reasons dictionary. The possible responses to
this field:

    I - incomplete, form requires rescanning
    S - missing form, form requires scanning
    N - missing form, no scanning required


+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                        List MRI ICR Reason Dictionary                         |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Reason:                                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|Thru Reason:                                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|Active?                                                                        |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FROM REASON            BEGINNING appears. Press <Enter> to start the
                       list with the first reason in the MRI ICR Reason
                       Dictionary (where reasons are arranged in alphamnemonic
List Incomplete Reasons (13.1.4)                                      Page 242



                      order).

                      To list specific reasons, delete BEGINNING and enter
                      the letter or mnemonic identifying the reason with which
                      you wish to begin the list. For example, when you enter
                      M, the list will begin with the first reason listed
                      under M in the dictionary.


THRU REASON           END appears. Press <Enter> to end the list
                      with the last reason in the MRI ICR Reason Dictionary.

                      To list specific reasons, delete END and enter the
                      letter or mnemonic identifying the reason with which you
                      wish to end the list. For example, when you enter
                      S the list will end with the last reason listed
                      under S in the dictionary.

                      To list one particular reason, enter that reason's
                      mnemonic after both the FROM REASON and THRU
                      REASON prompts.


ACTIVE?               Y appears. Press <Enter> to list only the
                      active reasons from among the reasons entered after the
                      FROM REASON and THRU REASON prompts.

                      To list only the inactive reasons from among the reasons
                      specified, delete Y and enter N. To list both
                      the active and the inactive reasons (i.e., ALL of
                      the reasons specified), delete Y and enter ALL.
Processing Incomplete Records (13.2)                                       Page 243



13.2:    Processing Incomplete Records


This section describes the routines used to process incomplete medical records.


NOTE:    The mnemonic ICR is used in the following table to identify the
         incomplete records area.




                        Processing Incomplete Records



If you want to:                                Use the following routine:



     *   Identify deficiencies and doctors      *    Process Incomplete Record
         responsible for completing the
         record

         Edit incomplete record data

         Credit doctors for times when the
         record is unavailable

         Indicate the completion of the
         record (i.e., change the status of
         the record from incomplete to
         complete)


     *   Complete several records returned     *     Complete Records for Doctor
         by a doctor

     When the Incomplete Records and Record Locator features are LINKED~:

         Sign out an incomplete record and     *     Move Records
         make a reservation for ICR

         Return a record to ICR

         Suspend the DAYS OUTSTANDING count
         when you MOVE an incomplete record

                                                    (continued on next page)
Processing Incomplete Records (13.2)                                         Page 244




                  Processing Incomplete Records (continued)


If you want to:                                 Use the following routine:

     When the Incomplete Records and Record Locator features areNOT LINKED:

         Suspend and resume the processing of   *   Suspend/Resume Process
         incomplete records (to credit
         doctors for times when the records
         are unavailable)

     *   Enter/edit dates that a doctor is      *   Enter/Edit Doctor Availability
         unavailable to work on incomplete
         records


     *   Delete records from the Incomplete     *   Delete Record
         Records feature




These routines are described in detail on the following pages.
Process Incomplete Records (13.2.1)                                      Page 245



13.2.1:    Process Incomplete Records


This routine allows you to enter a record into the Incomplete Records Feature
and to complete incomplete records which have been returned. (If a doctor
returns several incomplete records at one time, you may decide to use the
Complete Records For Doctor routine to complete those records all at once.)

Entering an Incomplete Record

Information, such as deficiencies and responsible doctors, is entered, and can
later be edited as necessary (e.g., change the doctor in the BOX field,
indicate completed deficiencies, enter completion dates, etc.).

To use this routine, first enter the record, the account number and the date on
which the record became available to the doctor(s). The system calculates the
number of days the record has been outstanding based on this date.

NOTE: An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can
be used to identify a patient across all facilities of the enterprise. It will
be assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.


Next, you specify which portion of the record is incomplete. If there is
only one portion which is incomplete, it and its corresponding data will
default into the appropriate fields.

If your hospital uses doctor boxes to file incomplete records, the BOX
field allows you to indicate the doctor who is next in line to complete the
record portion.

Finally, you can enter the following information for each doctor who is
responsible for completing the record:

     *    the date the record portion becomes available to each doctor, if you
          wish to change the default value

     *    credit days, if appropriate

     *    reason(s) that portion is considered incomplete

     *    comments

The screen scrolls to accept as many doctors as are responsible for the
portion.

NOTE:    When you enter a record into the Incomplete Records Feature, the
         system may print an outguide. This happens only when the Incomplete
         Records and Record Locator features are LINKED and your system
         parameters indicate that outguides should print for records signed out
         to the ICR (or whatever name your hospital assigns to your incomplete
Process Incomplete Records (13.2.1)                                      Page 246



         records area).

Completing a Record

You can use this routine to change the status of an incomplete record's portion
to COMPLETE. You can also enter the next sign out date (i.e., the date on
which the portion becomes available to the next doctor responsible for
completing it). The system assesses the number of days the doctor takes to
complete the record based on this date.

Note: The Complete Records For Doctor routine may also be used to complete
several records returned by a doctor at one time.

When a Record or a Doctor Is Unavailable

The system automatically credits the doctor for days when the record is
unavailable because it has been MOVED (via the Move Records routine) or
SUSPENDED (via the Suspend/Resume Process routine). In addition, when the
record portion is unavailable for any other reason (e.g., when a report is
being transcribed), you can use this routine to manually assign days of credit
to an individual doctor.

The system automatically assigns days of credit to the doctor when he/she is
unavailable (e.g., on vacation) and the dates unavailable are entered via the
Enter/Edit Doctor Availability routine.

In all cases, the system subtracts the credited number of days from the total
number of days outstanding to obtain the number of DAYS TO PROCESS for the
doctor.

Notification Letters

Notification Letters, based on the number of DAYS TO PROCESS, can be sent
to all doctors who are responsible for completing record portions. (See the
Enter/Edit Notification Letters routine for more information.)

The Completed Record

Once all doctors have completed the record portion, the record is no longer
incomplete. The completion date appears in the DATE COMPLETE field
and the completed record will be purged (removed) from the Incomplete Records
feature according to the hospital-defined parameters. The record can also be
removed using the Delete Incomplete Records routine.



The Incomplete Records Feature and the Record Locator Feature:    The Link

When the Incomplete Records and Records Locator features are LINKED (see
Appendix D), you can use the Process Incomplete Records routine to:

     *    Sign out a newly completed record to a recipient who has reserved that
          record
Process Incomplete Records (13.2.1)                                     Page 247




     *   Reserve a record for a recipient if you need to process that record
         (i.e., if you need to take it from that recipient and enter it into the
         Incomplete Records feature)

When you complete a record that has been reserved, a message, alerting you to
the reservation, appears at the bottom of the screen. You can then sign the
record out to that recipient directly (i.e., you do not have to use the
Return & Sign Out Reserved Records routine to do this).

If a record has been signed out and is later determined to be incomplete, you
can use the Process Incomplete Records routine to assign it to Incomplete
Records Processing. At the same time, you can use this routine to make a
reservation for the recipient from whom you are taking the record portion.
Then, when the record is completed, you can use this routine to sign it back
out to that recipient.

See the Move Records and Sign Out & Reserve Records routines for more details.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                 Process Incomplete Record                                  |
|============================================================================================|
|Record:                                                                                     |
|                                                                                            |
|Account Number:                 Dis/Ser                           Days Outstanding:
|
|                                Date Available:                   Days Suspended:
|
|                                Date Complete:                    Days to Process:
|
|                                                                                            |
|Record Portion:                           Box:                                              |
|                                                                                            |
|    Doctor                                     Images                                       |
|     Available Completed CR    Reasons                Comments                              |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Process Incomplete Records (13.2.1)                                    Page 248



RECORD                To identify the incomplete record, enter one of the
                      following:

                            *   The patient's primary unit number.

                            *   The patient's social security number, prefaced
                                by a pound sign (#).

                                If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                                number within your facility, it replaces the
                                social security number.

                                If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                                unit number, the system erases the social
                                security number, leaving this field blank.

                            *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                                in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                                The system then begins a search of the Master
                                Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                                Appendix B details this process).

                            *   An other number (i.e., a unit number
                                assigned by another facility or a number
                                assigned by a department, service, etc.).

                                As when you enter the social security number,
                                the system replaces the other number with
                                either the unit number or leaves this field
                                blank (See above).


                      When you identify the record by number or locate the
                      patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays the
                      patient's primary unit number (if one has been assigned)
                      and name.


ACCOUNT NUMBER        Enter the account number associated with the record
                      portion you are processing. A Lookup of eligible
                      account numbers is available.

                     NOTE: If Y is entered at the MAINTAIN UNIT #
                           ACROSS FACILITIES prompt in your MRI
                           parameters, you can only enter account numbers
                           which have the prefix of the facility to which
                           you are signed-on. If you attempt to enter an
                           account number with a different prefix, the
                           following message appears:
Process Incomplete Records (13.2.1)                                    Page 249




                                       Not a valid account #

                            This restriction ensures that all Incomplete
                            Record reports for each facility contain only
                            information specific to that facility. (For more
                            information, see Appendix E: Multifacility
                            Systems and Appendix F: Patient Numbers.)


If you are entering an incomplete record:

     The patient's discharge/service date appears in both the DIS/SER and
     DATE AVAILABLE fields. If necessary, you can edit the date available,
     which is the date the patient's record became available to Incomplete
     Records Processing.

     Once you have specified the date available, the cursor moves to the
     RECORD PORTION prompt, and the following information, calculated by
     the system, appears:

         *   today's date in the DATE COMPLETE field

         *   the number of days the record has been outstanding (i.e., the
             number of days from the time it became available to today's date)

         *   the number of days the record was unavailable for processing

         *   the number of days the record has actually been available for
             processing


If you are editing previously entered information:

     All of the above information appears, except the date complete, along with
     any previously entered data.

     Note that once you have filed the incomplete records information for an
     account, the record portion cannot be edited. Therefore, once you
     have specified the date available, the cursor moves directly to the BOX
     prompt.


DATE AVAILABLE         The discharge/service date appears. The system
                       assumes that the record portion became available to the
                       incomplete records area (as defined in the MRI Locator
                       Recipient Dictionary) on this date.

                       If the portion became available on another date, delete
                       the date that appears and enter the appropriate date.
Process Incomplete Records (13.2.1)                                     Page 250



                       You can enter dates that fall after the admission or
                       service date, but not future dates.

                       The system uses this date to calculate DAYS
                       OUTSTANDING and DAYS TO PROCESS (i.e., the amount
                       of time the record portion spends in the incomplete
                       records area).

NOTE:   The next four fields cannot be edited, but are updated automatically
        by the system.


DATE COMPLETE          A portion is complete only when completion dates
                       have been entered for all specified doctors. At
                       that time, the date on which the last doctor completed
                       the record portion appears in this field. When the
                       Incomplete Records and Record Locator features are
                       LINKED (see Appendix D), as soon as the DATE
                       COMPLETE appears, the "Sign out to (Recipient Mnemonic)
                       effective (Date Complete)?" prompt also appears at the
                       bottom of the screen if:

                             *   The portion was reserved via the Sign Out &
                                 Reserve Routine while it was being processed in
                                 the Incomplete Records feature.

                             *   The portion was transferred (via the Move Record
                                 Routine) to Incomplete Records Processing, and a
                                 reservation was made for the previous recipient.

                             *   The portion was taken from a recipient, entered
                                 into the Incomplete Records feature and reserved
                                 for that previous recipient.

                       If this prompt appears, press Y to assign the newly
                       completed record portion to the recipient with the
                       reservation. Press N if you do not wish to sign out
                       the portion to that recipient.


DAYS                   The number of days that have passed since the
OUTSTANDING            portion became available for processing (based on
                       the DATE AVAILABLE) appears.


DAYS                   The system keeps a running tally of the number of
SUSPENDED              days the portion is unavailable for processing
                       (e.g., while being audited by the business office). This
                       number, DAYS SUSPENDED, appears here. See the Move
                       Records and Suspend/Resume Process Routines for more
Process Incomplete Records (13.2.1)                                      Page 251



                      information.


DAYS TO               The number of days the portion has actually been
PROCESS               available for processing (DAYS OUTSTANDING -
                      DAYS SUSPENDED = DAYS TO PROCESS) appears.


RECORD PORTION        Enter the name of the record portion, using up to 20
                      characters. Portion names vary from hospital to
                      hospital--you may choose to use the account number,
                      discharge date, or a name such as Volume I. It is
                      important, however, to use a consistent format. For
                      example, Volume I, Vol I and volume 1 are recognized as
                      three different names by the system.

                        NOTE:   If the record portion is currently defined
                                in the Record Locator Feature, it appears in a
                                Lookup at this prompt. This Lookup contains the
                                following information for each portion defined
                                for this record:

                                      *   portion

                                      *   current recipient

                                      *   date signed out

                                      *   date due back

                                      *   first recipient with a reservation, if
                                          any


                                This information is available whether or not the
                                Incomplete Records and Record Locator features
                                are LINKED.


                      NOTE:     The cursor stops here only when you are
                                entering an incomplete record. If you are
                                editing an incomplete record, the record
                                portion cannot be changed. Therefore, in that
                                case, the cursor skips this prompt.


BOX                   If you use doctor boxes to file your incomplete
                      records, enter the mnemonic of the doctor who is next in
                      line to sign out the record portion. After you identify
                      a doctor, the doctor's full name appears on the right.
Process Incomplete Records (13.2.1)                                         Page 252




                      Note that this is not a required field. If you do
                      not use doctor boxes, you can press <Enter> to move
                      directly to the DOCTOR prompt.

                      A Lookup of the MIS Doctor Dictionary is available. You
                      can use the name or expanded Lookup features, or both to
                      identify doctors. For more information, see the section
                      titled "Identifying Doctors."


                      Lookup:    MIS Doctor Dictionary

                      To see list of             Do the following:
                      doctors ordered by:
                      ___________________        _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                   Press <Lookup>, or type
                                                 PARTIAL,NAME and press
                                                 <Lookup>

                      Name                       Type N\ or N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                                 and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                                 N\JOHNS

                      --------------------------------------------------------
                      To see an expanded       Do the following:
                      list of doctors
                      ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                   Type /X or PARTIAL,NAME/X
                                                 and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                      Name                     Type N\/X or
                                               N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                               N\JO/X
                      --------------------------------------------------------

                      The following information appears in the expanded
                      Lookup:

                             *   mnemonic           *    if doctor has admitting
                                                         privileges
                             *   name
                                                    *    doctor type
                             *   service
                                                    *    telephone number
                             *   ABS service
Process Incomplete Records (13.2.1)                                         Page 253



DOCTOR                Enter the mnemonic of the doctor who is next in
                      line to complete the record portion. After you identify
                      the doctor, the doctor's name appears on the right.

                      A Lookup of the MIS Doctor Dictionary is available. You
                      can use the name or expanded Lookup features, or both to
                      identify doctors. For more information, see the section
                      titled "Identifying Doctors."


                      Lookup:    MIS Doctor Dictionary

                      To see list of             Do the following:
                      doctors ordered by:
                      ___________________        _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                   Press <Lookup>, or type
                                                 PARTIAL,NAME and press
                                                 <Lookup>

                      Name                       Type N\ or N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                                 and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                                 N\JOHNS

                      --------------------------------------------------------
                      To see an expanded       Do the following:
                      list of doctors
                      ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                   Type /X or PARTIAL,NAME/X
                                                 and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                      Name                     Type N\/X or
                                               N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                               N\JO/X
                      --------------------------------------------------------

                      The following information appears in the expanded
                      Lookup:

                             *   mnemonic           *    if doctor has admitting
                                                         privileges
                             *   name
                                                    *    doctor type
                             *   service
                                                    *    telephone number
                             *   ABS service
Process Incomplete Records (13.2.1)                                     Page 254



AVAILABLE               The date entered at the DATE AVAILABLE prompt
                        appears. The system uses this date to calculate the
                        DAYS OUTSTANDING and DAYS TO PROCESS for this
                        doctor. If this date is the date the record becomes
                        available to the doctor, press <Enter>.

                        If the default date is incorrect, delete it and enter
                        the correct date, using the standard date format or a
                        T combination (e.g., T-1 for yesterday).

                        If more than one doctor is responsible for completing
                        the record portion, that portion will become available
                        to these doctors at different times. In this case, as
                        you enter each doctor, you may wish to delete the
                        default date and leave this field blank.

                        Then, when the record portion actually becomes available
                        to the doctor, enter that date in this field. This
                        ensures that the DAYS OUTSTANDING and DAYS TO
                         PROCESS tallies accurately reflect the number of
                        days the doctor has access to the record. Notification
                        letters are sent based on the DAYS TO PROCESS.

                        The system will not accept dates prior to the
                        discharge/service date.


COMPLETED               Enter the date the record portion was completed by
                        this doctor, using the standard date format or a T
                        combination (e.g., T-1 for yesterday). You cannot
                        enter a future date (e.g., T+3).


CR                      Use this field to manually assign days of credit.
                        The system will not automatically assign credit in
                        cases where the record has not been moved or suspended,
                        yet is unavailable to the doctor (e.g., the discharge
                        summary has been dictated, but must be transcribed
                        before it can be signed).

                        The system will automatically credit the doctor
                        for days when the record is unavailable because it
                        has been moved or suspended (see the Move Records or
                        Suspend/Resume Process Routines) and for days when the
                        doctor is unavailable (see the Enter/Edit Doctor
                        Availability Routine).

NOTE:   When the Incomplete Records and Record Locator features are
        LINKED (see Appendix B) and you use this routine to enter a record
        into the Incomplete Records feature while that record is signed out
Process Incomplete Records (13.2.1)                                   Page 255



      to another recipient, a message appears at the bottom of the screen
      after you have entered all the data. It displays the mnemonic of the
      current recipient and asks you to choose 1) Return, 2) Reserve, 3)File
      or 4)Exit.

      If you enter:

          1) Return     The system automatically assigns the record to
                        Incomplete Records Processing. It will not make a
                        reservation for the current recipient. Note, however,
                        that existing reservations are not affected.

                         When the record is completed, the system checks to see
                         if any reservations have been made for that record.
                         If there is a reservation, when the record is
                         completed, the screen displays the "Sign out to
                         (Recipient Mnemonic) effective (Date Complete)?"
                         prompt. See the DATE COMPLETE prompt above for
                         more information.

          2) Reserve    The system automatically assigns the record to
                        Incomplete Records and makes a reservation for the
                        current recipient. Then, when the record is
                        completed, the screen displays the "Sign out to
                        (Recipient Mnemonic) effective (Date Complete)?"
                        prompt (see above).

          3)   File     If the LINK is on, the system allows you to edit the
                        portion of an incomplete record. The user avoids
                        having to return the record via the Return option (#1)
                        to Incomplete Records Processing (ICR) and
                        subsequently using the Move Record Routine to move the
                        record back to the locator recipient

          4)   Exit     The system exits the routine without moving or
                        reserving the record and does not file the information
                        entered. It does, however, change the status of the
                        record from complete to incomplete. The
                        record now appears on the Incomplete Record Log (see
                        the Print Incomplete Records Routine).



REASONS                When the cursor reaches this prompt, the REASONS
                       field is highlighted, and a window (see below) appears
                       on the right of the screen:
Process Incomplete Records (13.2.1)                                   Page 256

|===============================================================================|
|    Reason    Done Comment                                                     |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+

                            REASON       Enter the mnemonic of the
                                         reason why this record is still
                                         incomplete. You may enter as many
                                         reasons as you wish. A Lookup of
                                         the MRI ICR Reason Dictionary is
                                         available.


                            DONE         If the deficiency associated with
                                         the incomplete reason has been
                                         corrected, enter Y.


                            To leave this window, press <Enter> at the first
                            blank REASON field.

                      After you leave this window, the mnemonic(s) of the
                      reason(s) you entered there appear in the REASONS
                      field. Incomplete reasons appear first, followed by the
                      completed reasons (i.e., those reasons which have a Y
                      entered in the DONE field). An asterisk follows the
                      mnemonic of each completed reason. For example, the
                      mnemonic DIS can be used to identify the reason "Lacking
                      discharge summary." When it appears as DIS* in the
                      REASONS field, you can tell that the record at one
                      time was lacking a discharge summary, but the summary
                      has since been completed.

                      If you entered more reasons than the REASONS field
                      can display, a plus sign appears at the end of the
                      field. This indicates that there are more reasons than
                      are visible.
Process Incomplete Records (13.2.1)                                     Page 257



COMMENTS              Use this field to indicate relevant information,
                      such as "Sent to transcription, back 10/04/93."
                      You can use up to 39 characters.

                      These comments appear on the

                            *   screen in the Delete Incompete Records Routine

                            *   reports printed with the following routines:

                                      -Print Incomplete Records

                                      -Print Record's Incomplete Portions


If you file this routine and you have not entered or edited information,
the following message appears:

                   No changes were made.    Nothing filed

Use the Incomplete Records Audit Trail Inquiry Routine to see a list of
activities that users perform on an incomplete record.

Outguides and labels may be printed at the printer device you specify in the
MRI Outguide and Label Dictionary. Before you file this routine, verify that
the printer is online and that it is filled with labels.
Move Record (13.2.2)                                                      Page 258



13.2.2:   Move Record


You must use this routine if you wish to sign out incomplete records when
the Record Locator and Incomplete Records features are LINKED (see Appendix
D). For example, if the Business Office needs an incomplete record for an
audit, the Move Records routine allows you to interrupt the processing of the
record and assign it to the Business Office.

You can also use this routine to assign any record (incomplete or complete) to
any recipient without using the Sign Out & Reserve Records routine, thus
bypassing the reservation queue (see the Sign Out & Reserve Records routine for
more information).

The Move Records routine also allows you to move several records to a single
recipient at a time. First you identify a NEW RECIPIENT and enter the record
and the portions you want to move. You can reserve a record portion for the
current recipient by entering Y at the RESERVE? prompt. You can enter a
portion only once on the screen.

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

NOTE:   A recipient can be an entry in either the MRI Locator Recipient
        Dictionary or the MIS Provider Dictionary.

When you MOVE a record, you can choose to make a reservation for the
previous recipient (the one from whom you moved the record). That reservation
will go to the top of the reservation queue (i.e., become the number one
reservation), bumping recipients with prior reservations down one slot (i.e.,
the former number one reservation now becomes the number two reservation).
Then, when the record is returned (via the Return & Sign Out Reserved Records
routine), you can sign it out directly to the original recipient.

The system automatically prints the appropriate outguide and label (if they
have been formatted) when you MOVE a record. See the Enter/Edit Outguides
& Labels routine for more information.

NOTE:   When the Record Locator and Incomplete Records features are NOT
        LINKED, this routine can be used to sign out complete records
        (bypassing the reservation queue), but cannot ordinarily be used to
        sign out incomplete records. See Appendix D for more detailed
        information.

Signing Out Incomplete Records

With the LINK established, you must use this routine to sign records
out of Incomplete Records Processing. Once an incomplete record is signed
out, you can also use this routine to MOVE the record from one eligible
recipient to another.
Move Record (13.2.2)                                                    Page 259




NOTE:   Complete records, on the other hand, are normally processed using
        the Sign Out & Reserve Records and Return & Sign Out Reserved Records
        routines.

Signing Out Other Records

When a record is signed out to one recipient, and another recipient has the
top priority reservation, this second recipient is the default recipient
(i.e., the next recipient in line to receive the record). When the record is
returned to the Medical Records Department via the Return & Sign Out Reserved
Records routine, the user would normally sign out the record directly to this
default recipient.

However, you can use the Move Records routine to sign out a complete record to
a recipient other than the default recipient, thus temporarily bypassing
the reservation queue established by the Sign Out & Reserve Records routine.

All records (incomplete or complete) MOVED to a new recipient using the
Move Records routine appear as signed out to that recipient on the Sign Out
& Reserve Records routine screen.

Reserving Moved Records

When the Record Locator and Incomplete Records features are LINKED:

    When you MOVE an incomplete record from the incomplete records area,
    the system automatically makes a reservation for Incomplete Records
    Processing.

    When you MOVE a complete record, you have the choice of making a
    reservation for the original recipient.

When the two features are NOT LINKED:

    When you MOVE a complete record, you have the choice of making a
    reservation for the original recipient.

In all cases, the reservation made using this routine now has the highest
priority and appears in the RESERVED FOR field when the record is returned
using the Return & Sign Out Reserved Records Routine. The user can then
conveniently sign the record back out to the recipient who had it before it
was MOVED.

Returning Records

Both the Return & Sign Out Reserved Records and the Move Records routines can
be used to return MOVED records.

Use the Return & Sign Out Reserved Records routine to return the record if you
wish to check for existing reservations. You can then sign the record back out
to the default recipient, if you wish. When the Incomplete Records and Record
Locator features are LINKED and you are returning an incomplete record,
Move Record (13.2.2)                                                      Page 260



the recipient defaults to Incomplete Records Processing.

You can also use the Move Records routine to return a MOVED record by
MOVING it from the current recipient back to the original recipient.

Suspending the Incomplete Record's Days Outstanding Count

When this routine is used to MOVE an incomplete record portion, and the
Record Locator and Incomplete Records features are LINKED, the system
automatically suspends the DAYS OUTSTANDING count for all accounts
associated with that portion.

The system keeps a running total of the number of days that the incomplete
record is not available for processing because it has been MOVED to another
recipient. This number appears in the DAYS SUSPENDED field of the Process
Incomplete Record screen.

The system also credits the doctor who is responsible for completing the
MOVED record by subtracting the number of DAYS SUSPENDED from the
DAYS OUTSTANDING for the doctor. Thus, the tally accurately reflects the
number of days it takes the doctor to process the incomplete record.

Note that when you return a MOVED portion that is associated with more than
one account to the incomplete records area, the count resumes for all of the
portion's accounts.
Move Record (13.2.2)                                                    Page 261

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                        Move Records                                        |
|============================================================================================|
|New Recipient                                                                               |
|                                                                                            |
|                                   Portion                                                  |
|                                   Current Recipient                         Reserve?       |
|    Record                         Eff Date      Comment                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


RECIPIENT:
                   Enter the mnemonic for the record recipient.     A Lookup is
                   available.

                   The system then displays the recipient's full name and the
                   default number of days the record will be on loan
                   (specified for each recipient in the Recipient Dictionary).
                   You can choose to loan the record for a different length of
                   time by editing the DATE OUT and DUE BACK fields.


RECORD                    To identify the record you wish to move enter
                          one of the following:

                           *   The patient's primary unit number.

                           *   The patient's social security number, prefaced
                               by a pound sign (#).

                           *   The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
                               prefaced by an E#.
Move Record (13.2.2)                                                   Page 262




                           *   The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                           *   The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                           *   The patient's home telephone number, prefaced
                               by T#.

                               If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                               number within your facility, it replaces the
                               social security number.

                               If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                               unit number, the system erases the social
                               security number, leaving this field blank.

                           *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                               in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                               The system then begins a search of the Master
                               Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                               Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                               process).

                           *   An other number (i.e., a unit number
                               assigned by another facility or a number
                               assigned by a department, service, etc.).

                               As when you enter the social security number,
                               the system erases the other number, leaving
                               this field blank.

                       When you identify a patient by number or locate the
                       patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays
                       his/her primary unit number (if one has been assigned)
                       and name.


PORTION                Enter the name of the record portion you wish to
                       MOVE. A Lookup is available. Note that this is
                       not free text: even if you do use the Lookup, you
                       must still enter the portion exactly as it appears.

                       When you enter the portion, the mnemonic and name of
                       Its current recipient appear in the CURRENT
                       RECIPIENT field.

NOTE
          If the Record Locator and Incomplete Records features are LINKED
          and you choose to MOVE an incomplete record portion:
Move Record (13.2.2)                                                  Page 263




         The screen displays the mnemonic and name that the health care
         organization has assigned to its incomplete records area
         (e.g.,"ICR Incomplete Records Processing") after the CURRENT
         RECIPIENT prompt. The Incomplete record portion is automatically
         put on reserve.

         Later, when the portion is returned using the Return & Sign Out
         Reserved Records Routine, Incomplete Records Processing appears as
         the recipient next in line to receive the record. The portion can
         then be signed out to Incomplete Records Processing and returned to
         the incomplete records area.


PUT ON RESERVE         To make a reservation for the CURRENT RECIPIENT
                       (the reicpient from twhom the record is being
                       transferred), enter Y. If you do not wish to make
                       a reservation, enter N.

                       If you enter Y, when the record is returned to
                       Medical Records using the Return & Sign Out Reserved
                       Records Routine, the reservation appears and the
                       record can be signed back out to the original
                       (CURRENT) recipient. If you enter N, no
                       reservation is made. You must then use the Sign Out &
                       Reserve Records Routine to sign out or reserve the
                       record again.
Suspend/Resume Process (13.2.3)                                         Page 264



13.2.3:   Suspend/Resume Process


When the Incomplete Records and Record Locator features are NOT LINKED
(see Appendix D), this routine allows you to suspend and resume the processing
of an incomplete record. The record is SUSPENDED when it is removed from
Incomplete Records Processing (e.g., sent to the business office for an
audit). When it is returned, processing is then RESUMED.

NOTE:   When the Incomplete Records feature and the Record Locator feature
        are LINKED, you use the Move Records Routine to assign an
        incomplete record to a new recipient. In this case, the system
        automatically suspends the processing of that record until it is
        returned to the incomplete records area.


This routine allows you to specify the dates on which the record is removed
(SUSPENDED) and later returned (RESUMED). You first identify the
record and account number. The system then displays the discharge/service
date and the record portion to allow you to verify that this is the correct
record. You then enter the date on which the incomplete record is removed from
or returned to Incomplete Records Processing (i.e., the SUSPENDED or
RESUMED date).

Once the SUSPENDED date is entered, the system starts counting the number
of days the record is unavailable. It then subtracts this number from the
DAYS OUTSTANDING to obtain the number of DAYS TO PROCESS, which
accurately reflects the amount of time the record is available for the doctor
to complete.

Notification Letters, sent to all doctors responsible for completing record
portions, are based on the number of DAYS TO PROCESS.

In addition, each time an incomplete record is SUSPENDED, the system
updates the total DAYS TO PROCESS count for the record itself; this
value appears on the Process Incomplete Records screen.
Suspend/Resume Process (13.2.3)                                         Page 265

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                  Suspend/Resume Processing Incomplete Record                  |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Record:                                                                        |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|Account Number:                                                                |
|Discharge/Ser:                                                                 |
|                                                                               |
|Record Portion:                                                                |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|Suspended On     Resumed On                                                    |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


RECORD                  To identify the patient whose record you wish to
                        suspend or resume processing, enter one of the
                        following:

                             *    The patient's primary unit number.

                             *    The patient's social security number prefixed
                                  by a pound sign (#).

                             *    The patient's name, using up to 25 characters
                                  in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                                  The system then begins a search of the Master
                                  Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                                  Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                                  process).

                             *    An other number (i.e., a department or
                                  service number with your facility's prefix).

                                  If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                                  number (i.e., a unit number with your
                                  facility's prefix), it appears on the screen in
                                  place of the other number.
Suspend/Resume Process (13.2.3)                                          Page 266



                                  If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                                  unit number, the system erases the other
                                  number, leaving this field blank.

                      When you identify a patient by number or locate the
                      patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays
                      his/her primary unit number (if one has been assigned)
                      and name.


ACCOUNT NUMBER        Enter the account number associated with the
                      incomplete record portion. A Lookup is available.

                      When you specify the account number, the system displays
                      the discharge/service date for that account and the
                      record portion that is incomplete. Use this information
                      to verify that this is the correct record. The cursor
                      moves to the SUSPENDED ON prompt.


DISCHARGE/SER         The system displays the discharge date or service
                      date for the specified account number. This field
                      cannot be edited.


RECORD PORTION        The system displays the incomplete record portion
                      associated with the specified account number. This
                      field cannot be edited.


DISCHARGE/SER
                      The system dislays the discharge date or the service
                      date for the specified account number. You cannot
                      edit this field.


RECORD PORTION        The system displays the incomplete record portion
                      associated with the specifired account number. You
                      cannot edit this field.


SUSPENDED ON          Enter the date on which the processing of
                      the incomplete record is SUSPENDED, using the
                      standard date format or a T combination (e.g.,
                      T-1 for yesterday). The date must be later than the
                      discharge/service date. Dates in the future may be
                      entered.

                      The screen will scroll, if necessary, to accept as many
                      dates as you wish to enter.
Suspend/Resume Process (13.2.3)                                          Page 267



RESUMED ON            Enter the date on which the processing of the
                      incomplete record is RESUMED (the record is
                      returned to the Incomplete Records Processing).
                      The date must be later then the date on which
                      the record was SUSPENDED. You can enter
                      future dates.

                      NOTE:       When dates are filed, the
                                  system re-organizes them, if
                                  necessary, ibn chronological order
                                  (the earliest date at the top of the
                                  list, the most recent date at the
                                  bottom).
Enter/Edit Doctor Availability (13.2.4)                                 Page 268



13.2.4:   Enter/Edit Doctor Availability


Use this routine to enter or edit the dates on which a doctor is unavailable
to work on incomplete records due to illness, vacation, etc. The system will
automatically assign days of credit to the doctor when you use this routine.

When you enter the doctor's mnemonic, the system displays any previously
entered dates and allows you to edit these dates or enter a new date. When
you enter an UNAVAILABLE date, the system automatically assigns days of
credit to the doctor until a RETURNED date is entered.

The system subtracts the total number of days of credit from the total number
of DAYS OUTSTANDING to obtain the number of DAYS TO PROCESS for the
doctor (see the Process Incomplete Records Routine: "Completing a Record").

Note that Notification Letters are sent to doctors based on the number of
DAYS TO PROCESS. Therefore, this routine should be used to ensure that
the DAYS TO PROCESS accurately reflects the number of days the doctor has
had to work on all the incomplete records for which he/she is currently
responsible.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                        Enter/Edit Doctor Availability                         |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Doctor:                                                                        |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|        Unavailable Returned                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


DOCTOR                 Enter the mnemonic of the doctor whose availability
                       dates you wish to enter or edit. A Lookup is available.
                       When you enter the mnemonic, the full name of the doctor
                       appears in the field to the right.


UNAVAILABLE             Any previously entered dates appear in chronological
Enter/Edit Doctor Availability (13.2.4)                               Page 269



                      order (the most recent date appears last).

                      To edit a date:

                            Move the cursor to the date you wish to edit, then
                            delete the date and enter the desired date, using
                            the standard date format or a T combination
                            (e.g., T-1 for yesterday). Any date (past,
                            present or future) may be entered, as long as it
                            does not overlap previously entered dates.

                            When you delete the UNAVAILABLE date, the
                            system automatically deletes the RETURNED date
                            (if one was previously entered).


                      To enter a date:

                            Enter the date the doctor became unavailable, using
                            the standard date format or a T combination.

                      After the new date is filed, the system automatically
                      re-orders the dates in chronological order, if
                      necessary.


RETURNED              Any previously entered dates appear in chronological
                      order.

                      To edit a date:

                            Move the cursor to the date you wish to edit, then
                            delete the date and enter the desired date, using
                            the standard format or a T combination (e.g.,
                            T+1 for tomorrow). The date must be later than
                            the UNAVAILABLE date and may not overlap
                            previously entered dates.

                      To enter a date:

                            Enter the date on which the doctor returned (or
                            will return), using the standard date format or a
                            T combination.
Complete Records for One Doctor (13.2.5)                                 Page 270



13.2.5:    Complete Records for One Doctor


If a doctor returns several incomplete   records at one time, you can use this
routine to complete the records. When    you select this routine, you specify a
completion date and a doctor. You can    complete only those records for a date
which is not earlier than the date the   record became available to this
doctor.

Once you complete a record using this routine, the record is no longer
incomplete. The completed record is purged (removed) from the Incomplete
Records feature according to the hospital-defined parameters. The record can
also be removed using the Delete Incomplete Records Routine.



The Incomplete Records Feature and the Record Locator Feature:    The Link

When the Incomplete Records and Records Locator features are LINKED (see
Appendix D), you can use this routine to

     *    sign out a newly completed record to a recipient who has reserved that
          record

     *    reserve a record for a recipient if you need to process that record
          (i.e., if you need to take it from that recipient and enter it into the
          Incomplete Records feature)


When you complete a record that has been reserved, a message, alerting you to
the reservation, appears at the bottom of the screen. You can then sign the
record out to that recipient directly (i.e., you do not have to use the
Return & Sign Out Reserved Records Routine to do this).

If a record has been signed out and is later determined to be incomplete, you
can use the Process Incomplete Records Routine to assign it to Incomplete
Records Processing. At the same time, you can use this routine to make a
reservation for the recipient from whom you are taking the record portion.
Then, when the record is completed, you can use this routine to sign it back
out to that recipient.

See the Move Records and Sign Out & Reserve Records routines for details.
Complete Records for One Doctor (13.2.5)                              Page 271

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                Complete Records For Doctor                                 |
|============================================================================================|
|                                                                                            |
|Completion Date:                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|   Doctor:                                                                                  |
|                                                                                            |
|     Unit #      Name                       Account #     Reasons            Complete       |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


COMPLETION DATE       Today's date appears. To accept this date as the
                      date the record was completed by the doctor, press
                      <Enter>; otherwise, delete this date and enter the
                      appropriate date. You cannot enter a future date (e.g.,
                      T+2).


DOCTOR                Enter the mnemonic of the doctor who has returned
                      the incomplete records. After you enter the mnemonic,
                      the full name of the doctor appears in the field to the
                      right.

                      After you identify the doctor, a list of medical records
                      to be completed by this doctor appears. For each
                      medical record, the following information appears:

                            *   unit number

                            *   name of the patient

                            *   account number
Complete Records for One Doctor (13.2.5)                                   Page 272



                             *   reasons for the record's deficiencies


                      The cursor moves to the COMPLETE field for the first
                      medical record.

                      A Lookup of the MIS Doctor Dictionary is available. Only
                      doctors who have incomplete records assigned to them
                      appear in the Lookup. To identify doctors, you can also
                      use the name or expanded Lookup features, or both. For
                      more information, see the section titled "Identifying
                      Doctors."

                      Lookup:    MIS Doctor Dictionary, which shows the doctors
                                 who have incomplete records assigned to them

                      To see list of             Do the following:
                      doctors ordered by:
                      ___________________        _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                   Press <Lookup>, or type
                                                 PARTIAL,NAME and press
                                                 <Lookup>

                      Name                       Type N\ or N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                                 and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                                 N\JOHNS

                      --------------------------------------------------------
                      To see an expanded       Do the following:
                      list of doctors
                      ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                   Type /X or PARTIAL,NAME/X
                                                 and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                      Name                     Type N\/X or
                                               N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                               N\JO/X
                      --------------------------------------------------------

                      The following information appears in the expanded
                      Lookup:

                             *   mnemonic            *   if doctor has admitting
                                                         privileges
                             *   name
                                                     *   doctor type
                             *   service
Complete Records for One Doctor (13.2.5)                                   Page 273



                                                    *   telephone number
                             *   ABS service


COMPLETE               To complete this record, enter Y; otherwise,
                       press <Enter>. If there are other records, the cursor
                       moves to the next COMPLETE field. You can choose to
                       complete all or only some of the records.



Signing Out the Record to the Next Recipient

After you file this screen, you can sign out this record to the next recipient
directly, if

     *   the Incomplete Record and Record Locator features are LINKED

     *   a reservation for this record exists in the Record Locator Feature


In this case, the following prompt appears:

                  Sign out to [recipient] effective [date]?

To sign out the record, enter Y.



Completing Records Before Its Available Date

If the date you entered at the COMPLETION DATE prompt is prior to the date
a record is available, the following message appears:

                Completion date earlier than date available
                for [unit #] [account #] - not completed


To complete the record, exit from the routine and select it. Enter a correct
date, identify the same doctor, and enter Y at the COMPLETE prompt.
Delete Incomplete Record (13.2.6)                                      Page 274



13.2.6:   Delete Incomplete Record


This routine allows you to delete records from the Incomplete Records feature.
(Note that this routine will only delete the record from the Incomplete
Records feature, not from the Master Patient Index).

Incomplete records are completed using the Process Incomplete Records Routine.
Then, after a period of time specified by the hospital, the system
automatically deletes the completed records from the Incomplete Records
feature. The Delete Records Routine, however, allows you to delete a record at
any time.

You can delete any record with an ICR status of complete or incomplete.
Thus, you can use this routine to delete records which are now complete, as
well as records which were incorrectly entered into the Incomplete Records
feature.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                  DELETE INCOMPLETE RECORD                                  |
|============================================================================================|
|Record:                                                         Date Available:             |
|                                                                Date Complete:              |
|                                                                                            |
|Account Number:              Dis/Ser                   Days Outstanding:                    |
|Record Portion:                                        Days Suspended:                      |
|Box:                                                   Days To Process:                     |
|                                                                                            |
|     Doctor     Available Completed Reasons                                                 |
|                                     Comments                               CR              |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Delete Incomplete Record (13.2.6)                                       Page 275



RECORD                To identify the record you wish to delete from the
                      Incomplete Records feature, enter one of the following:

                            *   The patient's primary unit number.

                            *   The patient's social security number, prefaced
                                by a pound sign (#).

                                If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                                number within your facility, it replaces the
                                social security number.

                                If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                                unit number, the system erases the social
                                security number, leaving this field blank.

                            *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                                in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                                The system then begins a search of the Master
                                Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                                Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                                process).

                            *   An other number (i.e., a unit number
                                assigned by another facility or a number
                                assigned by a department, service, etc.).

                                As when you enter the social security number,
                                the system erases the other number and
                                leaves this field blank.


                      When you identify a patient by number or locate the
                      patient via a search of the MPI, the patient's name
                      appears in the NAME field, and the cursor moves to
                      the ACCOUNT NUMBER prompt.


ACCOUNT NUMBER        Enter the account number associated with the record
                      portion you are deleting. A LOOKUP is available.


After you enter the account number, all the information previously entered for
this record portion via the Process Incomplete Records Routine appears on the
screen, and the cursor moves to the DOCTOR prompt. Use this information
to verify that this is the record you wish to delete.

If this is the correct record portion, press <RETURN>.   The Delete? prompt
appears at the bottom of the screen.
Delete Incomplete Record (13.2.6)                                    Page 276



   If you wish to delete the record portion:

       Enter Y. The system deletes the record and clears the screen, and
       the cursor moves back to the RECORD prompt to allow you to enter
       another record.

   If you do not wish to delete the record portion:

       Enter N. The cursor returns to the DOCTOR prompt.   Press
       <EXIT> to return the cursor to the RECORD prompt.
Enter Doctor Information for the Doctor Visit Log (13.2.7)               Page 277



13.2.7:   Enter Doctor Information for the Doctor Visit Log


This routine allows users to log all visits made by a doctor to the Medical
Records Department for the purpose of completing charts. This routine, based
on the date entered in the VISIT DATE field, will affect the generation of
Incomplete Chart Notification Letters. The routine also allows the user to
enter a reason for the visit.

When a date is entered using this routine, doctors are credited with a visit to
the department. This credit, similar to completing a patient's chart in the
Process Incomplete Record Routine, postpones the generation of a delinquent
letter.

All visits entered in the routine can be listed by using the Doctor Visit Log.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                               Doctor Visit Log                                |
|===============================================================================|
|Doctor:                                                                        |
|                                                                               |
|Visit Date:                                                                    |
|                                                                               |
|Visit Reason:                                                                  |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


DOCTOR              Enter the mnemonic for the doctor who made the visit to the
                    Incomplete Records Area.

                    A Lookup into the MIS Doctor Dictionary is available.

                    Identifying a Doctor in the MIS Doctor Dictionary:

                    To see list of           Do the following:
                    doctors ordered by:

                    -------------------      ------------------------

                    Mnemonic                Press <Lookup>, or type
                                            PARTIAL, NAME and press
                                            <Lookup>

                    Name                    Type N\ or N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                            and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                            N\JOHNS

                    -------------------------------------------------
                    To see an expanded      Do the following
Enter Doctor Information for the Doctor Visit Log (13.2.7)                Page 278



                   list of doctors
                   ordered by:
                   -------------------------------------------------

                   Mnemonic                   Type /X or PARTIAL,NAME/X
                                              and press <Lookup>, e.g. JO/X

                   Name                    Type N\/X or
                                           N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, E.G.,
                                           N\JO/X
                   --------------------------------------------------

                   The following information appears in the expanded
                   Lookup:

                              *   mnemonic      *   if doctor has admitting
                                                    priveleges

                              *   name          *   doctor type

                              *   service       *   telephone number

                              *   ABS service

                   Entering a Doctor NOT in the MIS Doctor Dictionary

                   If the doctor is not in the Doctor Dictionary, enter the
                   doctor's name using up to 30 characters of free text. The
                   system responds with the message:

                              Not found.     NEW?   Y

                   To verify this entry as the family doctor, press
                   <Enter>.

                   To return to the doctor prompt, delete the Y and enter N


VISIT DATE
                      Enter the date the doctor you specified above came to
                      the Incomplete Records Area to work on deficient charts.
                      The date you enter here is taken into consideration at
                      the EXCLUDE DOCTORS WITH COMPLETED DATES WITHIN __ DAYS
                      prompt within the PRINT DOCTOR NOTIFICATION LETTERS
                      routine. If the doctor has been to the incomplete
                      records area to work on charts, even if he/she has not
                      completed them, he/she is credited for having worked on
                      them.
Enter Doctor Information for the Doctor Visit Log (13.2.7)            Page 279



VISIT REASON
                     Enter the reason for the doctor's visit to the Incomplete
                     Records Area. Ex: to sign attestation statements
Edit Portion Name (13.3)                                               Page 280



13.3:    Edit Portion Name


This routine allows you to edit the record portion name of an incomplete
record.

If the LINK between the Incomplete Records and the Record Locator features does
not exist, this routine will simply allow the editing of the incomplete record
portion name.

If the LINK between the Incomplete Records and the Record Locator features does
exist, the newer portion name will be signed out to Incomplete Records in the
Locator, unless it was previously signed out.

The portion name can be changed to a name that already exists in the Locator or
to a totally new name.

If the patient has other accounts with uncompleted incomplete records with the
same original portion name, nothing else will be done and the user will be
prompted with the following message:

"Note: Portion XXX is incomplete for other accounts of this record."

Otherwise, the following scenarios can occur:

1. If the original portion was signed out to Incomplete Records in the Locator,
the original portion will be returned. Users will be prompted by the system
with an option of "Change all reservations to new portion XXX" if the newer
portion does not have previously existing reservations.

If users answer "Y"es, all reservations will be cancelled for the original
portion and made for the new portion. If users answer "N"o, they will be
prompted with the option to "Cancel reservations for old portion XXX".

2. If the original portion was not signed out to Incomplete Records but to
another recipient in the Locator, users will only see the message: "Portion
XXX signed out to YYY. Cancel all its reservations?", where "XXX" is the
original portion name and "YYY" is the recipient.

If users answer "Y"es, all reservations for the original portion will be
cancelled in the Locator. If users respond "N"o, only the reservation for the
original portion for Incomplete Records will be cancelled.

Output

The output will be that the name of the incomplete record portion will be
changed to whatever the user chose. Also, using this new routine will generate
a "EDIT INC PORTION" activity on the output from the AUDIT INQUIRY routine (on
the MRI ADDITIONAL INCOMPLETE RECORD ROUTINES MENU).
Edit Portion Name (13.3)                                                Page 281

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                            Edit Incomplete Record Portion Name                             |
|============================================================================================|
|Record:                                                         Date Available:             |
|                                                                Date Complete:              |
|                                                                                            |
|Account Number:              Dis/Ser                  Days Outstanding:                     |
|Record Portion:                                       Days Suspended:                       |
|Box:                                                  Days to Process:                      |
|                                                                                            |
|     Doctor     Available Completed Reasons                                                 |
|                                     Comments                                CR             |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|New Record Portion:                                                                         |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+



RECORD                To identify the record for which there is an account
                      number whose record portion name you wish to edit, enter
                      one of the following:

                           *   The patient's primary unit number.

                           *   The patient's social security number, prefaced
                               by a pound sign (#).

                           *   The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
                               prefaced by an E#.

                           *   The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                           *   The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                               If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                               number within your facility, it replaces the
                               social security number.

                               If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                               unit number, the system erases the social
                               security number, leaving this field blank.
Edit Portion Name (13.3)                                                Page 282




                           *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                               in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                               The system then begins a search of the Master
                               Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                               Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                               process).

                           *   An other number (i.e., a unit number
                               assigned by another facility or a number
                               assigned by a department, service, etc.).

                               As when you enter the social security number,
                               the system replaces the other number with
                               either the unit number or leaves this field
                               blank (See above).

                      When you identify the record by number or locate the
                      patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays the
                      patient's primary unit number (if one has been assigned)
                      and name.



ACCOUNT NUMBER        Enter the account number associated with record
                      portion you are processing.

                      A Lookup is available.

                      After you enter the account number, all the data
                      previously entered for this record portion (via the
                      Process Incomplete Records routine) appears on the
                      screen, and the cursor moves to the area that contains
                      data which pertains to the incomplete record.

                      Use this information to verify that this is, in fact,
                      the record whose record portion name you wish to edit.



NEW RECORD PORTION    Enter the new record portion name. Press <Enter>
                      and the message "Change?" will appear.   If you wish to
                      change the record portion's name, enter "Y"es. If not,
                      enter "N"o.
Document History Report (13.4)                                         Page 283



13.4:   Document History Report


This report shows every action that has taken place (either on DG or MEDITECH)
for any scanned document with which one or more incomplete reasons have been
associated.

What one would see on this report:
* Medical Record Number
* Account Number
* Patient Name
* The actual number of the document that the system assigns and the Medical
  Record Form ID
* The date of the event (the date any action that has taken place on a specific
  scanned document) and time of the event
* If the event completed/COMP the document
* The type of event, i.e., scan or electronic signing etc.
* If the event was a rescan
* The name of the user (either signed onto DG/MedScan or the MEDITECH user) and
  the device that was used
* And a count of old/new reasons added to a given doctor line

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                            Document History Report                            |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|     Record                     Name                       Account #           |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|     From Event Date                                                           |
|     Thru Event Date                                                           |
|                                                                               |
|     Event Type                                                                |
|     Form ID                                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|     Include Unchanged Reasons?                                                |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Document Error Report (13.5)                                           Page 284



13.5:   Document Error Report


This report records errors that have occurred on a specific document that has
been scanned from DG to MEDITECH.

Information can include: the Medical RECORD number, ACCOUNT number, DOCUMENT,
EVENT DATE, TIME, COMP, TYPE, SCAN, USER NAME, DEVICE as well as the specific
PAGE, DOCTOR, REASON and ERROR that occurred.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                             Document Error Report                             |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Date                                                                      |
|Thru Date                                                                      |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FROM DATE                 Enter the date from which errors are to be
                          printed.

                          The default value is BEGINNING.


THRU DATE                 Enter the date thru which errors should be
                          printed.

                          The default value is END.
Scan Station Error Report (13.6)                                       Page 285



13.6:   Scan Station Error Report


This report records instances when an error occurs when sending images from the
Scan Station to MEDITECH. The error will be captured when a document has
signature placeholder associated to it.

Ex. If 3 documents are sent to MEDITECH and 2 of these documents have a
    placeholder associated, then there will be 2 errors transacted on this
    report.

These errors are generated per facility. One facility's error(s) will not be
tracked or seen by another facility in a market.

Fields on this report are: SCAN ERROR NUMBER, SCAN DATE, SCAN TIME, SCAN USER,
SCAN STATION, UNIT NUMBER, ACCOUNT NUMBER, DOCUMENT, FORM and ERROR TYPE.

Note: Not all fields will have information for every Error Type.

Ex. If the user was scanning a PRE or SCH account and assigned a placeholder
    to the document, there would be no visit information in MRI, causing the
    error. This type of error does not capture the Document number.

The scan transactions which cause the MRI sign-on error message to display
are transactions from DG to MEDITECH which are rejected by MEDITECH for one
of five possible reasons:

1. INCOMPLETE TXN: MEDITECH is unable to identify the patient based on the
   unit#/acct# information in the transaction.

2. NO VISIT:   The transaction is for a visit that does not exist in MRI.

3. ALL REASONS REJECTED: The transaction is one for which all reasons are
   rejected because either the doctor is not in the MIS Provider Dictionary,
   or the reason is not in the MRI Reason Dictionary.

4. IMAGE COMPLETE: The transaction is for an image for which all
   incomplete reasons have already been completed.

5. DUPLICATE TXN: The transaction is a duplicate of a transaction
   previously processed by MEDITECH.

Once the user has removed the error, the removal will be documented on the SCAN
STATION ERROR AUDIT TRAIL.
Scan Station Error Report (13.6)                                      Page 286

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                 Scan Station Error Report                                  |
|============================================================================================|
|Scan Error Number:                       Unit Number:                                       |
|                                                                                            |
|Scan Date:                               Account Number:                                    |
|                                                                                            |
|Scan Time:                               Document:                                          |
|                                                                                            |
|Scan User:                               Form:                                              |
|                                                                                            |
|Scan Station:                            Error Type:                                        |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


SCAN ERROR NUMBER
                      This field will capture, sequentially, the incident of a
                      scan station transaction error.
Scan Station Error Audit Trail (13.7)                                  Page 287



13.7:   Scan Station Error Audit Trail


This routine will compile a report on incidences of a user removing an error
using the SCAN STATION ERROR REPORT. The information captured on this report
includes: DATE, TIME, USER, DEVICE, ERROR TYPE, UNIT# and ACCOUNT# of the error
that was removed as well as the date and time, the scan station user, the form,
document and the scan station itself.

These errors are generated per facility. One facility's error(s) will not be
tracked or seen by another facility in a market.

Note: not all information will be included in all audit trails.

Ex. If the user was scanning a PRE or SCH account and assigned a placeholder
    to the document, there would be no visit information in MRI, causing the
    error. This type of error does not capture the Document number.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                        Scan Station Error Audit Trail                         |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Date:                                                                     |
|Thru Date:                                                                     |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FROM DATE         Enter the beginning date from which you want to see error
                  data.

                  The default value in this field is BEGINNING.


THRU DATE         Enter the beginning date thru which you want to see error
                  data.

                  The default value in this field is END.
Reporting Incomplete Records Information (13.8)                          Page 288



13.8:   Reporting Incomplete Records Information


This section describes the various reports that help to monitor the processing
of incomplete records. They include:

    *   A set of reports which list incomplete records outstanding for a
        specified number of days. Each of these reports sorts the incomplete
        records by a different category or set of categories (terminal digit,
        days outstanding, doctor and patient name, etc.). (See the table on the
        following page for the names of the routines used to generate these
        reports.)

    *   A list of the incomplete records signed out to specified locator
        recipients. (Use the List Incomplete Records by Locator Recipient
        Routine.)

    *   A list of records completed by specified doctors and the dates they were
        completed.

    *   A count of all incomplete records.   (Use the Count Incomplete Records
        Routine.)

    *   The incomplete record data for a list of records.   (Use the Print Record
        Routine.)

    *   The incomplete record data for a single record.   (Use the Print Record's
        Incomplete Portions Routine.)

    *   An audit trail of user activity for an incomplete record (Use the Audit
        Trail Inquiry Routine)



Incomplete Records Outstanding for a Specified Number of Days

For each these reports, you can choose to list all incomplete records
(i.e., those records outstanding at least 0 days), or records outstanding
for a specific number of days (e.g., fourteen or more days).

You can select reports which will list these records in one of the following
ways:

    *   In order of days outstanding (records outstanding longest appear first)

    *   In terminal digit order

    *   In alphabetical order by patient name


In addition, you can select reports which will supply this information for a
specific doctor or doctors. Finally, you can choose to specify a specific
Reporting Incomplete Records Information (13.8)                          Page 289



reason or reasons, along with the doctor(s), and list the applicable records
in terminal digit order.

The table below indicates the various ways by which the system sorts the
incomplete records once you specify the number of days outstanding. Use it to
select the report which best meets your needs.

These incomplete records reports (as well as the other reports described on the
previous page) are described in detail on the pages following the table. The
description of each incomplete records report routine includes a sample of the
report it generates.

_______________________________________________________________________________

          Incomplete Records Outstanding a Specific Number of Days
_______________________________________________________________________________

      If you want a report for               Use the following routine(s)

      All records outstanding for           List by Days Outstanding
      the specified time
                                             List by Terminal Digit

                                             List by Patient Name



     Records outstanding for the             List by Doctor and Days Outstanding
     specified time, for a specific
     doctor or doctors                       List by Doctor and Unit Number

                                             List by Doctor and Patient Name

                                             List by Completed Dates by Doctor



      Records outstanding for the            List by Reason and Doctor
      specified time, for a specific
      doctor or doctors, for a specific
      reason or reasons



Examples


1)   If you want to list all incomplete records, arranged in alphabetical
     order by patient name, select the List by Patient Name Routine.

2)   If you want to list all incomplete records for one doctor, arranged in
     terminal digit order, select the List by Doctor and Unit Number Routine.
Reporting Incomplete Records Information (13.8)                         Page 290



3)   If you want to list only those records which are incomplete for a specific
     reason, for any or all doctors, select the List by Reason and Doctor
     Routine.
ICR lists (14)                                                            Page 291



Chapter 14:   ICR lists


The Incomplete Records Lists Routine includes the following lists:

By Patient Name
This report lists, in alphabetical order by patient name, all incomplete
records outstanding for at least a user-specified number of days (e.g., "at
least 7 days").

The report includes the following information:

    *   unit number                       *   the Doctor's mnemonic

    *   patient name                      *   the Doctor's full name

    *   account number                   *    date the record became available
                                              to each doctor
    *   discharge/service date
                                          *   date the record was completed
    *   days outstanding                      by each doctor

    *   days to process                   *   reasons the record is incomplete
                                              (reason mnemonics from the MRI
                                              Incomplete Record Reason
                                              Dictionary)

By Terminal Digit
This report lists, in terminal digit order, all incomplete records
outstanding for a user-specified time period (e.g., "at least 7 days").

The report includes the following information:

    *   unit number                       *   date the record became available
                                              to each doctor
    *   patient name
                                          *   date the record was completed
    *   account number                        by each doctor

    *   days outstanding                  *   reason(s) the record is incomplete
                                              (reason mnemonics from the MRI
    *   days to process                       Incomplete Reasons Dictionary)

    *   doctor(s) responsible for
        completing the record portion

By Days Outstanding
This report lists incomplete records outstanding for a user-specified minimum
number of days (e.g., "at least 7 days"), sorted by the number of days
outstanding. The record outstanding for the longest time appears first on the
list, the record outstanding for the shortest time appears last.
ICR lists (14)                                                              Page 292



The report includes the following information:

    *   unit number                       *       date the record became available
                                                  to each doctor
    *   patient name
                                          *       date the record was completed
    *   account number                            by each doctor

    *   days outstanding                  *       reasons the record is incomplete
                                                  (reason mnemonics from the MRI
    *   days to process                           Incomplete Record Reason
                                                  Dictionary)
    *   doctor(s) responsible for
        completing the record portion

By Doctor and Patient Name
This report lists, for the doctors in the user-defined range, the outstanding
incomplete records (in alphabetical order, by patient name) for which each
doctor is responsible. You indicate the doctor(s) responsible for completing
the record(s) and enter the minimum number of days a record must be
outstanding before it is included on this list. The system then lists, on a
separate page for each specified doctor, all incomplete records outstanding
within the specified time period.

This report includes the following information:

    *   unit number                           *    days outstanding

    *   patient name                       *       days in process

    *   account number/                    *       reasons record is incomplete
        discharge/service date                    (reason mnemonics from the MRI
                                                  Incomplete Record Reasons
    *   date to doctor/                           Dictionary)
        full Doctor name

By Doctor and Number
This report lists all outstanding incomplete records (in terminal digit order)
for which each specified doctor is responsible. You indicate the doctor(s)
responsible for completing the records and the minimum number of days a record
must be outstanding before it is included on this list.

You can also choose to include only incomplete records in the records
processing area or to include all incomplete records.

The system then lists, on a separate page for each specified doctor, all
incomplete records outstanding for the specified time period. The report
includes the following information:

    *   unit number                        *       days outstanding

    *   patient name                       *       days in process
ICR lists (14)                                                           Page 293




    *   account number                     *   reasons record is incomplete
                                               (reason mnemonics from the
    *   date to doctor                         Incomplete Reasons Dictionary)

By Doctor and Days Outstanding
This report lists all incomplete records that are currently assigned to a
doctor, who is part of a user-defined range of doctors, that have been
outstanding for a user-specified minimum number of period (e.g., "at least 7
days"). The records are sorted by the number of days outstanding.

You specify a range of doctor(s) responsible for completing the records and
enter the minimum number of days a record must be outstanding before it is
included on this list. The system then lists, on a separate page for each
doctor, all incomplete records outstanding for at least the number of days
defined at the Print Records Outstanding At Least How Many Days field. The
record outstanding for the longest time appears first on the list, and the
record outstanding for the shortest time (within the specified period) appears
last.

The report includes the following information:

    *   unit number                        *   days outstanding

    *   patient name                       *   days in process

    *   account number/                    *   reasons record is incomplete
        discharge/service date                 (reason mnemonics from the
                                               Incomplete Record Reasons
    *   date to doctor/                        Dictionary)

By Reason and Doctor
This report of incomplete records outstanding for a user-defined minimum
number of days is sorted by the reason the record is incomplete and the doctor
responsible for completing it. You define ranges of reason(s), the doctor(s)
and then the minimum number of days outstanding. On a separate page (or set
of pages) for each reason, the system prints a list of records outstanding for
each doctor for at least as long as the number of days specified.

The output for the report is sorted by doctor; for each reason, all of the
records which have the same doctor will display together. After all of the
records for each doctor display, there will be a total line. This line will
appear in the following format:

          15 RECORDS LISTED FOR TRAY - MICHAEL TRAYNOR MD

Where "TRAY" is the doctor's mnemonic and "MICHAEL TRAYNOR MD" is the doctor's
full name.

For each record, the following information will appear:

          *   the doctor's mnemonic              *   the date the record went to
ICR lists (14)                                                             Page 294



                                                       the doctor
          *   the doctor's full name
                                                   *   the # of days outstanding
          *   the unit number
                                                   *   the patient's
          *   the patient's name                       discharge/service date

          *   the patient's account number

By Locator Recipient
This report lists, on a separate page for each recipient, all incomplete
records signed out of the Medical Records Department. (A recipient can be an
entry in either the MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary or the MIS Provider
Dictionary.) You can print this information for in-house recipients,
out-of-house recipients, doctors, or all three (i.e., ALL recipients). You
can thus use this list to locate incomplete records.

The Information Included on the Report

For each specified recipient, the report prints the recipient's mnemonic, full
name, address and telephone number (from the MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary
for in-house and out-of-house recipients, or from the MIS Provider Dictionary
for doctors).

Note: Phone numbers are formatted automatically. Upon input of data into a
PHONE field where the MIS parameter is defined, NPR applications attempt to
format the phone number. If the number can be formatted, NPR echoes back the
formatted result which is then stored.

Note that, in the case of MIS Provider Dictionary entries, the recipient's
mnemonic is prefaced by a d followed by a space. For example, if the report
is printed for Dr. Welby, and his mnemonic is WEL, the mnemonic appears on the
report as d WEL.

This recipient information is followed by the:

   *   date the record is due back in        *   discharge/service date
       the Medical Records Department
                                             *   doctor's mnemonic
   *   unit number
                                             *   doctor's full name
   *   patient name
                                             *   date the record became available
   *   portion name                              to the responsible doctor

   *   account number                        *   date the doctor completed the
                                                 record
   *   patient's type
                                             *   reasons the record is incomplete
   *   number of days outstanding

   *   number of days the record has
ICR lists (14)                                                         Page 295



        been available for processing

Completed Dates By Doctor
You can use this routine to print the Completed Dates By Doctor report which
lists all outstanding incomplete records completed by doctors.

The system then lists, for each specified doctor, all incomplete records he or
she completed. The report includes the following information for each doctor:

    *    the date the record was completed   *   the patient's name

    *    the patient's unit number           *   the patient's account number

The information about completed records remains in the system according to the
time specified in the MRI parameters or after the number of days equal to the
largest mnemonic in the MRI Notification Letters Dictionary (where the
mnemonic is used to denote a number of days) whichever is greater. After this
date, the system purges the information from the Incomplete Records Feature.

Average Days to Complete
You can use this routine to print a report which will list a physician's (or a
range of physicians) average number of days to complete records. This report
lists all incomplete records that were completed by a user-specified range of
physicians and have been completed for a user-specified range of dates. The
records are sorted by physician name.

You specify a range of dates that the record must be completed within before
it can be included on this list, and the physician(s) responsible for
completing the records.

The report then lists the number of records completed, the average days in
process, and the average days outstanding for each physician during the time
period specified.

Finally, the report lists (for all of the physicians), in a Summary line at
the end of the report's output, the total number of records completed, the
average number of days in process, and the average number of days outstanding.

Doctor Visit Log
This report lists all information captured in the Enter Doctor Information for
the Doctor Visit Log Routine. This information is purged based on the file
maintenance days defined in the parameters.
ICR lists (14)                                                        Page 296




+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                         MRI Incomplete Record List Menu [ ]                   |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|    ---- Lists ----                                                            |
|                                                                               |
|11. By Patient Name                                                            |
|12. By Terminal Digit                                                          |
|13. By Days Outstanding                                                        |
|                                                                               |
|21. By Doctor And Patient Name                                                 |
|22. By Doctor And Number                                                       |
|23. By Doctor And Days Outstanding                                             |
|                                                                               |
|31. By Reason And Doctor                                                       |
|32. By Locator Recipient                                                       |
|33. Completed Dates By Doctor                                                  |
|34. Average Days To Complete                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|41. Doctor Visit Log                                                           |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
List Incomplete Records by Terminal Digit (14.1)                           Page 297



14.1:   List Incomplete Records by Terminal Digit



You can use this routine to print the Incomplete Records List By Terminal
Digits report. This report lists, in terminal digit order, all incomplete
records outstanding for a user-specified time period (e.g., "at least 7 days").

The report includes the following information:

    *   unit number                         *   date the record became available
                                                to each doctor
    *   patient name
                                            *   date the record was completed
    *   account number                          by each doctor

    *   days outstanding                    *   reason(s) the record is incomplete
                                                (reason mnemonics from the MRI
    *   days to process                         Incomplete Reasons Dictionary)

    *   doctor(s) responsible for
        completing the record portion

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

NOTE:   For the same information, listed alphabetically by patient name
        instead of by terminal digit, use the List (Incomplete Records) by
        Patient Name routine.

        For the same information, listed by days outstanding (records
        outstanding the longest appear first), use the List (Incomplete
        Records) by Days Outstanding routine.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                            List By Terminal Digits                            |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Print Records Outstanding At Least How Many Days:                              |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PRINT RECORDS OUTSTANDING AT LEAST HOW MANY DAYS

                          The number O appears. To print the list of all
                          incomplete records, press <Enter>.
List Incomplete Records by Terminal Digit (14.1)                      Page 298



                      To limit the report to specific records (e.g., all
                      records outstanding at least 7 days), delete the default
                      number and enter the desired number of days (i.e., the
                      minimum number of days a record must be outstanding
                      before it is included on this list).

                      For example, when you enter the number 7, the system
                      will list all incomplete records outstanding for at
                      least 7 days.
List Incomplete Records by Days Outstanding (14.11)                        Page 299



14.11:    List Incomplete Records by Days Outstanding


You can use this routine to print the Incomplete Records List By Days
Outstanding report. This report lists incomplete records outstanding for a
user-specified minimum number of days (e.g., "at least 7 days"), sorted by the
number of days outstanding. The record outstanding for the longest time
appears first on the list, the record outstanding for the shortest time appears
last.

The report includes the following information:

    *    unit number                         *   date the record became available
                                                 to each doctor
    *    patient name
                                             *   date the record was completed
    *    account number                          by each doctor

    *    days outstanding                    *   reasons the record is incomplete
                                                 (reason mnemonics from the MRI
    *    days to process                         Incomplete Record Reason
                                                 Dictionary)
    *    doctor(s) responsible for
         completing the record portion

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

NOTE:    To obtain the same information, listed alphabetically by patient
         name instead of days outstanding, use the List (Incomplete Records) By
         Patient Name routine.

         To obtain the same information, listed in terminal digit order, use the
         List (Incomplete Records) By Terminal Digits routine.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                           List By Days Outstanding                            |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Print Records Outstanding At Least How Many Days:                              |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PRINT RECORDS OUTSTANDING AT LEAST HOW MANY DAYS

                           The number 0 appears. To print a list of all
                           incomplete records, press <Enter>.
List Incomplete Records by Days Outstanding (14.11)                   Page 300




                      To limit the report to specific records (e.g., all
                      records outstanding at least 7 days), delete the default
                      number and enter the desired number of days (i.e., the
                      minimum number of days a record must be outstanding
                      before it is included on this list). For example, when
                      you enter the number 7, the system will list all
                      incomplete records outstanding for at least 7 days.
List Incomplete Records by Patient Name (14.111)                                 Page 301



14.111:    List Incomplete Records by Patient Name


You can use this routine to print the Incomplete Records List By Patient Name
report. This report lists, in alphabetical order by patient name, all
incomplete records outstanding for at least a user-specified number of days
(e.g., "at least 7 days").

The report includes the following information:

    *    unit number                           *       the Doctor's mnemonic

    *    patient name                           *      the Doctor's full name

    *    account number                         *      date the record became available
                                                       to each doctor
    *    discharge/service date
                                                   *   date the record was completed
    *    days outstanding                              by each doctor

    *    days to process                        *      reasons the record is incomplete
                                                       (reason mnemonics from the MRI
                                                       Incomplete Record Reason
                                                       Dictionary)

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

In addition, if a doctor is entered in the BOX field of the Process
Incomplete Records Routine screen, his/her name will appear below the reason
mnemonics.

NOTE:    To obtain the same information (except for the DOCTOR BOX),
         listed in terminal digit order instead of by patient name, use the List
         (Incomplete Records) By Terminal Digits routine.

         To obtain the same information (except for the DOCTOR BOX), listed in
         order of days outstanding (records outstanding the longest appear
         first), use the List (Incomplete Records) By Days Outstanding routine.

NOTE:If the Incomplete Records and Record Locator options in MRI are linked
in the MRI parameter "Link ICR With Locator Recipient", the first 30 characters
of the locator recipient's name, if available, will appear in the SIGNED OUT
TO: field below the REASONS RECORD IS INCOMPLETE column header on the following
incomplete records reports:

     *   List   by   Patient Name
     *   List   by   Doctor and Patient Name
     *   List   by   Doctor and Days Outstanding
     *   List   by   Recipient
List Incomplete Records by Patient Name (14.111)                      Page 302




+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                             List By Patient Name                              |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Print Records Outstanding At Least How Many Days:                              |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


PRINT RECORDS OUTSTANDING AT LEAST HOW MANY DAYS

                      The number 0 appears. To print a list of all
                      incomplete records, alphabetically by patient name,
                      press <Enter>.

                      To limit the report to specific records (e.g., all
                      records outstanding at least 7 days), delete the default
                      number and enter the desired number of days (i.e., the
                      minimum number of days a record must be outstanding
                      before it is included on the list). For example, when
                      you enter the number 7, the system will list all
                      incomplete records outstanding for at least 7 days.
List Incomplete Records by Doctor and Number (14.1111)                   Page 303



14.1111:   List Incomplete Records by Doctor and Number


You can use this routine to print the Doctor's Incomplete Records List By
Terminal Digit report. This report lists all outstanding incomplete records
(in terminal digit order) for which each specified doctor is responsible. You
indicate the doctor(s) responsible for completing the records and the minimum
number of days a record must be outstanding before it is included on this list.

You can also choose to include only incomplete records in the records
processing area or to include all incomplete records.

The system then lists, on a separate page for each specified doctor, all
incomplete records outstanding for the specified time period. The report
includes the following information:

    *   unit number                         *   days outstanding

    *   patient name                        *   days in process

    *   account number                      *   reasons record is incomplete
                                                (reason mnemonics from the
    *   date to doctor                          Incomplete Reasons Dictionary)

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

In addition, if a doctor is entered in the BOX field of the Process
Incomplete Records routine's screen, his or her name appears just below the
Reasons mnemonics. If you include in the report incomplete records moved to
another location, the recipient's full name (up to 30 characters) appears in
place of the doctor box information.

NOTE:   To obtain the same information for records in the incomplete records
        area, listed alphabetically by patient name instead of by terminal
        digit, use the List (Incomplete Records) by Doctor and Patient Name
        routine.

        To obtain the same information for records in the incomplete records
        area, listed by days outstanding (records outstanding the longest appear
        first), use the List (Incomplete Records) by Doctor and Days Outstanding
        routine.
List Incomplete Records by Doctor and Number (14.1111)                    Page 304

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                       List By Doctor And Terminal Digit                       |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Doctor:                                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|Thru Doctor:                                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|Print Records Outstanding At Least How Many Days:                              |
|                                                                               |
|Include Non-(ICR recipient)?                                                   |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FROM DOCTOR           BEGINNING appears. Press <Enter> to start
                      the list with the first doctor in the Doctor Dictionary
                      (where doctors are arranged in alphamnemonic order).

                      For a more specific list, delete BEGINNING and enter
                      the letter or mnemonic identifying the doctor with which
                      you wish the list to begin. For example, when you enter
                      S, the list will start with the first doctor whose
                      mnemonic begins with the letter S.

                      A Lookup of the MIS Doctor Dictionary is available. Only
                      doctors who have incomplete records assigned to them
                      appear in the Lookup. To identify doctors, you can also
                      use the name or expanded Lookup features, or both. For
                      more information, see the section titled "Identifying
                      Doctors."

                      Lookup:    MIS Doctor Dictionary, which shows the doctors
                                 who have incomplete records assigned to them

                      To see list of            Do the following:
                      doctors ordered by:
                      ___________________       _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                  Press <Lookup>, or type
                                                PARTIAL,NAME and press
                                                <Lookup>

                      Name                      Type N\ or N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                                and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                                N\JOHNS

                      --------------------------------------------------------
                      To see an expanded       Do the following:
                      list of doctors
                      ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________
List Incomplete Records by Doctor and Number (14.1111)                      Page 305




                      Mnemonic                   Type /X or PARTIAL,NAME/X
                                                 and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                      Name                     Type N\/X or
                                               N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                               N\JO/X
                      --------------------------------------------------------

                      The following information appears in the expanded
                      Lookup:

                             *   mnemonic           *    if doctor has admitting
                                                         privileges
                             *   name
                                                    *    doctor type
                             *   service
                                                    *    telephone number
                             *   ABS service


THRU DOCTOR           END appears. Press <Enter> to end the list
                      with the last doctor in the Doctor Dictionary.

                      For a more specific list, delete END and enter the
                      letter or mnemonic identifying the doctor with which
                      you wish the list to end. For example, when you enter
                      T, the list will end with the last doctor whose
                      mnemonic begins with the letter T.

                      If you want to list incomplete records for only one
                      doctor, enter that doctor's mnemonic after both the
                      FROM DOCTOR and THRU DOCTOR prompts.

                      A Lookup of the MIS Doctor Dictionary is available. Only
                      doctors who have incomplete records assigned to them
                      appear in the Lookup. To identify doctors, you can also
                      use the name or expanded Lookup features, or both. For
                      more information, see the section titled "Identifying
                      Doctors."

                      Lookup:    MIS Doctor Dictionary, which shows the doctors
                                 who have incomplete records assigned to them

                      To see list of             Do the following:
                      doctors ordered by:
                      ___________________        _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                   Press <Lookup>, or type
                                                 PARTIAL,NAME and press
List Incomplete Records by Doctor and Number (14.1111)                       Page 306



                                                   <Lookup>

                      Name                     Type N\ or N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                               and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                               N\JOHNS

                      --------------------------------------------------------
                      To see an expanded       Do the following:
                      list of doctors
                      ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                 Type /X or PARTIAL,NAME/X
                                               and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                      Name                     Type N\/X or
                                               N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                               N\JO/X
                      --------------------------------------------------------

                      The following information appears in the expanded
                      Lookup:

                             *   mnemonic            *    if doctor has admitting
                                                          privileges
                             *   name
                                                      *   doctor type
                             *   service
                                                      *   telephone number
                             *   ABS service


PRINT RECORDS OUTSTANDING AT LEAST HOW MANY DAYS

                      The number 0 appears. To print a list of all
                      incomplete records, press <Enter>.

                      To select specific records (e.g., all records
                      outstanding at least 7 days), delete the default number
                      and enter the desired number of days (i.e., the minimum
                      number of days a record must be outstanding before it is
                      included on this list). For example, when you enter the
                      number 7, the system will list all incomplete records
                      outstanding for at least 7 days.


INCLUDE NON-<incomplete records mnemonic>?

                      This prompt appears only if the Incomplete Records and
                      Record Locator features are LINKED.
List Incomplete Records by Doctor and Number (14.1111)                Page 307




                      Y appears. To include all incomplete records,
                      regardless of its current location, press <Enter>;
                      otherwise, delete Y and enter N.

                      Assume, for example, the mnemonic for the incomplete
                      records area is ICR. The prompt appears as INCLUDE
                      NON-ICR?
List Incomplete Records by Doctor and Days Outstanding (14.11111)        Page 308



14.11111:   List Incomplete Records by Doctor and Days Outstanding


You can use this routine to print the Doctor's Incomplete Records List By Days
Outstanding report. This report lists all incomplete records that are
currently assigned to a doctor, who is part of a user-defined range of doctors,
that have been outstanding for a user-specified minimum number of period (e.g.,
"at least 7 days"). The records are sorted by the number of days outstanding.

You specify a range of doctor(s) responsible for completing the records and
enter the minimum number of days a record must be outstanding before it is
included on this list. The system then lists, on a separate page for each
doctor, all incomplete records outstanding for at least the number of days
defined at the Print Records Outstanding At Least How Many Days field. The
record outstanding for the longest time appears first on the list, and the
record outstanding for the shortest time (within the specified period) appears
last.

The report includes the following information:

    *   unit number                         *   days outstanding

    *   patient name                        *    days in process

    *   account number/                     *   reasons record is incomplete
        discharge/service date                  (reason mnemonics from the
                                                Incomplete Record Reasons
    *   date to doctor/                         Dictionary)
        doctor's full name

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

In addition, if a doctor is entered in the BOX field of the Process
Incomplete Records routine screen, his/her name will appear just below the
reason mnemonics.

NOTE:   To obtain the same information, listed alphabetically by patient
        name instead of by days outstanding, use the List (Incomplete Records)
        By Patient Name routine.

        To obtain the same information, listed in terminal digit order, use the
        List (Incomplete Records) By Terminal Digits routine.

NOTE: If the Incomplete Records and Record Locator ptions in MRI are
linked in the MRI parameter "Link ICR With Locator Recipient", the first 30
characters of the locator recipient's name, if available, will appear in the
SIGNED OUT TO: field below the REASONS RECORD IS INCOMPLETE column header on
the following Incomplete Record reports:
List Incomplete Records by Doctor and Days Outstanding (14.11111)                Page 309



      *   List   By   Patient Name
      *   List   By   Doctor And Patient Name
      *   List   By   Doctor And Days Outstanding
      *   List   By   Recipient

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                      List By Doctor And Days Outstanding                      |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Doctor:                                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|Thru Doctor:                                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|Print Records Outstanding At Least How Many Days:                              |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FROM DOCTOR                 BEGINNING appears. Press <Enter> to start
                            the list with the first doctor in the Doctor Dictionary
                            (where doctors are arranged in alphamnemonic order).

                            For a more specific list, delete BEGINNING and enter
                            the letter or mnemonic identifying the doctor with which
                            you wish the report to begin. For example, when you
                            enter W, the report will start with the first doctor
                            whose mnemonic begins with the letter W.

                            A Lookup of the MIS Doctor Dictionary is available. Only
                            doctors who have incomplete records assigned to them
                            appear in the Lookup. To identify doctors, you can also
                            use the name or expanded Lookup features, or both. For
                            more information, see the section titled "Identifying
                            Doctors."

                            Lookup:    MIS Doctor Dictionary, which shows the doctors
                                       who have incomplete records assigned to them

                            To see list of             Do the following:
                            doctors ordered by:
                            ___________________        _______________________________

                            Mnemonic                   Press <Lookup>, or type
                                                       PARTIAL,NAME and press
                                                       <Lookup>

                            Name                       Type N\ or N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                                       and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                                       N\JOHNS

                            --------------------------------------------------------
List Incomplete Records by Doctor and Days Outstanding (14.11111)          Page 310



                      To see an expanded         Do the following:
                      list of doctors
                      ordered by:
                      ___________________        _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                   Type /X or PARTIAL,NAME/X
                                                 and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                      Name                     Type N\/X or
                                               N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                               N\JO/X
                      --------------------------------------------------------

                      The following information appears in the expanded
                      Lookup:

                             *   mnemonic           *   if doctor has admitting
                                                        privileges
                             *   name
                                                    *   doctor type
                             *   service
                                                    *   telephone number
                             *   ABS service


THRU DOCTOR           END appears. Press <Enter> to end the report
                      with the last doctor in the Doctor Dictionary.

                      For a more specific list, delete END and enter the
                      letter or mnemonic identifying the doctor with which you
                      wish the report to end. For example, when you enter
                      X, the report will end with the last doctor whose
                      mnemonic begins with the letter X.

                      To list incomplete records for only one doctor, enter
                      that doctor's mnemonic after both the FROM DOCTOR
                      and the THRU DOCTOR prompts.

                      A Lookup of the MIS Doctor Dictionary is available. Only
                      doctors who have incomplete records assigned to them
                      appear in the Lookup. To identify doctors, you can also
                      use the name or expanded Lookup features, or both. For
                      more information, see the section titled "Identifying
                      Doctors."

                      Lookup:    MIS Doctor Dictionary, which shows the doctors
                                 who have incomplete records assigned to them

                      To see list of             Do the following:
                      doctors ordered by:
List Incomplete Records by Doctor and Days Outstanding (14.11111)         Page 311



                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                 Press <Lookup>, or type
                                               PARTIAL,NAME and press
                                               <Lookup>

                      Name                     Type N\ or N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                               and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                               N\JOHNS

                      --------------------------------------------------------
                      To see an expanded       Do the following:
                      list of doctors
                      ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                 Type /X or PARTIAL,NAME/X
                                               and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                      Name                     Type N\/X or
                                               N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                               N\JO/X
                      --------------------------------------------------------

                      The following information appears in the expanded
                      Lookup:

                             *   mnemonic          *   if doctor has admitting
                                                       privileges
                             *   name
                                                   *   doctor type
                             *   service
                                                   *   telephone number
                             *   ABS service


PRINT RECORDS OUTSTANDING AT LEAST HOW MANY DAYS

                      The number 0 appears. To print a list of all
                      incomplete records assigned to the specified doctor(s),
                      press <Enter>.

                      To select specific records (e.g., all records
                      outstanding at least 7 days), delete the default number
                      and enter the desired number of days ( i.e., the minimum
                      number of days a record must be outstanding before it is
                      included on this list). For example, when you enter the
                      number 7, the system will list all incomplete records
                      assigned to the specified doctors and outstanding for at
                      least 7 days.
List Incomplete Records by Doctor and Patient Name (14.111111)                   Page 312



14.111111:         List Incomplete Records by Doctor and Patient Name


You can use this routine to print the Doctor's Incomplete Records List By
Patient Name report. This report lists, for the doctors in the user-defined
range, the outstanding incomplete records (in alphabetical order, by patient
name) for which each doctor is responsible. You indicate the doctor(s)
responsible for completing the record(s) and enter the minimum number of days a
record must be outstanding before it is included on this list. The system then
lists, on a separate page for each specified doctor, all incomplete records
outstanding within the specified time period.

This report includes the following information:

    *       unit number                            *    days outstanding

    *       patient name                           *    days in process

    *   account number/                            *    reasons record is incomplete
        discharge/service date                         (reason mnemonics from the MRI
                                                       Incomplete Record Reasons
    *   date to doctor/                                Dictionary)
        full Doctor name

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

In addition, if a doctor is entered in the BOX field of the MRI Process
Incomplete Records routine screen, his/her name will appear below the reason
mnemonics.

NOTE:   To obtain the same information, listed in terminal digit order,
        instead of by patient name, use the List (Incomplete Records) By Doctor
        And Terminal Digits routine.

        To obtain the same information, listed by the number of days
        outstanding (records outstanding the longest appear first), use the
        List (Incomplete Records) by Doctor and Days Outstanding routine.

NOTE: If the Incomplete Records and Record Locator options in MRI are
linked in the MRI parameter "Link ICR With Locator Recipient", the first 30
characters of the locator recipient's name, if available, will appear in the
SIGNED OUT TO: field below the REASONS RECORD IS INCOMPLETE column header on
the following incomplete records reports:

        *   List   by   Patient Name
        *   List   by   Doctor and Patient Name
        *   List   by   Doctor and Days Outstanding
        *   List   by   Recipient
List Incomplete Records by Doctor and Patient Name (14.111111)          Page 313

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                        List By Doctor And Patient Name                        |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Doctor:                                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|Thru Doctor:                                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|Print Records Outstanding At Least How Many Days:                              |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FROM DOCTOR           BEGINNING appears. Press <Enter> to start
                      the report with the first doctor in the Doctor
                      Dictionary (where doctors are arranged in
                      alphamnemonic order).

                      For a more specific list, delete BEGINNING and enter
                      the letter or mnemonic identifying the doctor with which
                      you wish the report to begin. For example, when you
                      enter the letter W, the report will start with the
                      first doctor whose mnemonic begins with the letter
                      W.

                      A Lookup of the MIS Doctor Dictionary is available. Only
                      doctors who have incomplete records assigned to them
                      appear in the Lookup. To identify doctors, you can also
                      use the name or expanded Lookup features, or both. For
                      more information, see the section titled "Identifying
                      Doctors."

                      Lookup:    MIS Doctor Dictionary, which shows the doctors
                                 who have incomplete records assigned to them

                      To see list of             Do the following:
                      doctors ordered by:
                      ___________________        _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                   Press <Lookup>, or type
                                                 PARTIAL,NAME and press
                                                 <Lookup>

                      Name                       Type N\ or N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                                 and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                                 N\JOHNS

                      --------------------------------------------------------
                      To see an expanded       Do the following:
                      list of doctors
                      ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________
List Incomplete Records by Doctor and Patient Name (14.111111)             Page 314




                      Mnemonic                   Type /X or PARTIAL,NAME/X
                                                 and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                      Name                     Type N\/X or
                                               N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                               N\JO/X
                      --------------------------------------------------------

                      The following information appears in the expanded
                      Lookup:

                             *   mnemonic           *   if doctor has admitting
                                                        privileges
                             *   name
                                                    *   doctor type
                             *   service
                                                    *   telephone number
                             *   ABS service


THRU DOCTOR           END appears. Press <Enter> to end the report
                      with the last doctor in the Doctor Dictionary.

                      For a more specific list, delete END and enter the
                      letter or mnemonic identifying the doctor with which
                      you wish the report to end. For example, when you
                      enter X, the report will end with the last doctor
                      whose mnemonic begins with the letter X.

                      To list incomplete records for only one doctor, enter
                      that doctor's mnemonic after both the FROM DOCTOR
                      and the THRU DOCTOR prompts.

                      A Lookup of the MIS Doctor Dictionary is available. Only
                      doctors who have incomplete records assigned to them
                      appear in the Lookup. To identify doctors, you can also
                      the name or expanded Lookup features, or both. For more
                      information, see the section titled "Identifying
                      Doctors."

                      Lookup:    MIS Doctor Dictionary, which shows the doctors
                                 who have incomplete records assigned to them

                      To see list of             Do the following:
                      doctors ordered by:
                      ___________________        _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                   Press <Lookup>, or type
                                                 PARTIAL,NAME and press
List Incomplete Records by Doctor and Patient Name (14.111111)               Page 315



                                                   <Lookup>

                      Name                     Type N\ or N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                               and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                               N\JOHNS

                      --------------------------------------------------------
                      To see an expanded       Do the following:
                      list of doctors
                      ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                 Type /X or PARTIAL,NAME/X
                                               and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                      Name                     Type N\/X or
                                               N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                               N\JO/X
                      --------------------------------------------------------

                      The following information appears in the expanded
                      Lookup:

                             *   mnemonic            *    if doctor has admitting
                                                          privileges
                             *   name
                                                      *   doctor type
                             *   service
                                                      *   telephone number
                             *   ABS service


PRINT RECORDS OUTSTANDING AT LEAST HOW MANY DAYS

                      The number 0 appears. To print a list of all
                      incomplete records assigned to the specified doctor(s),
                      press <Enter>.

                      To limit the report to specific records (e.g., all
                      records outstanding at least 7 days), delete the default
                      number and enter the desired number of days (i.e., the
                      minimum number of days a record must be outstanding
                      before it is included on the list). For example, when
                      you enter the number 7, the system will list all
                      incomplete records, assigned to the specified doctors
                      and outstanding for at least 7 days.
List Incomplete Records by Reason and Doctor (14.1111111)                Page 316



14.1111111:   List Incomplete Records by Reason and Doctor


You can use this routine to print an Incomplete Records List By Reason And
Doctor report. This report of incomplete records outstanding for a
user-defined minimum number of days is sorted by the reason the record is
incomplete and the doctor responsible for completing it. You define ranges of
reason(s), the doctor(s) and then the minimum number of days outstanding. On a
separate page (or set of pages) for each reason, the system prints a list of
records outstanding for each doctor for at least as long as the number of days
specified.

The output for the report is sorted by doctor; for each reason, all of the
records which have the same doctor will display together. After all of the
records for each doctor display, there will be a total line. This line will
appear in the following format:

         15 RECORDS LISTED FOR TRAY - MICHAEL TRAYNOR MD

Where "TRAY" is the doctor's mnemonic and "MICHAEL TRAYNOR MD" is the doctor's
full name.

For each record, the following information will appear:

         *    the doctor's mnemonic             *    the date the record went to
                                                     the doctor
         *    the doctor's full name
                                                 *   the # of days outstanding
         *    the unit number
                                                 *   the patient's
         *    the patient's name                     discharge/service date

         *    the patient's account number

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.
List Incomplete Records by Reason and Doctor (14.1111111)             Page 317

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                List By Reason                                 |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Reason:                                                                   |
|Thru Reason:                                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|From Doctor:                                                                   |
|Thru Doctor:                                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|Print Records Outstanding At Least How Many Days:                              |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FROM REASON           BEGINNING appears. Press <Enter> to start
                      the list with the first reason in the Incomplete Reasons
                      Dictionary (where reasons are arranged in alphamnemonic
                      order).

                      To list the incomplete records by specific reasons,
                      delete BEGINNING and enter the letter or mnemonic
                      identifying the reason with which you wish the report to
                      begin. For example, when you enter D, the report
                      will start with the first reason starting with the
                      letter D in the Incomplete Reason Dictionary.


THRU REASON           END appears. Press <Enter> to end the report
                      with the last reason in the Incomplete Reason
                      Dictionary.

                      To list the incomplete records by specific reasons,
                      delete END and enter the letter or mnemonic
                      identifying the reason with which you wish the report to
                      end. For example, when you enter E, the report will
                      end with the last reason starting with the letter E
                      in the Incomplete Reason Dictionary.

                      To list the incomplete records for one particular
                      reason, enter the mnemonic for that reason after both
                      the FROM REASON and THRU REASON prompts.


FROM DOCTOR           BEGINNING appears. Press <Enter> to start
                      the list with the first doctor in the Doctor Dictionary
                      (where doctors are arranged in alphamnemonic order).

                      To list the incomplete records by specific doctors,
                      delete BEGINNING and enter the letter or mnemonic
                      identifying the doctor with which you wish the list to
                      begin. For example, when you enter W, the list will
List Incomplete Records by Reason and Doctor (14.1111111)                  Page 318



                      start with the first doctor whose mnemonic begins with
                      the letter W.

                      A Lookup of the MIS Doctor Dictionary is available. Only
                      doctors who have incomplete records assigned to them
                      appear in the Lookup. To identify doctors, you can also
                      use the name or expanded Lookup features, or both. For
                      more information, see the section titled "Identifying
                      Doctors."

                      Lookup:    MIS Doctor Dictionary, which shows the doctors
                                 who have incomplete records assigned to them

                      To see list of             Do the following:
                      doctors ordered by:
                      ___________________        _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                   Press <Lookup>, or type
                                                 PARTIAL,NAME and press
                                                 <Lookup>

                      Name                       Type N\ or N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                                 and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                                 N\JOHNS

                      --------------------------------------------------------
                      To see an expanded       Do the following:
                      list of doctors
                      ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                   Type /X or PARTIAL,NAME/X
                                                 and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                      Name                     Type N\/X or
                                               N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                               N\JO/X
                      --------------------------------------------------------

                      The following information appears in the expanded
                      Lookup:

                             *   mnemonic           *   if doctor has admitting
                                                        privileges
                             *   name
                                                    *   doctor type
                             *   service
                                                    *   telephone number
                             *   ABS service
List Incomplete Records by Reason and Doctor (14.1111111)                  Page 319



THRU DOCTOR           END appears. Press <Enter> to end the list
                      with the last doctor in the Doctor Dictionary.

                      To list the incomplete records by specific doctors,
                      delete END and enter the letter or mnemonic
                      identifying the doctor with which you wish the list to
                      end. For example, when you enter X, the list will
                      end with the last doctor whose mnemonic begins with the
                      letter X.

                      To list incomplete records for only one doctor, enter
                      that doctor's mnemonic after both the FROM DOCTOR
                      and the THRU DOCTOR prompts.

                      A Lookup of the MIS Doctor Dictionary is available. Only
                      doctors who have incomplete records assigned to them
                      appear in the Lookup. To identify doctors, you can also
                      the name or expanded Lookup features, or both. For more
                      information, see the section titled "Identifying
                      Doctors."

                      Lookup:    MIS Doctor Dictionary, which shows the doctors
                                 who have incomplete records assigned to them

                      To see list of             Do the following:
                      doctors ordered by:
                      ___________________        _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                   Press <Lookup>, or type
                                                 PARTIAL,NAME and press
                                                 <Lookup>

                      Name                       Type N\ or N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                                 and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                                 N\JOHNS

                      --------------------------------------------------------
                      To see an expanded       Do the following:
                      list of doctors
                      ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                   Type /X or PARTIAL,NAME/X
                                                 and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                      Name                     Type N\/X or
                                               N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                               N\JO/X
                      --------------------------------------------------------
List Incomplete Records by Reason and Doctor (14.1111111)                 Page 320



                      The following information appears in the expanded
                      Lookup:

                            *   mnemonic           *   if doctor has admitting
                                                       privileges
                            *   name
                                                   *   doctor type
                            *   service
                                                   *   telephone number
                            *   ABS service


PRINT RECORDS OUTSTANDING AT LEAST HOW MANY DAYS

                      The number 0 appears. Press <Enter> to print a
                      list of all records incomplete for the specified
                      reason(s) and assigned to the specified doctor(s).

                      To select specific records (e.g., all records
                      outstanding for at least 7 days), delete the default
                      number and enter the desired number of days (i.e., the
                      minimum number of days a record must be outstanding
                      before it is included on the list). For example, when
                      you enter the number 7, the system will list all records
                      incomplete for the specified reason(s), assigned to the
                      specified doctors and outstanding for at least 7 days.
List Incomplete Records by Locator Recipient (14.11111111)                Page 321



14.11111111:   List Incomplete Records by Locator Recipient


You can use this routine to print the Incomplete Records List By Recipient
report. This report lists, on a separate page for each recipient, all
incomplete records signed out of the Medical Records Department. (A recipient
can be an entry in either the MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary or the MIS
Provider Dictionary.) You can print this information for in-house recipients,
out-of-house recipients, doctors, or all three (i.e., ALL recipients). You can
thus use this list to locate incomplete records.

The Information Included on the Report

For each specified recipient, the report prints the recipient's mnemonic, full
name, address and telephone number (from the MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary
for in-house and out-of-house recipients, or from the MIS Provider Dictionary
for doctors).

Note: Phone numbers are formatted automatically. Upon input of data into a
PHONE field where the MIS parameter is defined, NPR applications attempt to
format the phone number. If the number can be formatted, NPR echoes back the
formatted result which is then stored.

Note that, in the case of MIS Provider Dictionary entries, the recipient's
mnemonic is prefaced by a d followed by a space. For example, if the
report is printed for Dr. Welby, and his mnemonic is WEL, the mnemonic
appears on the report as d WEL.

This recipient information is followed by the:

    *   date the record is due back in       *   discharge/service date
        the Medical Records Department
                                             *   doctor's mnemonic
    *   unit number
                                             *   doctor's full name
    *   patient name
                                             *   date the record became available
    *   portion name                             to the responsible doctor

    *   account number                       *   date the doctor completed the
                                                 record
    *   patient's type
                                             *   reasons the record is incomplete
    *   number of days outstanding

    *   number of days the record has
        been available for processing

For each recipient, the records are first sorted by the date that the record's
due back; for each date that at least one record is due back, they are sorted
by unit number (in numeric order); then, for each unit number, they are listed
by portion name (in alphanumeric order); finally, for each portion, they are
List Incomplete Records by Locator Recipient (14.11111111)               Page 322



listed by account number (in numeric order).

The Effect of the Link

When the Incomplete Records and Record Locator features are LINKED, the
system signs out incomplete records to ICR (or whatever mnemonic your hospital
has assigned in its parameters to the incomplete records area). Normally,
then, when these features are LINKED, most of the incomplete records will
be signed out to that location (i.e., ICR).

Therefore, when the features are LINKED, an additional prompt appears on
the screen which allows you to exclude all records signed out to the
incomplete records area (labeled EXCLUDE ICR).

You can thus choose to list only those incomplete records which are signed out
to locations outside of the Medical Records Department's incomplete records
area.

NOTE: If the Incomplete Records and Record Locator options in MRI are
linked in the MRI parameter "Link ICR With Locator Recipient", the first 30
characters of the locator recipient's name, if available, will appear in the
SIGNED OUT TO: field below the REASONS RECORD IS INCOMPLETE column header on
the following Incomplete Records reports:

     *   List   By   Patient Name
     *   List   By   Doctor And Patient Name
     *   List   By   Doctor And Days Outstanding
     *   List   By   Recipient

When the Incomplete Records and Record Locator Features are NOT LINKED

You can use this routine whether or not these features are LINKED. If they
are not LINKED, however, and you want incomplete records signed out to a
locator recipient to appear on this list, your portion names must be
consistent: the name assigned by the Record Locator Feature to the portion of
the incomplete record signed out must be the same as that assigned by the
Incomplete Records Feature.

Assume, for example, that an incomplete record has the portion name Volume 1,
assigned via the Incomplete Records Feature. The Incomplete Records and Record
Locator Features are not LINKED, and you sign out this portion to locator
recipient 2E via the Sign Out & Reserve Record routine. However, you enter Vol
I, instead of Volume 1.

Later, you want to check on the location of your incomplete records signed out
to 2E, so you use the List By Recipient routine and specify recipient 2E.
However, the incomplete record you signed out to 2E does not appear on the
list (since the portion name you entered does not match the portion name the
record was assigned via the Process Incomplete Record routine.)
List Incomplete Records by Locator Recipient (14.11111111)             Page 323

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                List By Recipient                              |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Recipient:                                                                |
|                                                                               |
|Thru Recipient:                                                                |
|                                                                               |
|Recipients (IN, OUT, DRS, ALL):                                                |
|                                                                               |
|Exclude 12                                                                     |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FROM RECIPIENT        BEGINNING appears. Press <Enter> to start
                      the report with the first recipient (in the appropriate
                      dictionary) who is responsible for incomplete records
                      signed out of the Medical Records Department.

                      If you choose (at the RECIPIENTS prompt) to list
                      in-house or out-of house recipients, the report includes
                      only entries in the MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary.

                      If you choose to list doctors, the report includes only
                      entries in the MIS Doctor Dictionary. If you choose to
                      list all three types of recipients, the report includes
                      entries from both dictionaries.

                      To print the report of outstanding incomplete records
                      for specific recipients, delete BEGINNING and enter
                      the mnemonic identifying the recipient with which you
                      wish to begin the report.

                      Assume, for example, that the Oncology Unit's mnemonic
                      is ONC (as defined in the MRI Locator Recipient
                      Dictionary). When you enter ONC, and select IN
                      at the RECIPIENT prompt, the report begins with the
                      Oncology Unit if it is responsible for any outstanding
                      incomplete records. If it does not have any
                      overdue records, the report starts with the next
                      recipient in the Locator Recipient Dictionary which
                      does have overdue records.

                      NOTE:   If you wish to print the report for specific
                              doctors, you must preface the mnemonics
                              with a d when you enter them at the FROM
                              RECIPIENT and THRU RECIPIENT prompts, in
                              addition to entering DRS at the
                              RECIPIENTS prompt.

                      Lookups of both the MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary and
List Incomplete Records by Locator Recipient (14.11111111)             Page 324



                      the MIS Doctor Dictionary are available. To view the
                      Locator Recipient Dictionary Lookup, simply press
                      <Lookup>. To view the MIS Doctor Dictionary Lookup,
                      enter a d followed by a space, followed by the
                      mnemonic or partial mnemonic. To identify doctors, you
                      can also use the name or expanded Lookup features, or
                      both. For more information, see the section titled
                      "Identifying Doctors."

                      Lookups of both the MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary and
                      the MIS Doctor Dictionary are available. To view the
                      Locator Recipient Dictionary Lookup, simply press
                      <Lookup>.

                      To view the MIS Doctor Dictionary LOOKUP, enter a d
                      followed by a space, followed by the mnemonic or partial
                      mnemonic.

                      To see list of           Do the following:
                      doctors ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                 Press d <Lookup>, or type
                                               d PARTIAL,NAME and press
                                               <Lookup>

                      Name                     Type d N\ or d N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                               and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                               N\JOHNS

                      --------------------------------------------------------
                      To see an expanded       Do the following:
                      list of doctors
                      ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                 Type d /X or d PARTIAL,NAME/X
                                               and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                      Name                     Type d N\/X or
                                               d N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                               d N\JO/X
                      --------------------------------------------------------

                      The following information appears in the expanded
                      Lookup:

                             *   mnemonic          *   if doctor has admitting
                                                       privileges
                             *   name
List Incomplete Records by Locator Recipient (14.11111111)                Page 325



                                                   *   doctor type
                             *   service
                                                   *   telephone number
                             *   ABS service


THRU RECIPIENT        END appears. Press <Enter> to end the report
                      with the last recipient in the MRI Locator Recipient
                      Dictionary or the MIS Doctor Dictionary who is
                      responsible for outstanding incomplete records. (See the
                      FROM RECIPIENT prompt for more information.)

                      To print a report of outstanding incomplete records for
                      specific recipients, delete END and enter the
                      mnemonic identifying the recipient with which you wish
                      the report to end.

                      Assume, for example, that the Radiology Unit's mnemonic
                      is RAD. When you enter RAD here and select
                      IN at the RECIPIENT prompt, the report will end
                      with the Radiology Unit if it is responsible for any
                      outstanding incomplete records.

                      If it does not have any overdue records, the report ends
                      with the last Locator Recipient Dictionary entry
                      preceding RAD which does have overdue records.

                      To print the report for only one recipient, enter that
                      recipient's mnemonic after both the FROM RECIPIENT
                      and the THRU RECIPIENT prompts. If you wish to
                      print the report for a doctor in the MIS Doctor
                      Dictionary, remember to preface the mnemonic with a d
                      followed by a space.

                      A Lookup for the MRI Locator Recipient is availble. To
                      see a list of eligible recipients, press <Lookup>. A
                      Lookup for the MIS Doctor Dictionary is available.

                      To see list of           Do the following:
                      doctors ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                 Press d <Lookup>, or type
                                               d PARTIAL,NAME and press
                                               <Lookup>

                      Name                     Type d N\ or d N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                               and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                               N\JOHNS
List Incomplete Records by Locator Recipient (14.11111111)                Page 326



                      --------------------------------------------------------
                      To see an expanded       Do the following:
                      list of doctors
                      ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                 Type d /X or d PARTIAL,NAME/X
                                               and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                      Name                     Type d N\/X or
                                               d N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                               d N\JO/X
                      --------------------------------------------------------

                      The following information appears in the expanded
                      Lookup:

                             *   mnemonic          *   if doctor has admitting
                                                       privileges
                             *   name
                                                   *   doctor type
                             *   service
                                                   *   telephone number
                             *   ABS service


RECIPIENTS            IN appears. Press <Enter> to select only
(IN,OUT,DRS,ALL)      the in-house recipients from the range of
                      recipients defined by the FROM RECIPIENT and THRU
                      RECIPIENT entries.

                      To select the out-of-house recipients (OUT) in that
                      range, delete IN and enter OUT.

                      If you accept the default range (i.e., BEGINNING to
                      END), and wish to print the report for doctors only,
                      delete IN and enter DRS.

                      You must also enter DRS at this prompt if you enter
                      a specific doctor or a range of doctors at the above
                      prompts (e.g., you enter d WEL at both prompts to
                      print the report for Doctor Welby).

                      To select all recipients in the specified range
                      (in-house recipients, out-of-house recipients and
                      doctors), delete IN and enter ALL.


EXCLUDE                Y appears. Press <Enter> if you wish the list
(ICR recipient)        to exclude the incomplete records signed out to your
List Incomplete Records by Locator Recipient (14.11111111)               Page 327



                      incomplete records area. (The mnemonic assigned to your
                      incomplete records area in your MRI parameters appears
                      after EXCLUDE.)

                      If you prefer to have the list include the
                      incomplete records signed out to your incomplete
                      records area, delete the Y and enter N.
List Incomplete Records by Completed Dates by Doctor (14.111111111)      Page 328



14.111111111:   List Incomplete Records by Completed Dates by Doctor


You can use this routine to print the Completed Dates By Doctor report which
lists all outstanding incomplete records completed by doctors.

The system then lists, for each specified doctor, all incomplete records he or
she completed. The report includes the following information for each doctor:

    *   the date the record was completed    *    the patient's name

    *   the patient's unit number             *   the patient's account number

The information about completed records remains in the system according to the
time specified in the MRI parameters or after the number of days equal to
the largest mnemonic in the MRI Notification Letters Dictionary (where the
mnemonic is used to denote a number of days) whichever is greater. After this
date, the system purges the information from the Incomplete Records Feature.

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                       Completed Dates By Doctor Report                        |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Doctor:                                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|Thru Doctor:                                                                   |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FROM DOCTOR            BEGINNING appears. Press <Enter> to start
                       the list with the first doctor in the Doctor Dictionary
                       (where doctors are arranged in alphamnemonic order).

                       For a more specific list, delete BEGINNING and enter
                       the letter or mnemonic identifying the doctor with which
                       you want the list to begin. For example, when you enter
                       S, the list starts with the first doctor whose
                       mnemonic begins with the letter S.

                       A Lookup of the MIS Doctor Dictionary is available. Only
                       doctors who have incomplete records assigned to them
                       appear in the Lookup. To identify doctors, you can also
                       use the name or expanded Lookup features, or both. For
                       more information, see the section titled "Identifying
List Incomplete Records by Completed Dates by Doctor (14.111111111)        Page 329



                      Doctors."

                      Lookup:    MIS Doctor Dictionary, which shows the doctors
                                 who have incomplete records assigned to them

                               -----------------------------------------------
                      To see list of           Do the following:
                      doctors ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                   Press <Lookup>, or type
                                                 PARTIAL,NAME and press
                                                 <Lookup>

                      Name                       Type N\ or N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                                 and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                                 N\JOHNS

                      --------------------------------------------------------
                      To see an expanded       Do the following:
                      list of doctors
                      ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                   Type /X or PARTIAL,NAME/X
                                                 and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                      Name                     Type N\/X or
                                               N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                               N\JO/X
                      --------------------------------------------------------

                      The following information appears in the expanded
                      Lookup:

                             *   mnemonic           *   if doctor has admitting
                                                        privileges
                             *   name
                                                    *   doctor type
                             *   service
                                                    *   telephone number
                             *   ABS service


THRU DOCTOR           END appears. Press <Enter> to end the list
                      with the last doctor in the Doctor Dictionary.

                      For a more specific list, delete END and enter the
                      letter or mnemonic identifying the doctor with which
                      you want the list to end. For example, when you enter
List Incomplete Records by Completed Dates by Doctor (14.111111111)       Page 330



                      T, the list ends with the last doctor whose mnemonic
                      begins with the letter T.

                      If you want to list incomplete records for only one
                      doctor, enter that doctor's mnemonic after both the
                      FROM DOCTOR and THRU DOCTOR prompts.

                      A Lookup of the MIS Doctor Dictionary is available. Only
                      doctors who have incomplete records assigned to them
                      appear in the Lookup. To identify doctors, you can also
                      use the name or expanded Lookup features, or both. For
                      more information, see the section titled "Identifying
                      Doctors."

                      Lookup:    MIS Doctor Dictionary, which shows the doctors
                                 who have incomplete records assigned to them

                               -----------------------------------------------
                      To see list of           Do the following:
                      doctors ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                  Press <Lookup>, or type
                                                PARTIAL,NAME and press
                                                <Lookup>

                      Name                      Type N\ or N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                                and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                                N\JOHNS

                      --------------------------------------------------------
                      To see an expanded       Do the following:
                      list of doctors
                      ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                  Type /X or PARTIAL,NAME/X
                                                and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                      Name                     Type N\/X or
                                               N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                               N\JO/X
                      --------------------------------------------------------

                      The following information appears in the expanded
                      Lookup:

                             *   mnemonic           *   if doctor has admitting
                                                        privileges
                             *   name
List Incomplete Records by Completed Dates by Doctor (14.111111111)       Page 331



                                                   *   doctor type
                            *   service
                                                   *   telephone number
                            *   ABS service
Average Days To Complete (14.1111111111)                               Page 332



14.1111111111:   Average Days To Complete


You can use this routine to print a report which will list a physician's (or a
range of physicians) average number of days to complete records. This report
lists all incomplete records that were completed by a user-specified range of
physicians and have been completed for a user-specified range of dates. The
records are sorted by physician name.

You specify a range of dates that the record must be completed by before it can
be included on this list, and the physician(s) responsible for completing the
records.

The report then lists the number of records completed, the average days in
process, and the average days outstanding for each physician during the time
period specified.

Finally, the report lists (for all of the physicians), in a Summary line at the
end of the report's output, the total number of records completed, the average
number of days in process, and the average number of days outstanding.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                       Average Days To Complete Records                        |
|===============================================================================|
|From Completion Date:                                                          |
|                                                                               |
|Thru Completion Date:                                                          |
|                                                                               |
|From Physician:                                                                |
|                                                                               |
|Thru Physician:                                                                |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


FROM COMPLETION DATE   The first date in the completed Incomplete Record
                       Index appears. Press <Enter> to start the list with
                       the first completion date in the completed index.

                       For a more specific list, delete the default date and
                       enter the date at which the list should begin.


THRU COMPLETION DATE   The last date in the completed Incomplete Record
                       Index appears. Press <Enter> to end the report with
                       the last completion date on the complete index.

                       For a more specific list, delete the default date and
                       enter the date at which you wish the report to end.
Average Days To Complete (14.1111111111)                                  Page 333



FROM PHYSICIAN         BEGINNING appears.   Press <Enter> to start

                      the list with the first physician in the MIS Provider
                      Dictionary (where physicians are arranged in
                      alphamnemonic order).

                      For a more specific list, delete BEGINNING and enter
                      the letter or mnemonic identifying the physician with
                      which you wish the report to begin. For example, when
                      you enter W, the report will start with the first
                      physician whose mnemonic begins with the letter W.

                      A Lookup of the MIS Provider Dictionary is available.
                      Only physicians who have incomplete records assigned to
                      them appear in the Lookup. To identify physicians, you
                      can also use the name or expanded Lookup features, or
                      both. For more information, see the section titled
                      "Identifying Physicians."

                      Lookup: The MIS Provider Dictionary, which shows the
                      physicians who have incomplete records assigned to them.

                      To see list of            Do the following:
                      physicians ordered by:
                      ___________________       _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                  Press <Lookup>, or type
                                                PARTIAL,NAME and press
                                                <Lookup>

                      Name                       Type N\ or N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                                 and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                                 N\JOHNS

                      --------------------------------------------------------
                      To see an expanded       Do the following:
                      list of physicians
                      ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                   Type /X or PARTIAL,NAME/X
                                                 and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                      Name                     Type N\/X or
                                               N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                               N\JO/X
                      --------------------------------------------------------

                      The following information appears in the expanded
                      Lookup:
Average Days To Complete (14.1111111111)                                 Page 334




                             *   mnemonic        *   if physician has admitting
                                                     privileges
                             *   name
                                                 *   physician type
                             *   service
                                                 *   telephone number
                             *   ABS service


THRU PHYSICIAN        END appears. Press <Enter> to end the report
                      with the last physician in the MIS Provider Dictionary.

                      For a more specific list, delete END and enter the
                      letter or mnemonic identifying the physician with which
                      you wish the report to end. For example, when you enter
                      X, the report will end with the last physician whose
                      mnemonic begins with the letter X.

                      To list incomplete records for only one physician, enter
                      that physician's mnemonic after both the FROM
                      PHYSICIAN and the THRU PHYSICIAN prompts.

                      A Lookup of the MIS Provider Dictionary is available.
                      Only physicians who have incomplete records assigned to
                      them appear in the Lookup. To identify physicians, you
                      can also use the name or expanded Lookup features, or
                      both.

                      For more information, see the section titled
                      "Identifying Physicians."

                      Lookup: The MIS Provider Dictionary, which shows the
                      physicians who have incomplete records assigned to them.

                      To see list of           Do the following:
                      physicians ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                 Press <Lookup>, or type
                                               PARTIAL,NAME and press
                                               <Lookup>

                      Name                     Type N\ or N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                               and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                               N\JOHNS

                      --------------------------------------------------------
                      To see an expanded       Do the following:
                      list of physicians
Average Days To Complete (14.1111111111)                                 Page 335



                      ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                 Type /X or PARTIAL,NAME/X
                                               and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                      Name                     Type N\/X or
                                               N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                               N\JO/X
                      --------------------------------------------------------

                      The following information appears in the expanded
                      Lookup:

                             *   mnemonic         *   if the physician has
                                                      admitting privileges
                             *   name
                                                  *   physician type
                             *   service
                                                  *   telephone number
                             *   ABS service
Doctor Visit Log (14.11111111111)                                     Page 336



14.11111111111:   Doctor Visit Log


This report lists all information captured in the Enter Doctor Information for
the Doctor Visit Log Routine. This information is purged based on the file
maintenance days defined in the parameters.
Count Incomplete Records (14.111111111111)                              Page 337



14.111111111111:   Count Incomplete Records



When you select this routine, the system immediately calculates the total
number of records, which currently are active in the Incomplete Records
feature, that have at least one incomplete portion (i.e., all records with an
ICR status of incomplete). It then displays that number on the screen.

This information can be used to satisfy JCAHO reporting requirements.

NOTE:   In multifacility systems, only the records entered via your facility
        (i.e. the facility you selected at sign-on) are counted.

The screen displays:

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                           Count Incomplete Records                            |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Counting incomplete records...                                                 |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+

A window, displaying the tally, appears:



                               Counted...[number]


When the count is complete, the system displays the total:

                       Incomplete records: n   <Enter>
Delinquent Record Count (14.1111111111111)                            Page 338



14.1111111111111:   Delinquent Record Count


This routine totals the number of incomplete records that are considered
overdue or "delinquent" for doctors based on the criteria defined in the
Enter/edit Delinquent Days for Patient Type Routine. The count is broken down
by Patient Type.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                           Count Incomplete Records                            |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Counting delinquent records...                                                 |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
Audit Trail Inquiry (14.11111111111111)                                  Page 339



14.11111111111111:     Audit Trail Inquiry



You can use this routine to print an Incomplete Records Audit Inquiry report
which includes all activities performed in the Incomplete Records Feature for a
user-specified record. This report allows you to check which activities were
performed, when they were done, and who are the responsible users.

After you identify a record and the account number, the system prints the unit
number, account number and name of the patient, and then lists the activities
that apply to this record.

An Enterprise Patient Identifer (EPI) has been created which can be used to
identify a patient across all facilities of the enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient. It will appear in the top section of the
report's output, next to the patient's name.

For a list of   possible activities, see the table below. The activity performed
listed in the   table are indented in the same way as on the report. The audit
trail records   the activities performed on the incomplete record from the time
it is created   (ENTER INC RECORD) to the time it is completed (COMPLETE INC
RECORD).

_______________________________________________________________________________

                       Incomplete Records Activities
_______________________________________________________________________________

     Activity performed                      Routine Used
                                             (notnoted on the Incomplete
                                             Records Audit Inquiry Report)

     ENTER INC RECORD                        Process Incomplete Record

     EDIT INC RECORD                         Process Incomplete Record

        ADD DOCTOR
        EDIT DOCTOR
        DELETE DOCTOR

        ADD REASON
        EDIT REASON
        DELETE REASON

        ADD COMMENT
        EDIT COMMENT
        DELETE COMMENT

        ADD CREDIT DAYS
        DELETE CREDIT DAYS
Audit Trail Inquiry (14.11111111111111)                                    Page 340




     COMPLETE INC RECORD                     Process Incomplete Record
                                                         or
                                             Complete Records for Doctor


     DELETE INC RECORD                     Delete Record
_______________________________________________________________________________


For each activity, the system includes the following information:

     *    date and time the activity was performed

     *    user mnemonic of the user who performed the activity

     *    DR #, which is the number that appears to the left of the
          doctor's mnemonic on the Process Incomplete Record routine


The number of days specified in the MRI parameters for maintaining this
information determines when the audit trail information is to be purged. When
the audit trail information is older than the defined number of days, the
system automatically purges the information.

NOTE:    This report identifies only the action taken, not the routine used
         to take that action. For example, when the Record Locator and
         Incomplete Records features are LINKED, records may be RESERVED via
         any one of three routines: Sign Out & Reserve Record, Move Record
         or Process Incomplete Records.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                 Audit Inquiry                                 |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Record:                                                                        |
|                                                                               |
|Account:                                                                       |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


RECORD                   To identify the patient whose Incomplete Record
                         activity you wish to track, enter one of the following:

                             *   The patient's primary unit number.

                             *   The patient's social security number prefixed by
                                 a pound sign (#).

                             *   The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
Audit Trail Inquiry (14.11111111111111)                                 Page 341



                                prefaced by an E#.

                           *    The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                           *    The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                           *    The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                           *    The patient's name, using up to 25 characters,
                                in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                                The system then begins a search of the Master
                                Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                                Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                                process).

                           *    An other number (i.e., a department or
                                service number with your facility's prefix).

                                If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                                number (i.e., a unit number with your facility's
                                prefix), it appears on the screen in place of
                                the other number.

                                If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                                unit number, the system erases the other
                                number, leaving this field blank.

                      When you identify a patient by number or locate the
                      patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays
                      his/her primary unit number (if one has been assigned)
                      and name.


ACCOUNT               Enter the account number associated with the
                      incomplete record you wish to track. A Lookup of
                      eligible account numbers is available.

                      NOTE: If Y is entered at the MAINTAIN UNIT #
                            ACROSS FACILITIES prompt in your MRI
                            parameters, you can only enter account numbers
                            which have the prefix of the facility to which
                            you are signed-on. If you attempt to enter an
                            account number with a different prefix, the
                            following message appears:

                                          Not a valid account #

                               This restriction ensures that all Incomplete
                               Record reports for each facility contain only
Audit Trail Inquiry (14.11111111111111)                               Page 342



                             information specific to that facility. (For more
                             information, see Appendix E: Multifacility
                             Systems and Appendix F: Patient Numbers.)
Print (Incomplete) Record (14.111111111111111)                           Page 343



14.111111111111111:   Print (Incomplete) Record


You can use routine to print the Incomplete Record Report. This report
contains information for a specific patient visit (identified by account
number). You may enter as many records and as many different account
numbers for a record as you wish.

You may also enter the same account number for a record more than once if you
want additional copies of a patient's Incomplete Record Report. For example,
you can print a second copy of the report as a deficiency slip and attach it to
the patient's record.

The system prints an Incomplete Record Report for each specified record portion
and account number in the order they were entered on the screen.
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                            Print Incomplete Record                            |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|     Record                     Name                       Account #           |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


RECORD                 To identify the patient whose incomplete record
                       information you wish to print, enter one of the
                       following (the screen will scroll, if necessary, to
                       accept as many records you wish to enter):

                             *   The patient's primary unit number.

                             *   The patient's social security number, prefaced
                                 by a pound sign (#).

                                 If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                                 number within your facility, it replaces the
                                 social security number.

                                 If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                                 unit number, the system erases the social
                                 security number, leaving this field blank.
Print (Incomplete) Record (14.111111111111111)                         Page 344




                            *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                                in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                                The system then begins a search of the Master
                                Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                                Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                                process).

                            *   An other number (i.e., a unit number
                                assigned by another facility or a number
                                assigned by a department, service, etc.).

                                As when you enter the social security number,
                                the system erases the other number and
                                leaves this field blank.


                      When you identify a patient by number or locate the
                      patient via a search of the MPI, the patient's name
                      appears in the NAME field, and the cursor moves to
                      the ACCOUNT # prompt.


ACCOUNT #             Enter the account number identifying the visit of
                      interest. A Lookup is available. Each time you enter a
                      record, you must enter a corresponding account number.

                      Note that you can enter the same record as many times as
                      necessary. Assume, for example, that patient Jane
                      Smith has three visits active in the Incomplete Records
                      Feature. To print all of the incomplete records
                      information for Ms. Smith, you enter her record in the
                      RECORD field three times, each time specifying a
                      different account number in the ACCOUNT NUMBER field.

                      If you wish to print more than one copy of the report
                      (e.g., you want a copy to use as a deficiency slip),
                      simply enter the record and account number again.
Print a Record's Incomplete Portions (14.1111111111111111)                 Page 345



14.1111111111111111:    Print a Record's Incomplete Portions



You can use this routine to print the Record's   Incomplete Portions report.
The incomplete records data for all incomplete   portion(s) of a single,
user-specified record appears on this report.    Once you identify a record, the
system prints the information that was entered   for that record via the Process
Incomplete Records routine.

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

NOTE:    If you prefer to print visit-specific data for a series of
         incomplete records, instead of all incomplete visits for one record,
         use the Print Record routine.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                      Print Record's Incomplete Portions                       |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Record                                                                         |
|                                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


RECORD                   To identify the patient whose incomplete record
                         portion(s) you wish to print, enter one of the
                         following:

                             *   The patient's primary unit number.

                             *   The patient's social security number, prefaced
                                 by a pound sign (#).

                             *   The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                             *   The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                             *   The patient's home telephone number, prefaced
                                 by T#.

                                 If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                                 number within your facility, it replaces the
                                 social security number.

                                 If the patient has not been assigned a primary
Print a Record's Incomplete Portions (14.1111111111111111)             Page 346



                               unit number, the system erases the social
                               security number, leaving this field blank.

                           *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                               in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                               The system then begins a search of the Master
                               Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                               Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                               process).

                           *   An other number (i.e., a unit number
                               assigned by another facility or a number
                               assigned by a department, service, etc.).

                               As when you enter the social security number,
                               the system replaces the other number with
                               either the unit number or leaves this field
                               blank (See above).


                      When you identify a patient by number or locate the
                      patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays
                      his/her primary unit number (if one has been assigned)
                      and name.


After the report prints, the cursor returns to the RECORD prompt to allow
you to enter another record.
Productivity Report (14.11111111111111111)                              Page 347



14.11111111111111111:   Productivity Report


This report totals, based on a specified date range, the number of times a user
group or individual user filed activity in the Process Incomplete Record
Routine. This report can help managers in the Medical Records Department track
user activity for incomplete records

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                        Incomplete Record Productivity                         |
|===============================================================================|
|Beginning Date:                                                                |
|                                                                               |
|Ending Date:                                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|For User Group:                                                                |
|                                                                               |
|For Individual Users:                                                          |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


BEGINNING DATE          Enter the beginning date on which you want
                        the system to begin to calculate the productivity
                        report. Use the standard format or a T combination
                        (e.g., T-1 for yesterday).


ENDING DATE             Enter the date through which you want the system
                        to calculate the productivity report. Use the standard
                        date format or a T combination (e.g., T-1 for
                        yesterday).




USER GROUP              Enter the group of users for whom you want to
                        run this productivity report. If you choose a user
                        group, you cannot reach the Individual Users prompt.

                        Lookup: MIS Distribution Group Dictionary.


FOR INDIVIDUAL USERS
                        Enter the mnemonic of the user for whom you wish to run
                        the productivity report. You may also accept the
                        default of ALL for all users entered in the MIS USER
                        dictionary.

                        Lookup: MIS User Dictionary
Analysis Report By User And Provider (14.111111111111111111)            Page 348



14.111111111111111111:    Analysis Report By User And Provider


This report totals, based on a specified date range, the number of times a user
analyzed/edited/created an Incomplete Record by adding deficiencies and/or
doctors. This report can help managers in the Medical Records Department track
user activity for incomplete records.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                Incomplete Record Analysis By User And Provider                |
|===============================================================================|
|Beginning Date:                                                                |
|Ending Date:                                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|From User:                                                                     |
|Thru User:                                                                     |
|                                                                               |
|From Provider:                                                                 |
|Thru Provider:                                                                 |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


BEGINNING DATE           Enter the earliest date from which you want the
                         system to display the report. Use the standard format,
                         or a T combination (e.g., T-1 for yesterday).


ENDING DATE              Enter the last date through which you want the
                         system to display the report. Use the standard date
                         format, or a T combination (e.g., T-1 for yesterday).




FROM USER                Enter the mnemonic of the first user from whom you
                         wish to run the report. You may also accept the default
                         of BEGINNING to start with the first user.

                         Lookup:   MIS User Dictionary


THRU USER                Enter the mnemonic of the ending user for whom you
                         wish to run the report through. You may also accept the
                         default of END to include through the last user in
                         the dictionary.

                         Lookup:   MIS User Dictionary
Analysis Report By User And Provider (14.111111111111111111)          Page 349



FROM PROVIDER         Enter the mnemonic of the first provider from whom
                      you wish to run the report. You may also accept the
                      default value of BEGINNING to start with the first
                      provider in the dictionary.

                      On the output of the report, the full name of the
                      provider displays in the field to the right of the
                      mnemonic.

                      Lookup:   MIS Provider Dictionary


THRU PROVIDER         Enter the mnemonic of the last provider through whom
                      you wish to appear on the report. You may also accept
                      the default value of END to end with the last
                      provider in the dictionary.

                      On the output of the report, the full name of the
                      provider displays in the field to the right of the
                      mnemonic.

                      Lookup:   MIS Provider Dictionary
Completion Report By User And Provider (14.1111111111111111111)        Page 350



14.1111111111111111111:   Completion Report By User And Provider


This report totals, based on a specified Completion Date range, the number of
times a user completed deficiencies for a doctor on an incomplete record. This
report can help managers in the Medical Records Department track user activity
for incomplete records.

NOTE:   The dates used in this report are the Completion Dates from the former
        Incomplete Record.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                Incomplete Record Completion By User And Provider              |
|===============================================================================|
|Beginning Date:                                                                |
|Ending Date:                                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|From User:                                                                     |
|Thru User:                                                                     |
|                                                                               |
|From Provider:                                                                 |
|Thru Provider:                                                                 |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


BEGINNING DATE         Enter the earliest date from which you want the
                       system to display the report. Use the standard format,
                       or a T combination (e.g., T-1 for yesterday).


ENDING DATE            Enter the last date through which you want the
                       system to display the report. Use the standard date
                       format, or a T combination (e.g., T-1 for yesterday).




FROM USER              Enter the mnemonic of the first user from whom you
                       wish to run the report. You may also accept the default
                       of BEGINNING to start with the first user.

                       Lookup:   MIS User Dictionary


THRU USER              Enter the mnemonic of the ending user for whom you
                       wish to run the report through. You may also accept the
                       default of END to include through the last user in
                       the dictionary.
Completion Report By User And Provider (14.1111111111111111111)       Page 351



                      Lookup:   MIS User Dictionary


FROM PROVIDER         Enter the mnemonic of the first provider from whom
                      you wish to run the report. You may also accept the
                      default value of BEGINNING to start with the first
                      provider in the dictionary.

                      On the output of the report, the full name of the
                      provider displays in the field to the right of the
                      mnemonic.

                      Lookup:   MIS Provider Dictionary


THRU PROVIDER         Enter the mnemonic of the last provider through whom
                      you wish to appear on the report. You may also accept
                      the default value of END to end with the last
                      provider in the dictionary.

                      On the output of the report, the full name of the
                      provider displays in the field to the right of the
                      mnemonic.

                      Lookup:   MIS Provider Dictionary
Printing Notification Letters (14.1111111111111111112)                   Page 352



14.1111111111111111112:   Printing Notification Letters


Before you can print Notification letters via the Print Notification Letters
Routine, you first define dictionary entries in the Enter/Edit Notification
Letters Routine. For more information about the dictionary routines, see the
sections titled

    *   Enter/Edit Notification Letter

    *   Listing Entries in Letter Dictionaries


These two sections appear in the chapter titled "Letters, Outguides and Labels:
Dictionary Routines." This chapter also includes sections that contain

    *   general information about creating letters, outguides and labels

    *   lists of data elements that you can insert in the text of your
        letters, outguides and labels

    *   guidelines for entering and editing letters, outguides and labels in
        dictionary routines

    *   sample letters, outguides and labels


For information about the Print Notification Letters Routine, see the next
section.
Print Notification Letters (14.1111111111111111112.1)                  Page 353



14.1111111111111111112.1:   Print Notification Letters


Use this routine to print Notification Letters addressed to user-defined ranges
of doctors (providers), including non-physician providers. These letters,
which can then be sent to the doctors, inform them that they must come to the
Medical Records Department and complete the record portions for which they are
responsible. For a sample of a Notification Letter, see the section titled
"Sample Letters, Outguides and Labels."

The system generates the appropriate letter (selected from the Notification
Letters Dictionary) for each doctor specified, based on the number of days the
record has been available to that doctor for processing. See the overview of
the Incomplete Records feature for more information on DAYS TO PROCESS.

Determining Which Letter Will Print

The system automatically prints the most appropriate letter in the Notification
Letters Dictionary for each doctor selected.

Assume, for example, you create three letters (using the Enter/Edit
Notification Letters routine): a "Zero Days Outstanding Letter", a "Seven Days
Outstanding Letter" and a "Twenty-One Days Outstanding Letter."

When the incomplete record becomes available to the doctor for processing, you
can use the Print Notification Letters routine to generate a "Zero Days
Outstanding Letter" letter addressed to the doctor responsible for completing
that record.

If the record has been outstanding for eight days when you use this routine to
print notification letters, the system would generate a "Seven Days Outstanding
Letter" addressed to the doctor (i.e., the record has been outstanding between
seven and twenty-one days). If the record is outstanding for at least
twenty-one days, the system would generate a "Twenty-One Days Outstanding
Letter."

Selecting Doctors For Whom to Print Letters

You can use this routine to specify a series of ranges of doctors within which
you want the system to search for doctors with outstanding incomplete records.
In addition, you can exclude all doctors who have completed records (any
record) within a certain, user-defined number of days (using the Exclude
Doctors With Completed Dates Within ___ Days field). You can thus save the cost
of sending unnecessary notification letters to doctors.

An Example

Assume you know that five doctors whose mnemonics begin with A or D still had
outstanding records several days ago. You also know that yesterday Dr. Dennis
completed several records and that Dr. Casey has been out of town for four
days. You can specify two ranges of doctor mnemonics to exclude Dr. Casey and
exclude doctors who completed records the past two days. You can use this
Print Notification Letters (14.1111111111111111112.1)                       Page 354



routine efficiently by entering the following information on the screen:

                       FROM DOCTOR         THRU DOCTOR



                       A                   CAR
                       CAT                 D




                       EXCLUDE DOCTORS WITH COMPLETED DATES WITHIN    4   DAYS


The system would print the appropriate letters for the doctors except for
Dr. Casey and Dr. Dennis. The system prints all other applicable notification
letters.

When a Doctor is Responsible for More than One Record

In cases where a doctor is responsible for more than one record, the record
which has been outstanding for the longest period of time determines which
letter that doctor receives.

For example, one of the doctors you have specified is responsible for three
records: the first has been available for twenty-three days, the second has
been available for eight days, and the third has just arrived in the Incomplete
Records Processing Department. When you print the letters, this doctor will
get only the "Twenty-One Days Outstanding Letter" (although all records for
which the doctor is responsible will be listed).

The Doctor Notification Letters Control Report

After the last letter is printed, the system generates a Doctor Notification
Letters Control report. This report provides the Medical Records Department
with a record of which letters were sent to which doctors.

For each of the doctors selected, this report displays that doctor's mnemonic
and the mnemonic of the letter generated for that doctor. (Doctors appear in
alphamnemonic order.) The report then lists the following information for each
incomplete record portion for which that doctor is responsible:

    *   unit number                              *   account number

    *   patient name                             *   days (to process--records in
                                                     process longest appear last)

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

NOTE:   The Completed Dates By Doctor routine allows you to report when
        doctors completed the records for which they are responsible.
Print Notification Letters (14.1111111111111111112.1)                     Page 355

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                       Print Doctor Notification Letters                       |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Doctor    Thru Doctor                                                     |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|Exclude Doctors With Completed Dates Within                                    |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


Use the next two prompts, FROM DOCTOR and THRU DOCTOR, to define a
range or ranges of doctors for whom you want to print notification letters.
You can select doctors listed by their mnemonics (not name) in the MIS Provider
Dictionary by specifying ranges of doctor mnemonics

     *   that are contiguous entries in the dictionary

     *   from different parts of the dictionary, including one doctor at a time


Note that doctors are arranged in alphamnemonic order in the MIS Doctor
Dictionary.


FROM DOCTOR            BEGINNING appears. To start printing with the
                       letter addressed to the first doctor listed in the MIS
                       Provider Dictionary who is responsible for completing a
                       record, press <Enter>.

                       To send a letter to specific doctors, delete
                       BEGINNING and enter the letter or mnemonic
                       identifying the doctor with which you want to begin.
                       For example, when you enter W, the letters start
                       with the one addressed to the first doctor in the MIS
                       Doctor Dictionary whose mnemonic begins with W
                       who is also responsible for completing records.

                       You can specify as many ranges of doctor mnemonics as
                       you want.

                       A Lookup of the MIS Provider Dictionary is available.
                       To identify doctors, you can also the name or expanded
                       Lookup features, or both. For more information, see the
                       section titled "Identifying Doctors."
Print Notification Letters (14.1111111111111111112.1)                      Page 356



                      Lookup:    MIS Provider Dictionary, which shows the
                                 doctors who have incomplete records assigned to
                                 them

                      To see list of            Do the following:
                      doctors ordered by:
                      ___________________       _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                  Press <Lookup>, or type
                                                PARTIAL,NAME and press
                                                <Lookup>

                      Name                      Type N\ or N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                                and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                                N\JOHNS

                      --------------------------------------------------------
                      To see an expanded       Do the following:
                      list of doctors
                      ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                  Type /X or PARTIAL,NAME/X
                                                and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                      Name                     Type N\/X or
                                               N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                               N\JO/X
                      --------------------------------------------------------

                      The following information appears in the expanded
                      Lookup:

                             *   mnemonic           *   if doctor has admitting
                                                        privileges
                             *   name
                                                    *   doctor type
                             *   service
                                                    *   telephone number
                             *   ABS service


THRU DOCTOR           END appears. To end with the letter addressed
                      to the last doctor in the MIS Provider Dictionary who is
                      responsible for completing records, press <Enter>.

                      To send a letter to specific doctors, delete END and
                      enter the letter or mnemonic identifying the doctor with
                      which you wish the letters to end for the range you are
                      specifying.
Print Notification Letters (14.1111111111111111112.1)                    Page 357




                      For example, when you enter X, the letters end with
                      the one addressed to the last doctor (specified in this
                      range) under X in the Doctor Dictionary who is also
                      responsible for completing records.

                      To print the appropriate letter for only one doctor in a
                      range, enter that doctor's mnemonic after both the
                      FROM DOCTOR and the THRU DOCTOR prompts.

A Lookup of the MIS Provider Dictionary is available. To identify doctors, you
can also the name or expanded Lookup features, or both. For more information,
see the section titled "Identifying Doctors."


                                            Lookup: MIS Provider Dictionary,
                                            which shows the doctors who have
                                            incomplete records assigned to them

                      To see list of           Do the following:
                      doctors ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                 Press <Lookup>, or type
                                               PARTIAL,NAME and press
                                               <Lookup>

                      Name                     Type N\ or N\PARTIAL,NAME
                                               and press <Lookup>, e.g.,
                                               N\JOHNS

                      --------------------------------------------------------
                      To see an expanded       Do the following:
                      list of doctors
                      ordered by:
                      ___________________      _______________________________

                      Mnemonic                 Type /X or PARTIAL,NAME/X
                                               and press <Lookup>, e.g., JO/X

                      Name                     Type N\/X or
                                               N\PARTIAL,NAME/X, e.g.,
                                               N\JO/X
                      --------------------------------------------------------

                      The following information appears in the expanded
                      Lookup:

                             *   mnemonic          *    if doctor has admitting
                                                        privileges
Print Notification Letters (14.1111111111111111112.1)                       Page 358



                             *   name
                                                    *    doctor type
                             *   service
                                                    *    telephone number
                             *   ABS service


EXCLUDE DOCTORS WITH COMPLETED DATES WITHIN ___ DAYS

                        0 appears. To print all applicable notification
                        letters, press <Enter>. To exclude doctors who have
                        completed records (any records) within a specified
                        number of days, delete the 0 and enter the
                        appropriate number of days.


NOTE:   If your letter includes the data elements [BALANCE] or [PAT.BAL] and
        the Billing and Accounts Receivable (B/AR) Module is located on a
        different segment, the segment on which you are working should be
        connected to the B/AR segment. If the MRI segment and the B/AR segment
        are not connected, the following message appears:

                  Cannot link to B/AR to get balances.   Continue?

        To print the letters without the balances, enter Y.   To cancel the
        printing, enter N.
The Record Locator Feature (15)                                          Page 359



Chapter 15:    The Record Locator Feature


The Record Locator Feature allows you to track the location of patients'
medical records. A record portion can be signed out of the Medical Records
Department to doctors (defined in the MIS Doctor Dictionary) or to in-house or
out-of-house recipients, such as departments, clinics, etc. (defined in the MRI
Locator Recipient Dictionary).

The various routines which make up this feature allow the Medical Records
Department to:

    *    Sign out, reserve and return record portions

    *    Monitor the location of record portions (e.g., list signed-out portions
         by recipient)

    *    Manage the record recipients (e.g., send reminder letters to recipients
         with overdue record portions)


Built-in controls help to manage the sign-out process. For example, you
cannot sign out a portion that is already signed out to another recipient.



Signing Out, Reserving and Returning Records

The following routines are used to assign record portions to recipients:

     *    Sign Out & Reserve Records

     *    Batch Sign Out

     *    Reserve Records

     *    Return & Sign Out Reserved Records

     *   Move Record (described in the chapter titled "The Incomplete Records
         Feature")


When the Incomplete Records and Record Locator features are LINKED (see
Appendix D), the Sign Out & Reserve Record, Batch Sign Out, Reserve Records,
and Return & Sign Out Record Routines are normally used to sign out, reserve
and return completed record portions only.

The Move Record Routine must be used to sign out incomplete record
portions. For more information on incomplete records, see the chapter
titled "The Incomplete Records Feature."

When these two features are NOT LINKED (see Appendix D), the Sign Out &
The Record Locator Feature (15)                                            Page 360



Reserve Record, Batch Sign Out, and Reserve Records, and Return & Sign Out
Records Routines are used to sign out both complete and incomplete record
portions.

In both cases (LINKED and NOT LINKED), the Move Record Routine also
allows you to temporarily bypass the reservation queue established by the
Sign Out & Reserve Record Routine and the Reserve Records Routine. You can
thus sign out a record portion to a recipient without a prior reservation (or
to a recipient other than the one at the top of the reservation queue). See
the Sign Out & Reserve Record Routine for a more detailed description of the
reservation queue.

When a record portion is signed out to a recipient, system users are alerted
to this action by the appearance of a Y after the PORTION SIGNED OUT
prompt in the following routines:

    *   Enter/Edit Patient                   *   Edit Unit Number

    *   Verify Daily Assignments             *   Delete/Restore Patients

    *   View Patients                        *   Unmerge Patients



Doctors as Recipients

As noted earlier, recipients may be entries in either the MRI Locator Recipient
Dictionary or the MIS Doctor Dictionary. This reduces the amount of work
required to maintain the Locator Recipient Dictionary, since it does not need
to include the data of doctors who are already defined elsewhere in the system.

However, recipients defined in the MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary have
two characteristics which are not defined in the MIS Doctor Dictionary:

    *   Each has a specified number of days on loan (which appears as the
        default value when a record is signed out to that recipient).

    *   Each can be further classified as in-house or out-of-house. Outguides
        print automatically for all recipients, but labels print only for
        out-of house recipients.


Therefore, these characteristics are defined for doctors (as a group) in the
MRI parameters. There, your MEDITECH Applications Consultant can specify the
default number of days on loan which appears when you sign out a record to a
doctor. In addition, he or she can set the parameters so that labels print
automatically when records are signed out to doctors, as well as to
out-of-house recipients.

Note that these parameters affect all doctors: you cannot have a different
default number of days on loan for each doctor, nor can you print out labels
for some doctors and not for others. (If you prefer to define these
characteristics for individual doctors, you can enter those doctors into the
The Record Locator Feature (15)                                        Page 361



MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary.)

For multifacility systems, these characteristics are prefix-specific. You can
thus have these parameters set to reflect the individual needs of each
facility.

Assume, for example, you have two facilities: Hospital A (which uses the
prefix A for its unit numbers) and Clinic B (which uses the prefix B).
You wish to have the default number of days on loan for doctors in the hospital
to be ten days, but you prefer to limit doctors in the clinic to five days.
Your MEDITECH Applications Consultant thus sets the parameter for the facility
using prefix A (the hospital) to ten days, and the parameter for the
facility using prefix B (the clinic) to five days.



Identifying Recipients

Since recipients can be entries in either the MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary
or the MIS Doctor Dictionary, you need to indicate which dictionary the system
should check when you identify a recipient.

To identify a recipient from the MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary:

    Enter its mnemonic as it appears in that dictionary. Assume, for example,
    that the Oncology Unit has the mnemonic ONC in the MRI Locator
    Recipient Dictionary. When you enter ONC, the system checks the MRI
    Locator Dictionary to make sure that this is a valid entry.

To identify a recipient from the MIS Doctor Dictionary:

    Enter a D or d followed by a space, followed by the doctor's
    mnemonic as it appears in that dictionary. Assume, for example, that Dr.
    Alice Stewart's mnemonic in the MIS Doctor Dictionary is STW. When you
    enter d STW, the system checks the MIS Doctor Dictionary to make sure
    that this is a valid entry.


LOOKUPs of both the MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary and the MIS Doctor
Dictionary are available at each prompt which requires you to enter a
recipient. To view the Locator Recipient Dictionary LOOKUP, simply press
<LOOKUP>. To view the MIS Doctor Dictionary LOOKUP, enter a D or d
followed by a space, then press <LOOKUP>. You can also use the name or
expanded LOOKUP, or both, to identify doctors. For more information, see the
section titled "Identifying Doctors."

When recipients' mnemonics appear on reports (e.g., View Record), Doctor
Dictionary entries are prefaced with a d followed by a space (as described
above).



Outguides and Labels
The Record Locator Feature (15)                                          Page 362




When portions are signed out to recipients, if outguides have been created via
the Enter/Edit Outguide & Label Routine, the system automatically prints them.
Labels (if created via that routine) are printed when records are signed out to
out-of house recipients. Note that labels may also be printed when records are
signed out to doctors (if specified by your parameters).

In addition, you can use the Print Duplicate Outguides & Label Routine to print
extra copies of outguides and labels for as many records as you want, if
necessary.



Monitoring Record Location

Several reports allow the Medical Records Department to locate records once
they are signed out or reserved, or both. The routines used to generate these
reports are:

     *   View Record                        *   List by Terminal Digit

     *   Audit Trail Inquiry                *   List by Recipient

     *   Recipient Inquiry                  *   List by Reservations


The View Record Routine allows you to check the location of a record which is
active in the Record Locator feature (i.e., is signed out or reserved).

The report generated by the Audit Trail Inquiry Routine lists all portions of
a record which have been signed out, reserved or returned. It also includes
portions which were reserved, but had their reservations cancelled. This
report lists the dates on which this activity took place and the recipients of
the portions. This information is kept after a record has been returned for
the period of time specified by your hospital (i.e., it is file-maintained
according to hospital-defined parameters), allowing you to check on a record's
activity even after the portions have been returned to the Medical Records
Department.

The Recipient Inquiry lists all record portions that are signed out to a
user-specified recipient. Recipients, as well as the Medical Records
Department, can use this list of outstanding records as a worksheet for
monitoring the progress of these records.

The other logs list the records active in the Record Locator feature, sorted by
terminal digit, recipient or reservation. The information provided by the
reservation list (a list of all records on reserve, sorted/selected by
recipient) can be used by the Medical Records Department to re-route record
portions more efficiently.
The Record Locator Feature (15)                                           Page 363



Managing Record Recipients

The following MRI routines allow the Medical Records Department to maintain
current files of eligible recipients and to send reminder letters to recipients
with overdue records:

    *    Enter/Edit Recipients               *   Enter/Edit Reminder Letters

    *    List Recipients                     *   List Reminder Letters

    *    Purge Recipients                    *   Print Reminder Letters


Since the MIS Doctor Dictionary also contains eligible recipients, you must use
the corresponding MIS routines (Enter/Edit Doctor and List Doctor) to maintain
these files. See the MIS User Manual for more information.



Summary of Record Locator Routines

The following is a table that lists

     *   actions you may want to take when monitoring a record portion's
         location

     *   routines allow you to carry them out




                    Monitoring a Record Portion's Location


     If you want to                                 Use the following routine


     *   Assign a portion to a recipient            *   Sign Out & Reserve Record

                                                    *   Batch Sign Out



         Reserve a portion for a recipient         *    Sign Out & Reserve Record

                                                    *   Reserve Records

                                                    (continued on next page)
The Record Locator Feature (15)                                         Page 364




             Monitoring a Record Portion's Location (continued)



    If you want to                                Use the following routine

        Print outguides and labels for            *   Sign Out & Reserve Record
        signed-out record portions
                                                  *   Batch Sign Out

                                                  *   Reserve Records

                                                  *   Print Duplicate Outguides
                                                      & Labels


    *   Check a portion back in to the            *   Return & Sign Out Reserved
        Medical Records Department                    Records

        When a recipient has reserved
        a portion, assign that portion
        to this recipient


    *   Cancel a reservation                      *   Sign Out & Reserve Records


    *   When the Record Locator and               *   Move Record
        Incomplete Records features are
        LINKED, transfer an incomplete
        record portion from one recpient to
        another

        Whether or not these two features are
        LINKED, bypass the reservation
        queue by signing out a portion to a
        recipient other than the one with the
        highest priority reservation (without
        cancelling reservations)


    *   Locate records that are signed out        *   View Record
        or reserved


    *   Follow the routes of all portions         *   Audit Trail Inquiry
        of a specific record signed out
        of the Medical Records Department
        (identify the date, time, recipient,
        action--SIGN OUT, RETURN, RESERVE,
        CANCEL--and the user who specified
The Record Locator Feature (15)                                              Page 365



          the action)


     *    List all record portions signed out       *    Recipient Inquiry
          to a specific recipent


     *    List all records active in the
          Record Locator feature, sorted by:

               -   Terminal digit (arranged          *   List by Terminal Digit
                   in terminal digit order)

               -   Recipient (on a separate          *   List by Recipient
                   page for each recipient,
                   with portions outstanding
                   longest appearing first)

               -Reservation (on a separate         * List by Reservations
                page for each recipient,
                with portions reserved first
                appearing first)
_______________________________________________________________________________




Where to Go for More Information

Further information about the Record Locator Feature is available as follows:

    *    The routines used to sign out, reserve and return record portions, as
         well as those routines which report the location of these records, are
         described in this chapter.

    *    The Move Record Routine, used to transfer record portions (both
         incomplete and complete) from one recipient to another, is described in
         the chapter titled "The Incomplete Records Feature."

    *    For more information on recipients, see the MRI Enter/Edit Locator
         Recipients Routine and the MIS Enter/Edit Doctor Routine.

    *    For more information on the Reminder Letters, see the chapter titled
         "Letters, Outguides and Labels: Dictionary Routines."
Setting Up Your Dictionaries (15.1)                                    Page 366



15.1:    Setting Up Your Dictionaries


The standard Additional Locator Routines Menu contains dictionaries that allow
you to define the

     *   recipients who are eligible to receive medical records

     *   text of your outguides and labels

     *   text of your reminder letters



Recipient Dictionary

The routines that allow you to create and maintain the Recipient Dictionary are
described in the sections titled:

     *   Enter/Edit Locator Recipients

     *   List Record Recipients

     *   Purge Recipients



Outguides and Labels

The routine that allows you to create and maintain the Outguide and Label
Dictionary is described in the section titled "Enter/Edit Outguide and Label"
in the chapter titled "Letters, Outguides and Labels: Dictionary Routines."



Reminder Letters

The Enter/Edit Reminder Letters, List Notification Letters and the Enter/Edit
Outguide and Label routines are described in the sections titled

     *   Enter/Edit Reminder Letter

     *   Listing Entries in Letter Dictionaries


These two sections appear in the chapter titled "Letters, Outguides and Labels:
Dictionary Routines."

For information about printing Reminder letters, see the section in this
chapter titled "Printing Reminder Letters."
Enter/Edit Locator Recipients (15.1.1)                                    Page 367



15.1.1:   Enter/Edit Locator Recipients


The MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary and the MIS Provider Dictionary jointly
define all eligible recipients of medical records. Recipients can be clinics,
hospital departments, doctors, etc., and can be located either in house or
outside the hospital.

You can use this routine to add new in-house or out-of-house recipients to the
MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary, or to change the information currently in
this dictionary. For information on how to add doctors to the MIS Provider
Dictionary and/or edit their data, see the MIS Module User Manual.

When you enter a recipient in the MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary, you
specify:

    *   a mnemonic code                      *   the number of days on loan

    *   whether or not you wish              *   the recipient's address
        the recipient to be active
        or inactive
                                             *   the recipient's telephone
    *   the recipient's name                     number

    *   whether or not the recipient
        is in-house

NOTE: Phone numbers are formatted automatically. Upon input of data into a
PHONE field where the MIS parameter is defined, NPR applications attempt to
format the phone number. If the number can be formatted, NPR echoes back the
formatted result which is then stored.

When "Recipients" Are Used in the Medical Records application

A record is signed out, reserved or returned via the following routines:

    *   Sign Out & Reserve Record

    *   Batch Sign Out

    *   Reserve Records

    *   Return & Sign Out Reserved Records

    *   Move Records

In each of these routines, you identify a recipient by choosing the appropriate
mnemonic from the MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary or the MIS Provider
Dictionary.

Lookups of both the MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary and the MIS Provider
Dictionary are available at each prompt which requires you to enter a
Enter/Edit Locator Recipients (15.1.1)                                        Page 368



recipient. To view the MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary, simply press
<Lookup>. To view the MIS Provider Dictionary, enter a d followed by a
space, then press <Lookup>. You can also use the name or extended Lookup.


Some or all of the recipient's information appears (exactly as it is entered
into the appropriate dictionary) on outguides and labels (if formatted), and in
the following routines:

    *   List Locator Records                    *    View Record
        by Terminal Digit
                                                 *   Print Reminder Letters
    *   List Locator Records
        by Recipient

    *   List Locator Records
        by Reservations

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                  Enter/Edit MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary                  |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Mnemonic:                                                                      |
|                                                                               |
|Active?                                                                        |
|                                                                               |
|Name:                                                                          |
|                                                                               |
|In House:           On Loan:                                                   |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|Street 1                                                                       |
|Street 2                                                                       |
|City                                                                           |
|State                                                                          |
|ZIP Code                                                                       |
|Phone                                                                          |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


MNEMONIC               Enter a mnemonic code unique to this entry (using
                       up to 12 characters of free text).

                       If this mnemonic is a new entry (i.e., it is not
                       already listed in this dictionary):

                               The following prompt appears:

                                             Not found.   New?
Enter/Edit Locator Recipients (15.1.1)                                    Page 369



                            Y appears. To enter this mnemonic in the
                            dictionary, press <Enter>. To return to the
                            MNEMONIC prompt without entering the mnemonic
                            (e.g., you make a typo in the entry), delete the
                            Y and enter N.


                        If the mnemonic is already defined in this
                        dictionary:

                            The system displays all previously entered data
                            associated with this entry. You may edit this
                            information as necessary.


                       Lookup:   Current entries in this dictionary (both active
                                 and inactive)

MNEMONIC                Enter a mnemonic code unique to the entry you want
                        to enter or edit, using up to 12 characters of free
                        text. A LOOKUP, containing all previously entered
                        recipients, is available.


ACTIVE?                 If you are entering a recipient for the first time,
                        Y appears. Press <Enter> to assign active
                        status to this recipient. Only active recipients appear
                        on the Lookup of recipients and are eligible to receive
                        records.

                        If you wish this recipient to be inactive, delete Y
                        and enter N.


NAME                    Enter the name of the recipient, using up to 30
                        characters.

NOTE:   The recipient's name appears throughout the Record Locator feature
        in the format in which it is entered here.

        For example, if you enter NEW ENGLAND DIAGNOSTICS after NAME, the
        Reminder Letter greeting will be "Dear NEW ENGLAND DIAGNOSTICS." If
        you prefer the Reminder Letter greeting to be "Dear New England
        Diagnostics," you must enter the recipient as "New England Diagnostics."


IN HOUSE                Enter Y if the recipient is in-house. Enter
                        N if the recipient is not in-house (i.e., is an
                        out-of-house recipient). Note that the Record Locator
                        reports allow you to list Locator information separately
Enter/Edit Locator Recipients (15.1.1)                                   Page 370



                       for in-house recipients, out-of-house recipients and
                       doctors (as well as for all three).

NOTE:   When a record is signed out to a recipient, the system automatically
        prints outguides for all recipients (i.e., all entries in the MRI
        Locator Recipient Dictionary and the MIS Doctor Dictionary). However,
        it prints labels only for Locator Recipient entries which are not
        in-house. (It will also print labels for doctors, if specified in your
        parameters).


DAYS ON LOAN           The number 7 appears. Press <Enter> to accept
                       7 as the number of days the recipient may keep the
                       record before it is considered overdue.

                       To change the number of days on loan, delete 7 and
                       enter the desired number.

                       When records are signed out via the Sign Out & Reserve
                       Record Routine, the system automatically displays the
                       DUE BACK date based on the number of DAYS ON LOAN
                       entered here.

NOTE:   The above fields (except for NAME) are all required fields, but
        the following six fields are optional. You may use any or all of the
        fields below to indicate information about the recipient's location.


STREET 1               Enter the recipient's street address, using up to 30
                       characters. Note that you may also use this field to
                       identify an in-house location (such as "Sherman
                       Pavilion").


STREET 2               Enter an additional address, if desired, using up
                       to 30 characters.


CITY                   Enter the name of the city in which the recipient is
                       located, using up to 20 characters.


STATE                  Enter the standard two character abbreviation of the
                       state in which the recipient is located.


ZIP CODE               Enter the recipient's 5 or 9 digit zip code in
                       standard zip code format (nnnnn or nnnnn-nnnn).
Enter/Edit Locator Recipients (15.1.1)                               Page 371



PHONE                 Enter the recipient's phone number(s), using up to
                      18 characters.
List Record Recipients (15.1.2)                                        Page 372



15.1.2:   List Record Recipients


This routine lists recipients which appear in the MRI Locator Recipient
Dictionary. You list the recipients by specifying their mnmeonics and whether
you wish to list active recipients, inactive recipients or all recipients (both
active and inactive).

The list can be reviewed to determine which of these MRI Locator Recipient
Dictionary entries, if any, should be edited, or whether new recipients need to
be entered (via the Enter/Edit Recipients routine).

The report lists, for each recipient:

    *   mnemonic code                   *   whether or not the
                                            recipient is in-house
    *   whether or not the
        recipient is active             *   the assigned number
        or inactive                         of days on loan

    *   name                            *   address

NOTE: Phone numbers are formatted automatically. Upon input of data into a
PHONE field where the MIS parameter is defined, NPR applications attempt to
format the phone number. If the number can be formatted, NPR echoes back the
formatted result which is then stored.

Note that the recipients are arranged in the dictionary by mnemonic as follows:

    *   first in numerical order

    *   then in alphabetical order

If mnemonics consist of numbers followed by letters, they are first arranged in
numerical order. Then, for each group starting with the same number, they are
arranged in alphabetical order. For example, 1E appears before 1S.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                     List MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary                     |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|From Recipient:                                                                |
|                                                                               |
|Thru Recipient:                                                                |
|                                                                               |
|Active?                                                                        |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
List Record Recipients (15.1.2)                                         Page 373



FROM RECIPIENT        BEGINNING appears. Press <Enter> to start
                      the list with the first recipient in the MRI Locator
                      Recipient Dictionary.

                      If you want to list specific recipients, delete
                      BEGINNING and enter the letter or mnemonic
                      identifying the recipient with which you wish the list
                      to begin. For example, when you enter L, the list
                      will begin with the first recipient listed under L
                      in the MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary.


THRU RECIPIENT        END appears. Press <Enter> to end the list
                      with the last recipient in the MRI Locator Recipient
                      Dictionary.

                      To list specific recipients, delete END and enter
                      the letter or mnemonic identifying the recipient with
                      which you wish the report to end. For example, when you
                      enter P, the report will end with the last recipient
                      under P in the dictionary.

                      To print the report for one particular recipient, enter
                      that recipient's mnemonic after both the FROM
                      RECIPIENT and THRU RECIPIENT prompts.


ACTIVE?               Y appears. Press <Enter> to list only the
                      active recipients from among the recipients entered
                      after the FROM RECIPIENT and THRU RECIPIENT
                      prompts.

                      To list only the inactive recipients from   among those
                      specified, delete Y and enter N. To list    both
                      the active and inactive recipients (i.e.,   ALL of the
                      recipients specified), delete Y and enter   ALL.
Purge Recipents (15.1.3)                                                   Page 374



15.1.3:   Purge Recipents


Use this routine to remove all inactive recipients from the MRI Locator
Recipient Dictionary who do not have record portions signed out to them.
The system warns you that, if you continue, these inactive recipients will be
erased from the system. You can choose either to continue (and purge the
inactive recipients) or to leave the routine without purging the inactive
recipients.

When you select this routine, you see the following warning:

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                           Purge Inactive Recipients                           |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|If you continue, this routine will erase from the system all inactive          |
|recipients, except those that have record portions signed out.                 |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+

    If you continue, this routine will erase from the system all inactive
    brecipients, except those that have record portions signed out




                              Are you sure?



To purge the inactive recipients, enter Y.    The following message then
appears:

                       Purging inactive recipients

When the purge is complete, the system returns you to the menu screen.
Enter N if you wish to leave the routine without purging the recipients.
Entering Record Locator Information (15.2)                               Page 375



15.2:    Entering Record Locator Information


This section describes the routines which allow you to specify the location of
medical record portions. The following routines are used to sign out, reserve
and return complete record portions:

     *    Sign Out & Reserve Record

     *    Batch Sign Out

     *    Reserve Records

     *    Return & Sign Out Reserved Records


Your hospital can assign the Sign Out & Reserve Record Routine to some users,
and the Batch Sign Out and Reserve Records routines to others. For example,
you may want to permit some users request records without giving them the
ability to sign out records.

When the Sign Out & Reserve Record Routine and the Batch Sign Out Routine is
used to sign out a record portion, the system automatically prints the
appropriate outguides and labels (if they have been previously formatted).
These outguides and labels are created in the Enter/Edit Outguides and Labels
Routine, and duplicates may be printed via the Print Duplicate Outguides and
Labels Routine.


NOTE:    The Move Record Routine may also be used to assign record portions
         to recipients. However, since it must be used to sign out
         incomplete record portions when the Record Locator and Incomplete
         Records features are LINKED, the description of the Move Record
         Routine is included in the chapter titled "The Incomplete Records
         Feature."
Sign Out & Reserve Record (15.2.1)                                    Page 376



15.2.1:   Sign Out & Reserve Record


You can use this routine to sign out and reserve records. If a recipient
is receiving several records at a time, you can use the Sign Out For One
Recipient routine to sign out the available records to that recipient. If you
want to allow users to request records without giving them the ability to sign
out records, you can assign the Reserve Records routine to them instead of this
Sign Out & Reserve Records routine.

The rest of this section describes the Sign Out & Reserve Records routine only.
Much of this information also applies to the Sign Out For One Recipient and the
Reserve Records routines.

An Enterprise Patient Identifier (EPI Field) has been created which can be used
to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

Signing Out Records

Use this routine to sign records out of the Medical Records Department. You
can sign out records to recipients either inside or outside the hospital
(doctors, clinics, other hospitals, etc.) A recipient can be an entry in
either the MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary or the MIS Provider Dictionary.

You may sign out records for up to seven days in the future. This allows
Medical Records Department personnel to pull records on one day for delivery
at a later date.

Once a record is signed out, you cannot sign it out to another recipient using
this routine until it is returned using the Return & Sign Out Reserved Records
routine. However, you may transfer a record from one recipient to another
without using these two routines. See the Move Records routine for more
information.

When the Record Locator and the Incomplete Records features are LINKED
(see Appendix D), records active in the Incomplete Records feature cannot
be signed out using the Sign Out & Reserve Records routine. In this case, you
must use the Move Records routine or the Sign Out For One Recipient Routine
to sign out incomplete records.

All records assigned to a new recipient using the Move Records routine appear
as signed out to that recipient in the Sign Out & Reserve Records routine.

Reserving Records

You can also use the Sign Out & Reserve Records routine to reserve a medical
record that is currently checked out, has a prior reservation, or is otherwise
unavailable (e.g., is incomplete).

If a record is already signed out (or unavailable):
Sign Out & Reserve Record (15.2.1)                                     Page 377




    The system displays the location of the record and allows you to enter
    your reservation.

    If you make a reservation, the system places it in a queue with other
    reservations for the same record, then displays the rank of your
    reservation (#) and the total number of reservations made for that
    record (T#).

    For example, if there are two prior reservations when you enter a
    reservation, yours becomes #3 (third in line) out of a T# of 3
    reservations. These numbers appear at the far right of the screen (at
    the end of the block of information related to the specified portion).

Reservation priority is established chronologically: the recipient who makes
the earliest reservation will be the first in line to receive the record when
it is returned.

Returning Reserved Records

When a reserved record is returned to the Medical Records Department, it is
signed in via the Return & Sign Out Reserved Records routine. At this point,
the user can:

    *   Assign that record to the recipient who is next in line to receive it
        (the default recipient)

    *   Delete the default recipient's reservation and return the record to the
        Medical Records Department

If you wish to temporarily bypass the reservation queue (i.e., sign out a
record to a recipient other than the one who is next in line to receive it,
without deleting the reservation), use the Move Records routine.

Outguides and Labels

To have the system print outguides and labels, you first format them via the
Enter/Edit Outguides & Label routine. When you sign out records using the Sign
Out & Reserve Records routine, the system automatically prints the appropriate
outguides and labels. If necessary, you can use the Print Duplicate Outguides
& Labels routine to print a duplicate outguide or label for any record portion
that has been signed out via the Sign Out & Reserve Records routine.

Outguides are printed for in-house recipients (defined in the MRI Locator
Recipient Dictionary) and for doctors (defined in the MIS Provider Dictionary).

Labels are printed for out-of-house recipients (also defined in the Locator
Recipient Dictionary). In addition, your system may print labels as well
as outguides for doctors (if directed to by your MRI parameters). For more
information, see the Enter/Edit Outguide & Label routine.
Sign Out & Reserve Record (15.2.1)                                     Page 378

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                 Sign Out & Reserve Records                                 |
|============================================================================================|
|                                                                                            |
|Recipient:               Days On Loan           cord:                                       |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                               .6                           |
|                                                                                            |
|                      Date Out Signed Out To                       Rsvn      #              |
|Portion               Due Back Comment                             Date     T#              |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


RECIPIENT             A recipient can be either an entry in the MRI
                      Locator Recipient Dictionary or an entry in the MIS
                      Doctor Dictionary.

                      To identify a recipient entered in the MRI Locator
                      Recipient Dictionary, enter that recipient's menmonic.
                      A Lookup of the MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary is
                      available.

                      To identify a doctor as a recipient, enter a D or a
                      d followed by a space, followed by the doctor's
                      menmonic. For example, if Dr. Welby is the recipient,
                      and his mnemonic is WEL, enter D WEL or d WEL.

                      Note that a Lookup of the MIS Doctor Dictionary is also
                      available. To access this Lookup:

                            1)   Enter D or d.

                            2)   Enter a blank space.

                            3)   Enter as much of the mnemonic as you can
                                 (to narrow down the range of choices). The
                                 list will then start with those doctors whose
                                 mnemonics begin with this letter or letters.
Sign Out & Reserve Record (15.2.1)                                     Page 379



                                 For example, if you enter D W or d W,
                                 and press <Lookup>, the Lookup starts with the
                                 first doctor in the MIS Doctor Dictionary whose
                                 mnemonic begins with W.

                            4)   Press <Lookup>.

                      Note that a Lookup of the MIS Doctor Dictionary is also
                      available. To access this Lookup, enter a D or d
                      followed by a space before you press <Lookup>.

Once you identify the recipient, the system displays the recipient's full name
and the default number of days the record will be on loan. Note that this
default number is specified for individual recipients via the Locator Recipient
Dictionary, and for doctors as a group via the MRI parameters.

You can choose to loan the record for a different length of time by editing the
DATE OUT and DUE BACK fields.


RECORD                To identify the record you want to sign out or
                      reserve, enter one of the following:

                           *   The patient's primary unit number.

                           *   The patient's social security number, prefaced
                               by a pound sign (#).

                           *   The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
                               prefaced by an E#.

                           *   The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                           *   The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                           *   The patient's home telephone number, prefaced
                               by T#.

                               If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                               number within your facility, it replaces the
                               social security number.

                               If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                               unit number, the system erases the social
                               security number, leaving this field blank.

                           *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                               in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                               The system then begins a search of the Master
                               Patient Index to identify the patient (see
Sign Out & Reserve Record (15.2.1)                                     Page 380



                               Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                               process).

                           *   An other number (i.e., a unit number
                               assigned by another facility or a number
                               assigned by a department, service, etc.).

                               As when you enter the social security number,
                               the system erases the other number, leaving
                               this field blank.


                      When you identify a patient by number or locate the
                      patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays
                      his/her primary unit number (if one has been assigned)
                      and name.


PORTION               Enter the name of the record portion you want to
                      sign out or reserve, using up to 20 characters. If this
                      is the first portion (or the only portion) you are
                      signing out or reserving, this is a required field.

                      A Lookup is available, but you can also specify a new
                      record portion. Portion names vary from health care
                      organization to organization--you may choose to use the
                      account number, the discharge date, or a name (such as
                      Volume I). In any case, it is important to use a
                      consistent format for the name of the portion. For
                      example, Volume I, Vol I and volume 1 are recognized as
                      three different names by the system.

                      The screen scrolls, if necessary, to accept all record
                      portions you want to sign out or reserve.

                      If this record portion is not signed out:

                          Default dates appear in the DATE OUT and DUE
                          BACK fields and the name of the recipient signing
                          out the record portion appears in the SIGNED OUT
                          TO field. The cursor moves to the DATE OUT
                          prompt to allow you to edit the date, if necessary.


                      If this record portion is already signed out:

                           The signed out and due back dates appear in the date
                           fields. The name of the recipient who now has the
                           record appears under SIGNED OUT TO and the
                           cursor moves to the RSVN DATE prompt. You can
Sign Out & Reserve Record (15.2.1)                                        Page 381



                               make a reservation, if desired, for the recipient
                               identified at the top of the screen.


When you file this routine, the system re-organizes the portions, if necessary,
so they appear in the following order (the ASCII collating sequence):

     1)    dated portions

     2)    numbered portions

     3)    named portions


For example, a portion specified as "12/09/93" appears before a portion
specified as "0000067", which in turn appears before a portion designated
"Volume I."

In addition, dated portions are arranged in chronological order (earliest date
first), numbered portions are arranged in numerical order (lowest number
first), and named portions are arranged in alphabetical order.


DATE OUT                The current date appears. Press <Enter> to sign
                        out the record on this date.

                        To change the date, delete the default date, then enter
                        the desired date using the standard date format or a
                        T combination (e.g., T+1 for tomorrow). You may
                        enter dates up to seven days in the past or future.


DUE BACK                The date the record is due back in the Medical
                        Records Department appears (calculated by the system
                        based on the number of days on loan). Press <Enter> to
                        keep this as the record's due date, or change the date
                        by first deleting the default date, then entering the
                        desired date. Use the standard date format or a T
                        combination (e.g., T+1 for tomorrow). The due date
                        must be T+1 or later.


SIGNED OUT TO           If the record portion is not already signed
                        out, the name of the recipient signing out the record
                        appears here when the PORTION is specified. The
                        cursor skips to the COMMENT prompt.

                        If the record portion is already signed out, the
                        name of the current recipient appears here and the
                        cursor moves to the RSVN DATE prompt to allow you to
Sign Out & Reserve Record (15.2.1)                                      Page 382



                        make a reservation.


COMMENT                 Enter comments about the record's location, using up
                        to 22 characters (e.g., Needed for audit). These
                        comments appear on the

                             *   View Records Routine screen

                             *   outguides and labels

                             *   Outstanding Records by Terminal Digit Report

                             *   Records List by Recipient Report

                             *   Recipient Inquiry Report


If the record portion is not already signed out, the cursor moves to the next
PORTION prompt. Continue to enter as many portions as necessary. The
screen will scroll, if necessary, to accommodate as many record portions as
you wish to enter.

NOTE:   Once the information has been filed, the system re-orders the
        portions, if necessary, in chronological order (if record portions are
        identified by date), in numerical order (if record portions are
        identified by number), or in alphabetical order (if record portions are
        identified by name).

        As a result, when you recall the data, the record portions will not
        necessarily be arranged in chronological order based on the sign out/
        reservation date.


When all portions have been entered and filed, the system clears the
information for the previous record and the cursor moves back to the RECORD
prompt. Enter a new patient name or unit number to sign out a new record to
the recipient.

To change to a new recipient, press <Enter> after the cursor has moved to the
RECORD prompt. The system clears the information for the previous
recipient and the cursor moves to the RECIPIENT prompt. Enter the new
recipient and follow the above procedures.


RSVN DATE               Enter the date you wish to sign out the record
                        portion which is currently unavailable, using the
                        standard date format or a T combination (e.g.,
                        T+1 for tomorrow).
Sign Out & Reserve Record (15.2.1)                                    Page 383



                      The system then displays the rank of your reservation
                      (#) and the total number of reservations made for
                      the record portion (T#). Note that rank is
                      determined chronologically: the earliest reservation
                      made is ranked number one.

                      Once you make the reservation, you cannot change the
                      reservation date (i.e., you cannot delete a date and
                      enter a new date). You may, however, cancel a
                      reservation by deleting the reservation date and leaving
                      the RSVN DATE field blank.
Return & Sign Out Reserved Records (15.2.2)                             Page 384



15.2.2:   Return & Sign Out Reserved Records


Use this routine to:

    *   Return records previously checked out of the Medical Records Department
        (via the Sign Out & Reserve Records routine or the Move Records
        routine).

        NOTE: If you signed out several portions for a medical record to one or
        more recipients, you can use this routine to return ALL portions at
        once. At the PORTION field, invoke a lookup, select *ALL* portions
        to return all of a patient's medical records portions at once.

    *   Sign out reserved records to recipients.

Returning a Record

When you identify a record portion, the system checks to see if it has been
reserved for a recipient. Note that recipients may be entries in either the
MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary or the MIS Provider Dictionary.

If the record portion has not been reserved:

    You can sign it back into the Medical Records Department via this routine.

If the record portion has been reserved:

    The system displays the mnemonic of the recipient with the top priority
    reservation. Provider Dictionary mnemonics are prefaced with a d
    followed by a space. For example, if Dr. Welby has the top priority
    reservation, and his mnemonic in the Provider Dictionary is WEL, it
    appears here as d WEL.

To return the record to the Medical Records Department, delete the
reservation. Note that this does not cancel the reservation (see below).

Signing Out a Reserved Record

When you identify a reserved record, the name of the recipient with the top
priority reservation appears. Doctor mnemonics are prefaced with a d (as
shown above). If you let this reservation stand (i.e., do not delete it), you
automatically assign the record to this recipient.

An Enterprise Patient Identifier number (EPI) has been created which can be
used to identify a patient across all facilities of an enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

You can return a reserved record (see above) by deleting the reservation. If
you later wish to sign out that record to the recipient, you first identify
the record portion (as though you were returning it). The recipient's name
Return & Sign Out Reserved Records (15.2.2)                            Page 385



and reservation then appear, and you can assign the record to this recipient.

Cancelling a Reservation

Deleting a reservation does not cancel it (e.g., the recipient's reservation
still appears on the Reservations List). To cancel a reservation, you must
delete the reservation date via the Sign Out & Reserve Records routine.

You may prefer to temporarily bypass the reservation queue (instead of
returning the record, canceling the reservation and signing the record out to a
recipient other than the default recipient). In this case, use the Move
Records routine.

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                             Return & Sign Out Reserved Records                             |
|============================================================================================|
|                                                                                            |
|Date of Return:                                                                             |
|                                                                                            |
|     Record        Portion               Date Out Due Back Reserved For Reserve Date        |
|                                                   Comment                                  |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|              .6                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|              .6                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|              .6                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|              .6                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|              .6                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


DATE OF RETURN        Enter the date the record is returned to the
                      Medical Records Department using the standard date
                      format or a T combination (e.g., T-1 for
                      yesterday).
Return & Sign Out Reserved Records (15.2.2)                            Page 386



RECORD                 To identify the record, enter one of the following:

                           *   The patient's primary unit number.

                           *   The patient's social security number, prefaced
                               by a pound sign (#).

                           *   The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
                               prefaced by an E#.

                           *   The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                           *   The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                           *   The patient's home telephone number, prefaced
                                by T#.

                               If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                               number within your facility, it replaces the
                               social security number.

                               If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                               unit number, the system erases the social
                               security number, leaving this field blank.

                           *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                               in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                               The system then begins a search of the Master
                               Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                               Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                               process).

                           *   An other number (i.e., a unit number
                               assigned by another facility or a number
                               assigned by a department, service, etc.).

                               As when you enter the social security number,
                               the system erases the other number.


                      When you identify a patient by number or locate the
                      patient via a search of the MPI, the primary unit number
                      (if assigned) appears in the RECORD field, and the
                      patient's name appears to the right, above the
                      PORTION field. The cursor moves to the PORTION
                      field.

                      If the patient does not have a primary unit number, the
                      RECORD field will be blank.
Return & Sign Out Reserved Records (15.2.2)                                 Page 387



PORTION               Enter the name of the record portion being returned.
                      A Lookup is available.

                      If there are no reservations for this record portion:

                              The cursor moves to the next RECORD prompt to
                              allow you to return the next record. The screen
                              scrolls, if necessary, to accept all portions you
                              want to enter.

                      If there is a reservation for this record portion:

                              The cursor moves to the SIGN OUT prompt.


RESERVED FOR          If the record has been reserved by another
                      recipient, the name of that recipient, a SIGN OUT
                      date and a DUE BACK date appear. The cursor moves
                      to the SIGN OUT prompt.

                      In the case of entries from the MIS Doctor Dictionary,
                      the recipient's mnemonic is prefaced with a d
                      followed by a space (e.g., d WEL).


SIGN OUT              The date displayed is the same as the DATE OF
                      RETURN. Press <Enter> to sign out the record to the
                      recipient on this date. The cursor then moves to the
                      next RECORD prompt.

                      To change the sign out date, delete the default date and
                      enter the desired date using the standard date format or
                      a T combination (e.g., T+1 for tomorrow).

                      NOTE:    When you edit the SIGN OUT date, you must
                               also edit the DUE BACK date to conform to the
                               DAYS ON LOAN specified in the Record Recipient
                               Dictionary.

                                For example:

                               *   The DAYS ON LOAN for a recipient is 7.

                               *   You change the SIGN OUT date from 10/09/99
                                   to 10/14/99.

                               *   You must then change the DUE DATE from 10/16/99
                                   to 10/21/99 to allow the recipient to keep the
                                   record for 7 days without being considered
                                   delinquent.
Return & Sign Out Reserved Records (15.2.2)                           Page 388




                      To return the record instead of signing it out, delete
                      the default SIGN OUT date and press <Enter> to move to
                      the next RECORD prompt.


                      Note that deleting the SIGN OUT date overrides the
                      reservation, but does not cancel it.

                      If you prefer to cancel the reservation, use the Sign
                      Out & Reserve Record Routine.


DUE BACK              The date the record is due back in the Medical
                      Records Department appears (calculated by the system
                      based on the number of DAYS ON LOAN assigned to the
                      recipient). To assign this as the record's due date,
                      press <Enter>.

                      To change this date, delete the default date, and enter
                      the appropriate date using the standard date format or a
                      T combination (e.g., T+1 for tomorrow). The
                      DUE BACK date must be T+1 or later.


COMMENT               If you sign out a reserved record to the next
                      recipient, You can edit the comment using up to 33
                      characters of free text.
Sign Out for One Recipient (Batch Sign Out) (15.2.3)                   Page 389



15.2.3:    Sign Out for One Recipient (Batch Sign Out)


This routine can be used to sign out several available records at one time
to one recipient. Once a record has been signed out, it cannot be signed out
to another recipient until it has been returned.

Related Routines:    The Move Record routine

When the Record Locator and Incomplete Records features are LINKED, records
active in the Incomplete Records Feature cannot be signed out using the
Sign Out & Reserve Records routine. In this case, use the Move Record routine
to sign out incomplete records.

For more information, see the on-line documentation for the Move Record
Routine.

Signing Out Records

First, identify a recipient, and then identify all records and record portions
that are to be signed out to that recipient.

Also, enter the date signed out and the date due back, if the portions are
not signed out. If desired, a comment may also be added.

The information entered in the Batch Sign Out routine appears in the following
routines:

     *    Sign Out & Reserve Record

     *    Return & Sign Out Reserved Records

     *    List by Terminal Digit

     *    List by Recipient

     *    List Reservation

     *    Recipient Inquiry

Unavailable Records

If a record contains portions that are still signed out or portions for which
the first ranked reservation is another recipient, this routine cannot be used
to sign out that record.

If the record becomes unavailable between the time a record is identified and
the time the screen is filed, or during the filing (when it is not possible
to lock the record), the system prevents the record from being signed out.
Sign Out for One Recipient (Batch Sign Out) (15.2.3)                   Page 390

+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                 Sign Out For One Recipient                                 |
|============================================================================================|
|                                                                                            |
|Recipient                Days On Loan                      Default Date Out                 |
|                                                           Default Date Back                |
|                                                           Default Comment                  |
|Use Default Dates And Comment?                                                              |
|                                                                                            |
|     Record       Portion               Date Out Due Back Comment                           |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                           .6                               |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                           .6                               |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                            .6                              |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                            .6                              |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                           .6                               |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                                                            |
|                                                           .6                               |
|                                                                                            |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


RECIPIENT             A recipient can be either an entry in the MRI
                      Locator Recipient Dictionary or an entry in the MIS
                      Doctor Dictionary.

                      To identify a recipient entered in the MRI Locator
                      Recipient Dictionary, enter that recipient's menmonic.
                      A Lookup of the MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary is
                      available.

                      To identify a doctor as a recipient, enter a D or a
                      d followed by a space, followed by the doctor's
                      menmonic. For example, if Dr. Welby is the recipient,
                      and his mnemonic is WEL, enter D WEL or d WEL.

                      Note that a Lookup of the MIS Doctor Dictionary is also
                      available. To access this Lookup:

                            1)   Enter D or d.

                            2)   Enter a blank space.

                            3)   Enter as much of the mnemonic as you can
Sign Out for One Recipient (Batch Sign Out) (15.2.3)                     Page 391



                                 (to narrow down the range of choices). The
                                 list will then start with those doctors whose
                                 mnemonics begin with this letter or letters.
                                 For example, if you enter D W or d W,
                                 and press <Lookup>, the Lookup starts with the
                                 first doctor in the MIS Doctor Dictionary whose
                                 mnemonic begins with W.

                            4)   Press <Lookup>.

                      Note that a Lookup of the MIS Doctor Dictionary is also
                      available. To access this Lookup, enter a D or d
                      followed by a space before you press <Lookup>.


Once you identify the recipient, the system displays the recipient's full name
and the default number of days the record will be on loan. Note that this
default number is specified for individual recipients via the Locator Recipient
Dictionary, and for all doctors via the MRI parameters.

You can choose to loan the record for a different length of time by editing the
DATE OUT and DUE BACK fields.


USE DEFAULT DATES AND COMMENT?

                      Enter Y if you want the same DATE OUT, DATE BACK
                      and COMMENT to default for each record that you
                      are signing out with this "batch sign out"
                      routine.

                      Enter N if you want to specify a different DATE
                      OUT, DATE BACK and COMMENT for each record you
                      are signing out.


DATE OUT              The current date appears. Press <Enter> to sign
                      out the record on this date.

                      To change the date, delete the default date, then enter
                      the desired date using the standard date format or a
                      T combination (e.g., T+1 for tomorrow). You may
                      enter dates up to seven days in the past or future.


DUE BACK              The date the record is due back in the Medical
                      Records Department appears (calculated by the system
                      based on the number of days on loan). Press <Enter> to
                      keep this as the record's due date, or change the date
                      by first deleting the default date, then entering the
                      desired date. Use the standard date format or a T
Sign Out for One Recipient (Batch Sign Out) (15.2.3)                   Page 392



                      combination (e.g., T+1 for tomorrow).   The due date
                      must be T+1 or later.


SIGNED OUT TO         If the record portion is not already signed
                      out, the name of the recipient signing out the record
                      appears here when the PORTION is specified. The
                      cursor skips to the COMMENT prompt.

                      If the record portion is already signed out, the
                      name of the current recipient appears here and the
                      cursor moves to the RSVN DATE prompt to allow you to
                      make a reservation (see the following page).


COMMENT:                Enter comments regarding the record's
                        location, using up to 33 characters (e.g., Needed for
                        audit). These comments appear on the:

                             *   View Records Routine screen
                             *   outguides and labels
                                 (see Enter/Edit Outguide and Label)
                             *   List by Terminal Digit report
                             *   List by Recipient report
                             *   Recipient Inquiry report


                      If the record portion is not already signed out, the
                      cursor moves to the next PORTION prompt. Continue
                      to enter as many portions as necessary. The screen will
                      scroll, if necessary, to accommodate as many record
                      portions as you wish to enter.

NOTE:                  Once the information has been filed, the system
                      re-orders the portions, if necessary, in chronological
                      order (if record portions are identified by date), in
                      numerical order (if record portions are identified by
                      number), or in alphabetical order (if record portions
                      are identified by name).

                      As a result, when you recall the data, the record
                      portions will not necessarily be arranged in
                      chronological order based on the sign out/ reservation
                      date.

                      When all portions have been entered and filed, the
                      system clears the information for the previous record
                      and the cursor moves back to the RECORDprompt.
                      Enter a new patient name or unit number to sign out a
                      new record to the recipient.
Sign Out for One Recipient (Batch Sign Out) (15.2.3)                       Page 393




                      To change to a new recipient, press <Enter> after the
                      cursor has moved to the RECORD prompt. The system
                      clears the information for the previous recipient and
                      the cursor moves to the RECIPIENT prompt. Enter the
                      new recipient and follow the above procedures.


RECORD                To identify an available record you want to sign
                      out, enter one of the following:

                            *   primary unit number

                            *   social security number, prefaced by #

                            *   patient's name   (starts the MPI search)

                            *   other number


                      For more information, see the section titled
                      "Identifying Patients."

                            *   The patient's primary unit number.

                            *   The patient's social security number, prefaced
                                by a pound sign (#).

                                If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                                number within your facility, it replaces the
                                social security number.

                                If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                                unit number, the system erases the social
                                security number, leaving this field blank.

                            *   The patient's name, using up to 30 characters,
                                in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                                The system then begins a search of the Master
                                Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                                Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                                process).

                            *   An other number (i.e., a unit number
                                assigned by another facility or a number
                                assigned by a department, service, etc.).

                                As when you enter the social security number,
                                the system erases the other number, leaving
Sign Out for One Recipient (Batch Sign Out) (15.2.3)                    Page 394



                               this field blank.


                      When you identify a patient by number or locate the
                      patient via a search of the MPI, the primary unit number
                      (if assigned) appears in the RECORD field, and the
                      patient's name appears to the right, above the
                      PORTION field. The cursor moves to the PORTION
                      field.

                      If the patient does not have a primary unit number, the
                      RECORD field will be blank.


                      If the Record is Unavailable

                      If the record has a portion that was signed out or
                      reserved before you selected the Batch Sign Out Routine,
                      you cannot enter that record at the RECORD prompt.
                      Instead, the following message appears:

                                  Record has portion signed out or reserved


PORTION               Enter the name of the   record portion you want to
                      sign out, using up to   20 characters. If this is the
                      first portion (or the   only portion) you are signing out
                      or reserving, this is   a required field.

                      A Lookup is available, but you can also specify a new
                      record portion. Portion names vary from hospital to
                      hospital--you may choose to use the account number, the
                      discharge date, or a name (such as Volume I). In any
                      case, it is important to use a consistent format for the
                      name of the portion. For example, Volume I, Vol I and
                      volume 1 are recognized as three different names by the
                      system.


To sign out another portion for a record, you can identify the record again at
the next RECORD prompt and specify an additional portion at the PORTION
prompt.


DATE OUT              The current date appears.    To sign out the record on
                      this date, press <Enter>.

                      To change the date, delete the default date, then enter
                      the desired date. You can enter dates up to seven days
                      in the past or future.
Sign Out for One Recipient (Batch Sign Out) (15.2.3)                   Page 395




                      To change the date, delete the default date, then enter
                      the desired date using the standard date format or a
                      T combination (e.g., T+1 for tomorrow). You may
                      enter dates up to seven days in the past or future.


DUE BACK              The date the record is due back in the Medical
                      Records Department appears (based on the number of days
                      on loan). To keep this as the record's due date, press
                      <Enter>. To change the date, delete the default date
                      and enter a future date.

                      Use the standard date format or a Tcombination
                      (e.g., T+1 for tomorrow). The due date must be
                      T+1 or later.


COMMENT               Enter comments about the record's location, using up
                      to 22 characters (e.g., Needed for audit). These
                      comments appear on the

                            *   View Records Routine screen

                            *   outguides and labels

                            *   Outstanding Records by Terminal Digit Report

                            *   Records List by Recipient Report

                            *   Recipient Inquiry Report


If the record becomes unavailable between the time you identify a record and
the time you file the screen, or during the filing (when it is not possible
to lock the record), the following message appears:

                  Record [unit number] portion [portion]
                  unavailable - not signed out

This means that you will not be able to sign out the record.
Reserve Record (15.2.4)                                                Page 396



15.2.4:    Reserve Record


You can use this routine to reserve portions of a specified record for a
recipient, but not to sign them out. If a portion has already been signed
out, the date it is due back also appears. You can view the ranking of each
reservation and the total number of reservations.

Your health care organization may want to assign this routine to some users who
would be able to request record portions without allowing them to change the
location of a record.

You can enter the recipient, record, portion, date due back and reservation
date as you would for the Sign Out & Reserve Record routine.

An Enterprise Patient Identifier (EPI Field) has been created which can be used
to identify a patient across all facilities of the enterprise. It will be
assigned by the system when an external medical record number or an internal
MPI is assigned to the patient.

In fact, this routine functions in the same manner as the Sign Out & Reserve
Record routine in that you identify recipients and records and specify record
portions.

When you enter a reservation date for a portion, the following information
appears:

     *    rank of your reservation

     *    total number of reservations made for the record's portion

When a reservation is made, the system places it in a queue with other
reservations for the same record. Reservation priority is established
chronologically; the recipient for whom the earliest reservation exists is the
first in line to receive the record when it is returned.

As in the case of information entered in the Sign Out & Reserve Record routine,
the information entered in the Reserve Record routine appears in the following
routines:

     *    Sign Out & Reserve Record

     *    Return & Sign Out Reserve Record

     *    List by Terminal Digit

     *    List by Recipient

     *    List Reservations

     *    Recipient Inquiry
Reserve Record (15.2.4)                                               Page 397

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                                Reserve Records                                |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|Recipient:                                                                     |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|Record:                                                                        |
|                                                                               |
|                    .6                                                         |
|                                                                               |
|                                  Rsvn                                         |
|Portion                Due Back   Date        #   T#                           |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


RECIPIENT             A recipient can be either an entry in the MRI
                      Locator Recipient Dictionary or an entry in the MIS
                      Doctor Dictionary.

                      To identify a recipient entered in the MRI Locator
                      Recipient Dictionary, enter that recipient's menmonic.
                      A Lookup of the MRI Locator Recipient Dictionary is
                      available.

                      To identify a doctor as a recipient, enter a D or a
                      d followed by a space, followed by the doctor's
                      menmonic. For example, if Dr. Welby is the recipient,
                      and his mnemonic is WEL, enter D WEL or d WEL.

                      Note that a Lookup of the MIS Doctor Dictionary is also
                      available. To access this Lookup:

                           1)   Enter D or d.

                           2)   Enter a blank space.

                           3)   Enter as much of the mnemonic as you can
                                (to narrow down the range of choices). The
                                list will then start with those doctors whose
                                mnemonics begin with this letter or letters.
                                For example, if you enter D W or d W,
Reserve Record (15.2.4)                                                Page 398



                                and press <Lookup>, the Lookup starts with the
                                first doctor in the MIS Doctor Dictionary whose
                                mnemonic begins with W.

                           4)   Press <Lookup>.

                      Note that a Lookup of the MIS Doctor Dictionary is also
                      available. To access this Lookup, enter a D or d
                      followed by a space before you press <Lookup>.


RECORD                To identify the record you want to reserve, enter
                      one of the following:

                          *   The patient's primary unit number.

                          *   The patient's social security number prefixed by
                              a pound sign (#).

                          *   The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
                              prefaced by an E#.

                          *   The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                          *   The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.

                          *   The patient's home telephone number, prefaced
                               by T#.

                          *   The patient's name, using up to 25 characters,
                              in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                              The system then begins a search of the Master
                              Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                              Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                              process).

                          *   An other number (i.e., a department or
                              service number with your facility's prefix).

                              If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                              number (i.e., a unit number with your facility's
                              prefix), it appears on the screen in place of
                              the other number.

                              If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                              unit number, the system erases the other
                              number, leaving this field blank.

                      When you identify a patient by number or locate the
                      patient via a search of the MPI, the system displays
Reserve Record (15.2.4)                                                 Page 399



                      his/her primary unit number (if one has been assigned)
                      and name.


PORTION               If portions have already been defined for this
                      record, the portion names appear in this field.   If a
                      portion is

                           *   not signed out,

                                    -today's date appears in the RSVN DATE
                                     field

                                    -the calculated rank of this appointment,
                                    if you file this reservation, appears

                                    -the total number of reservations for this
                                     portion appears in the T# field

                           *   are signed out, the name and due back date for
                               each portion appear (In this case, you simply
                               add your reservation to the queue)

                           *   are reserved for another recipient, the number
                               of prior reservations appears in the T#
                               field


                      If no portions have been specified, enter the name
                      of the record portion you want to sign out or reserve,
                      using up to 20 characters.

                      If this is the first portion (or the only portion) you
                      are signing out or reserving, this is a required field.

                      A Lookup is available, but you can also specify a new
                      record portion. Portion names vary from hospital to
                      hospital--you may choose to use the account number, the
                      discharge date, or a name (such as Volume I). In any
                      case, it is important to use a consistent format for the
                      name of the portion. For example, Volume I, Vol I and
                      volume 1 are recognized as three different names by the
                      system.

                      The screen scrolls, if necessary, to accept all of the
                      record portions you wish to sign out or reserve.

                      After you file this screen and identify this record
                      again, the portions now appear in the following order
                      (the ASCII collating sequence):
Reserve Record (15.2.4)                                               Page 400




                           1)   dated portions
                           2)   numbered portions
                           3)   named portions

                      For example, a portion specified as "12/09/93" appears
                      before a portion designated "0000067", which in turn
                      appears before a portion designated "Volume I."

                      In addition, dated portions are arranged in
                      chronological order (earliest date first), numbered
                      portions are arranged in numerical order (lowest number
                      first), and named portions are arranged in alphabetical
                      order.


RSVN DATE             Enter the date you wish to sign out the record
                      portion which is currently unavailable, using the
                      standard date format or a T combination (e.g.,
                      T+1 for tomorrow).

                      The system then displays the rank of your reservation
                      (#) and the total number of reservations made for
                      the record portion (T#). Note that rank is
                      determined chronologically: the earliest reservation
                      made is ranked number one.

                      Once you make the reservation, you cannot change the
                      reservation date (i.e., you cannot delete a date and
                      enter a new date). You may, however, cancel a
                      reservation by deleting the reservation date and leaving
                      the RSVN DATE field blank.
Print Duplicate Outguides & Labels (15.2.5)                             Page 401



15.2.5:   Print Duplicate Outguides & Labels


Outguides and labels print automatically when a record portion is signed out of
the Medical Records Department. This routine allows you to print a duplicate
outguide and label for any record portion that has been signed out.

You first identify all records and portions for which you need duplicate
outguides and labels. The system then prints the duplicates on the device
specified when the outguides and labels were created via the Enter/Edit
Outguide and Label Routine.

+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|                      Print Duplicate Outguides & Labels                       |
|===============================================================================|
|                                                                               |
|     Record        Portion                                                     |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
|                                                                               |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------+


RECORD                 To identify the record, enter one of the following:

                            *   The patient's primary unit number.

                            *   The patient's social security number prefixed by
                                a pound sign (#).

                            *   The patient's enterprise patient identifier,
                                prefaced by an E#.

                            *   The patient's account number, prefaced by A#.

                            *   The patient's policy number, prefaced by P#.
Print Duplicate Outguides & Labels (15.2.5)                            Page 402




                           *   The patient's home telephone number, prefaced
                               by T#.

                           *   The patient's name, using up to 10 characters,
                               in LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME format.

                               The system then begins a search of the Master
                               Patient Index to identify the patient (see
                               Appendix B for a detailed description of this
                               process).

                           *   An other number (i.e., a department or
                               service number with your facility's prefix).

                               If the patient has been assigned a primary unit
                               number (i.e., a unit number with your facility's
                               prefix), it appears on the screen in place of
                               the other number.

                               If the patient has not been assigned a primary
                               unit number, the system erases the other
                               number.

                      When you identify a patient by number or locate the
                      patient via a search of the MPI, the cursor moves to the
                      PORTION prompt. If the patient does not have a
                      primary unit number, the RECORD field will be blank.


PORTION               Enter the name of the record portion for which you
                      wish to print the duplicate outguide and label. A
                      Lookup is available.

                      The cursor moves to the next RECORD prompt to allow
                      you to identify another record. The screen will scroll,
                      if necessary, to accept as many records and portions as
                      you wish to enter.


After you enter the last record portion, press <Enter>. The "Print on"
prompt then appears at the bottom of the screen. Enter the mnemonic of the
device on which you wish to print the report. Enter S to print the report
on your screen.
Reporting Record Locator Information (15.3)                             Page 403



15.3:   Reporting Record Locator Information